Rigol MSO8074A oscilloscope

Product's Documents

Below are documents related to this product, you can read online or download:
User Manual Other Documents
  • Rigol MSO8000A series datasheet - (English) Download
MSO8074A photo

Rigol MSO8000A series user guide

This is the main product document for model MSO8074A.

The file format is pdf, 406 pages, you can download this manual here .

background
background
Guaranty and Declaration
Copyright
© 2023 RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark Information
RIGOL
®
is the trademark of RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Notices
RIGOL products are covered by P.R.C. and foreign patents, issued and pending.
RIGOL reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications and pricing
policies at the company's sole decision.
Information in this publication replaces all previously released materials.
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
RIGOL shall not be liable for either incidental or consequential losses in connection with the
furnishing, use, or performance of this manual, as well as any information contained.
Any part of this document is forbidden to be copied, photocopied, or rearranged without prior
written approval of RIGOL.
Product Certification
RIGOL guarantees that this product conforms to the national and industrial standards in China as
well as the ISO9001:2015 standard and the ISO14001:2015 standard. Other international standard
conformance certifications are in progress.
Contact Us
If you have any problem or requirement when using our products or this manual, please contact
RIGOL.
Website:
http://www.rigol.com
background
Section Description Page
List of Figures................................................................................................................................. X
List of Tables...............................................................................................................................XIV
1 Safety Requirement .........................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Summary .................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Safety Notices and Symbols ............................................................................................................ 3
1.3 Measurement Category .....................................................................................................................3
1.4 Ventilation Requirement ................................................................................................................... 4
1.5 Working Environment ........................................................................................................................4
1.6 Care and Cleaning ...............................................................................................................................6
1.7 Environmental Considerations ........................................................................................................6
2 MSO8000A Series Overview .........................................................................................8
3 Document Overview .....................................................................................................10
4 Quick Start ........................................................................................................................12
4.1 General Inspection ............................................................................................................................12
4.2 Appearance and Dimensions ........................................................................................................13
4.3 To Prepare for Use .............................................................................................................................13
4.3.1 To Adjust the Supporting Legs ........................................................................................13
4.3.2 To Connect to AC Power ....................................................................................................14
4.3.3 Turn-on Checkout ................................................................................................................ 14
4.3.4 Fuse Replacement ................................................................................................................15
4.3.5 To Connect the Probe .........................................................................................................16
4.3.6 Function Inspection .............................................................................................................19
4.3.7 Probe Compensation .......................................................................................................... 20
4.4 Front Panel Overview .......................................................................................................................21
4.5 Rear Panel Overview ........................................................................................................................ 23
4.6 Front Panel Function Overview .................................................................................................... 25
4.6.1 Vertical ..................................................................................................................................... 25
4.6.2 Horizontal ............................................................................................................................... 26
4.6.3 Wave .........................................................................................................................................28
4.6.4 Trigger ......................................................................................................................................29
4.6.5 Clear ..........................................................................................................................................29
4.6.6 Auto .......................................................................................................................................... 29
4.6.7 RUN/STOP ...............................................................................................................................30
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
I
background
4.6.8 Single ........................................................................................................................................30
4.6.9 Multifunction knob ..............................................................................................................30
4.6.10 Function Menu ......................................................................................................................30
4.6.11 Touch Lock Key ......................................................................................................................31
4.6.12 Quick key (shortcut key) .................................................................................................... 31
4.7 User Interface ..................................................................................................................................... 32
4.8 Touch Screen Controls .....................................................................................................................37
4.8.1 Tap .............................................................................................................................................37
4.8.2 Pinch & Stretch ..................................................................................................................... 38
4.8.3 Drag .......................................................................................................................................... 38
4.8.4 Rectangle Drawing ...............................................................................................................39
4.9 Parameter Setting Method ............................................................................................................ 40
4.10 To Use the Security Lock .................................................................................................................42
4.11 To Use the Built-in Help System ...................................................................................................42
4.12 To View the Option Information and the Option Installation ........................................... 44
5 To Set the Vertical System .......................................................................................... 47
5.1 To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel ................................................................................47
5.2 To Adjust the Vertical Scale ........................................................................................................... 48
5.3 Vertical Expansion .............................................................................................................................49
5.4 To Adjust the Vertical Offset ..........................................................................................................50
5.5 Channel Coupling ..............................................................................................................................51
5.6 BW Limit ...............................................................................................................................................52
5.7 Probe Ratio ..........................................................................................................................................52
5.8 Input Impedance ...............................................................................................................................54
5.9 Waveform Invert ................................................................................................................................54
5.10 To Set the Probe ................................................................................................................................ 55
5.10.1 Passive Probe .........................................................................................................................55
5.10.2 Active Probe ...........................................................................................................................56
5.11 Amplitude Unit ...................................................................................................................................56
5.12 Channel Delay .................................................................................................................................... 57
5.13 To Set the Bias ....................................................................................................................................57
5.14 Channel Label .....................................................................................................................................58
6 To Set the Horizontal System .................................................................................... 60
6.1 To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base ........................................................................................... 60
6.2 To Adjust the Horizontal Position ................................................................................................61
6.3 Delayed Sweep ...................................................................................................................................62
7 To Set the Sample System .......................................................................................... 65
II
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
7.1 Timebase Mode .................................................................................................................................65
7.1.1 YT Mode ..................................................................................................................................65
7.1.2 XY Mode ..................................................................................................................................65
7.1.3 ROLL Mode .............................................................................................................................68
7.2 Acquisition Mode ..............................................................................................................................68
7.2.1 Normal .....................................................................................................................................68
7.2.2 Average ....................................................................................................................................69
7.2.3 Peak ...........................................................................................................................................70
7.2.4 High Resolution .................................................................................................................... 70
7.3 Sampling Mode ................................................................................................................................. 70
7.4 Sample Rate ........................................................................................................................................71
7.5 LA Sample Rate ..................................................................................................................................72
7.6 Memory Depth ...................................................................................................................................72
7.7 LA Memory Depth ............................................................................................................................ 74
7.8 Anti-Aliasing ....................................................................................................................................... 74
7.9 Horizontal Expansion .......................................................................................................................74
8 To Trigger the Oscilloscope ........................................................................................76
8.1 Trigger Source .................................................................................................................................... 76
8.2 Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level ..................................................................................................... 77
8.3 Trigger Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 78
8.4 Trigger Coupling ................................................................................................................................80
8.5 Trigger Holdoff ...................................................................................................................................80
8.6 Noise Rejection ..................................................................................................................................81
8.7 Trigger Type .........................................................................................................................................81
8.7.1 Edge Trigger ...........................................................................................................................82
8.7.2 Pulse Trigger .......................................................................................................................... 83
8.7.3 Slope Trigger ..........................................................................................................................85
8.7.4 Video Trigger ......................................................................................................................... 89
8.7.5 Pattern Trigger .......................................................................................................................91
8.7.6 Duration Trigger ................................................................................................................... 94
8.7.7 Timeout Trigger .................................................................................................................... 97
8.7.8 Runt Trigger ........................................................................................................................... 99
8.7.9 Window Trigger ..................................................................................................................101
8.7.10 Delay Trigger ....................................................................................................................... 103
8.7.11 Setup/Hold Trigger ........................................................................................................... 106
8.7.12 Nth Edge Trigger ................................................................................................................108
8.7.13 RS232 Trigger (Option) ....................................................................................................110
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
III
background
8.7.14 I2C Trigger (Option) ..........................................................................................................112
8.7.15 SPI Trigger (Option) .......................................................................................................... 116
8.7.16 CAN Trigger (Option) ....................................................................................................... 118
8.7.17 FlexRay Trigger (Option) ..................................................................................................121
8.7.18 LIN Trigger (Option) ..........................................................................................................123
8.7.19 I2S Trigger (Option) .......................................................................................................... 126
8.7.20 MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option) ....................................................................................129
8.8 Zone Trigger ..................................................................................................................................... 133
8.9 Trigger Output Connector ........................................................................................................... 135
9 Operations and Measurements ..............................................................................137
9.1 Math Operation ...............................................................................................................................137
9.1.1 Addition ................................................................................................................................ 138
9.1.2 Subtraction ...........................................................................................................................139
9.1.3 Multiplication ......................................................................................................................140
9.1.4 Division ..................................................................................................................................141
9.1.5 FFT ...........................................................................................................................................143
9.1.6 "AND" Operation ...............................................................................................................147
9.1.7 "OR" Operation .................................................................................................................. 149
9.1.8 "XOR" Operation ................................................................................................................151
9.1.9 "NOT" Operation ................................................................................................................152
9.1.10 Intg ..........................................................................................................................................154
9.1.11 Diff .......................................................................................................................................... 155
9.1.12 Sqrt ......................................................................................................................................... 156
9.1.13 Lg (Base 10 Exponential) .................................................................................................157
9.1.14 Ln .............................................................................................................................................158
9.1.15 Exp ...........................................................................................................................................160
9.1.16 Abs ..........................................................................................................................................161
9.1.17 Low Pass ................................................................................................................................162
9.1.18 High Pass .............................................................................................................................. 163
9.1.19 Band Pass ..............................................................................................................................165
9.1.20 Band Stop .............................................................................................................................166
9.1.21 AX+B ...................................................................................................................................... 167
9.1.22 Avg ..........................................................................................................................................169
9.1.23 Math Operation Label ......................................................................................................170
9.2 Auto Measurement ........................................................................................................................ 171
9.2.1 Quick Measurement after AUTO .................................................................................. 171
9.2.2 Measurement Parameter .................................................................................................173
IV
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
9.2.3 Measurement Settings .....................................................................................................181
9.2.4 Remove the Measurement Result ................................................................................185
9.2.5 Statistical Function ............................................................................................................ 186
9.2.6 All Measurement ................................................................................................................186
9.3 Cursor Measurement .....................................................................................................................186
9.3.1 Manual Mode ......................................................................................................................188
9.3.2 Track Mode .......................................................................................................................... 193
9.3.3 XY Mode ............................................................................................................................... 196
9.3.4 Measure Mode ....................................................................................................................198
10 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter ............................................199
10.1 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) ...............................................................................................................199
10.1.1 To Enable or Disable DVM Measurement ................................................................. 199
10.1.2 To Select the Measurement Source .............................................................................200
10.1.3 To Select Measurement Mode ...................................................................................... 200
10.1.4 To Set the Limits .................................................................................................................200
10.2 Frequency Counter .........................................................................................................................201
10.2.1 To Enable or Disable the Frequency Counter ...........................................................201
10.2.2 To Select the Measurement Source .............................................................................202
10.2.3 To Select the Measurement Item ................................................................................. 202
10.2.4 To Set the Resolution ........................................................................................................202
10.2.5 To Clear Count .................................................................................................................... 202
10.2.6 To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function ...........................................................202
11 Power Analysis (Option) ............................................................................................204
11.1 Power Quality ...................................................................................................................................204
11.2 Ripple ..................................................................................................................................................207
12 Histogram Analysis .....................................................................................................209
12.1 To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function ......................................................................209
12.2 To Select the Histogram Type .....................................................................................................210
12.3 To Select the Histogram Source ................................................................................................ 210
12.4 To Set the Measurement Items ..................................................................................................210
12.5 To Set the Histogram Height ......................................................................................................211
12.6 To Set the Histogram Range .......................................................................................................211
12.7 To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function ........................................................................211
12.8 To Reset ..............................................................................................................................................212
13 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) .......................................213
13.1 Real-time Eye Analysis .................................................................................................................. 213
13.1.1 To Enable or Disable the Eye Analysis Function ......................................................214
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
V
background
13.1.2 To Select the Source of the Eye Diagram .................................................................. 214
13.1.3 Threshold Settings .............................................................................................................214
13.1.4 To Set Clock Recovery ......................................................................................................215
13.1.5 To Enable or Disable the Eye Measurement Result ................................................216
13.1.6 To Reset Color .....................................................................................................................217
13.2 Jitter Analysis ....................................................................................................................................217
13.2.1 To Enable or Disable the Jitter Function ....................................................................218
13.2.2 To Select the Jitter Source .............................................................................................. 218
13.2.3 Threshold Settings .............................................................................................................218
13.2.4 To Set Clock Recovery ......................................................................................................219
13.2.5 To Set the Jitter Measurement ...................................................................................... 219
13.2.6 To Enable or Disable the Jitter Measurement Result .............................................222
13.2.7 To Reset Statistics .............................................................................................................. 222
14 Digital Channel .............................................................................................................223
14.1 To Select the Digital Channel ......................................................................................................223
14.2 To Enable/Disable the Digital Channel ....................................................................................224
14.3 To Set the Threshold ......................................................................................................................225
14.4 Auto Arrangement Setting ..........................................................................................................225
14.5 To Set the Waveform Display Size ............................................................................................ 226
14.6 To Set the Label ...............................................................................................................................226
14.7 Group Setting ...................................................................................................................................226
14.8 Waveform Color of the Digital Channel ..................................................................................227
15 Protocol Decoding ......................................................................................................229
15.1 Parallel Decoding ............................................................................................................................229
15.2 RS232 Decoding (Option) ............................................................................................................236
15.3 I2C Decoding (Option) ..................................................................................................................243
15.4 SPI Decoding (Option) ..................................................................................................................248
15.5 LIN Decoding (Option) ................................................................................................................. 254
15.6 CAN Decoding (Option) ...............................................................................................................261
15.7 FlexRay Decoding (Option) ......................................................................................................... 266
15.8 I2S Decoding (Option) ..................................................................................................................271
15.9 1553B Decoding (Option) ............................................................................................................276
16 Reference Waveform ..................................................................................................280
16.1 To Enable the Ref Function ..........................................................................................................280
16.2 To Select the Reference Channel ...............................................................................................280
16.3 To Select the Ref Source ...............................................................................................................280
16.4 To Adjust the Ref Waveform Display ....................................................................................... 281
VI
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
16.5 To Save to Internal Memory ........................................................................................................281
16.6 To Clear the Display of the Reference Waveform ................................................................281
16.7 To View Details of the Reference Waveform ......................................................................... 281
16.8 To Reset the Reference Waveform ............................................................................................282
16.9 To Set the Color of the Reference Waveform ....................................................................... 282
16.10 To Set the Label ...............................................................................................................................282
16.11 To Export to Internal or External Memory ............................................................................. 283
16.12 To Import from Internal or External Memory ....................................................................... 283
17 Pass/Fail Test ................................................................................................................. 284
17.1 To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function .................................................................284
17.2 To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation ........................................................................284
17.3 To Select the Source ...................................................................................................................... 284
17.4 To Create a Mask .............................................................................................................................285
17.5 To Save a Mask ................................................................................................................................ 286
17.6 To Load a Mask ................................................................................................................................286
17.7 To Set the Output Form of the Test Results ...........................................................................286
17.8 To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics of the Test Results .......................... 287
17.9 To Reset Statistics ........................................................................................................................... 288
18 Waveform Recording and Playing .........................................................................289
18.1 Common Settings ...........................................................................................................................289
18.2 Record Options ................................................................................................................................290
18.3 Play Options ..................................................................................................................................... 292
19 Search and Navigation Function ............................................................................293
19.1 Search Function ...............................................................................................................................293
19.2 Navigation Function ...................................................................................................................... 295
20 Display Control .............................................................................................................297
20.1 To Select the Display Type ...........................................................................................................297
20.2 To Set the Persistence Time ........................................................................................................ 297
20.3 To Set the Waveform Intensity ...................................................................................................298
20.4 To Set the Screen Grid ...................................................................................................................298
20.5 To Set the Grid Brightness ...........................................................................................................299
20.6 Show Scale ........................................................................................................................................ 299
20.7 Color Grade .......................................................................................................................................299
20.8 Waveform Freeze ............................................................................................................................299
21 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) ..........................................301
21.1 To Output Basic Waveforms ........................................................................................................301
21.1.1 To Output Sine ....................................................................................................................301
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
VII
background
21.1.2 To Output Square .............................................................................................................. 303
21.1.3 To Output Ramp .................................................................................................................303
21.1.4 To Output Pulse ..................................................................................................................304
21.1.5 To Output DC ...................................................................................................................... 304
21.1.6 To Output Noise .................................................................................................................305
21.1.7 Sinc ......................................................................................................................................... 305
21.1.8 Exp.Rise ................................................................................................................................. 306
21.1.9 Exp.Fall ...................................................................................................................................307
21.1.10 ECG ..........................................................................................................................................307
21.1.11 Gauss ......................................................................................................................................308
21.1.12 Lorentz ...................................................................................................................................309
21.1.13 Haversine ..............................................................................................................................310
21.2 To Output the Arbitrary Waveform .......................................................................................... 311
21.2.1 To Load the Channel and Waveform ...........................................................................311
21.2.2 To Create the Waveforms ................................................................................................312
21.2.3 To Edit the Waveforms .....................................................................................................314
21.3 Modulation ....................................................................................................................................... 316
21.3.1 AM ...........................................................................................................................................316
21.3.2 FM ........................................................................................................................................... 317
21.3.3 FSK .......................................................................................................................................... 318
21.4 Sweep ..................................................................................................................................................319
21.5 Burst .................................................................................................................................................... 321
22 Store and Load ............................................................................................................. 323
22.1 Storage System ................................................................................................................................323
22.2 Storage Type .....................................................................................................................................323
22.2.1 Binary Data Format (.bin) ................................................................................................326
22.3 Load Type .......................................................................................................................................... 329
22.4 Internal Storage and Load ........................................................................................................... 329
22.5 External Storage and Load ...........................................................................................................331
22.6 Disk Management .......................................................................................................................... 332
22.6.1 To Select the File Type ......................................................................................................333
22.6.2 To Create a Folder ..............................................................................................................333
22.6.3 To Delete a File or Folder ................................................................................................337
22.6.4 To Copy and Paste a File or Folder .............................................................................. 338
22.6.5 To Rename a File or Folder .............................................................................................339
22.6.6 To Clear the Internal Memory Safely .......................................................................... 339
22.7 Factory Settings ...............................................................................................................................339
VIII
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
23 System Utility Function Setting ..............................................................................359
23.1 Remote Interface Configuration ................................................................................................359
23.1.1 LAN Configuration ............................................................................................................ 359
23.1.2 To Set mDNS ....................................................................................................................... 362
23.1.3 To Set the Host Name ......................................................................................................362
23.1.4 To Set the GPIB address ...................................................................................................362
23.1.5 To Set HDMI .........................................................................................................................362
23.1.6 USB Connection ................................................................................................................. 363
23.2 System-related .................................................................................................................................363
23.2.1 Beeper ....................................................................................................................................363
23.2.2 Language ..............................................................................................................................363
23.2.3 System Information ...........................................................................................................363
23.2.4 Power On .............................................................................................................................. 364
23.2.5 Power Status ........................................................................................................................364
23.2.6 Aux Output .......................................................................................................................... 364
23.2.7 Ref Clock ...............................................................................................................................365
23.2.8 Help Menu ........................................................................................................................... 365
23.2.9 SelfCal ....................................................................................................................................366
23.2.10 Auto Config ..........................................................................................................................367
23.2.11 Print Setting .........................................................................................................................367
23.2.12 Email .......................................................................................................................................369
23.2.13 Key Locker ............................................................................................................................ 370
23.2.14 Quick Operation .................................................................................................................371
23.2.15 Screen Saver ........................................................................................................................ 374
23.2.16 Self-check ............................................................................................................................. 375
23.2.17 System Time ........................................................................................................................ 376
23.2.18 Default Option ....................................................................................................................377
24 Remote Control ............................................................................................................379
24.1 Remote Control via USB ...............................................................................................................380
24.2 Remote Control via LAN ...............................................................................................................380
24.3 Remote Control via GPIB ..............................................................................................................381
25 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................383
26 Appendix ........................................................................................................................385
26.1 Appendix A: Options and Accessories .................................................................................... 385
26.2 Appendix B: Warranty ................................................................................................................... 386
Index.............................................................................................................................................387
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
IX
background
List of Figures
Figure 4.1 Front View ..............................................................................................................
13
Figure 4.2 Vertical View ......................................................................................................... 13
Figure 4.3 To Adjust the Supporting Legs .......................................................................14
Figure 4.4 To Connect to AC Power ...................................................................................14
Figure 4.5 Fuse Replacement ...............................................................................................16
Figure 4.6 Connect the Passive Probe .............................................................................. 17
Figure 4.7 To Connect the Probe Head to the Preamp of the Active Probe ....... 17
Figure 4.8 Connect the Active Probe ................................................................................ 18
Figure 4.9 Connect the logic probe ...................................................................................19
Figure 4.10 To Use the Compensation Signal ................................................................19
Figure 4.11 Square Waveform Signal ................................................................................20
Figure 4.12 Probe Compensation ...................................................................................... 21
Figure 4.13 Front Panel Overview ...................................................................................... 21
Figure 4.14 Rear Panel Overview ........................................................................................23
Figure 4.15 User Interface .....................................................................................................32
Figure 4.16 Tap Gesture .........................................................................................................37
Figure 4.17 Pinch & Stretch Gesture .................................................................................38
Figure 4.18 Drag Gesture ......................................................................................................38
Figure 4.19 Rectangle Drawing Gesture(a) ..................................................................... 39
Figure 4.20 Rectangle Drawing Gesture(b) .....................................................................39
Figure 4.21 Numeric Keypad ................................................................................................41
Figure 4.22 To Use the Security Lock ................................................................................42
Figure 4.23 Help Information .............................................................................................. 43
Figure 5.1 Waveform Invert ..................................................................................................55
Figure 5.2 Zero Offset ............................................................................................................ 57
Figure 5.3 Label Editing Interface ...................................................................................... 58
Figure 6.1 Delayed Sweep Mode ........................................................................................63
X
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 7.1 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation ......................... 66
Figure 7.2 Waveforms before Averaging .........................................................................69
Figure 7.3 Waveforms after 128 Times of Averaging ..................................................69
Figure 7.4 Memory Depth .................................................................................................... 73
Figure 8.1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory ......................................78
Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram of Trigger Holdoff ........................................................81
Figure 8.3 Positive Pulse Width/Negative Pulse Width ..............................................83
Figure 8.4 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time ................................................. 86
Figure 8.5 Pattern Trigger ..................................................................................................... 92
Figure 8.6 Virtual Keypad for Pattern Setting ................................................................93
Figure 8.7 Duration Trigger .................................................................................................. 95
Figure 8.8 Timeout Trigger ................................................................................................... 97
Figure 8.9 Runt Trigger .......................................................................................................... 99
Figure 8.10 Delay Trigger ....................................................................................................104
Figure 8.11 Setup/Hold Trigger ........................................................................................106
Figure 8.12 Nth Edge Trigger ............................................................................................ 108
Figure 8.13 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Protocol ...................................................110
Figure 8.14 Schematic Diagram of I2C Protocol .........................................................112
Figure 8.15 Virtual Keypad for Binary Data Bit ........................................................... 114
Figure 8.16 Virtual Keypad for Hex Data Bit ................................................................115
Figure 8.17 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus ........................................................................116
Figure 8.18 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus ........................................................ 118
Figure 8.19 Sample Position ..............................................................................................120
Figure 8.20 Frame Format of FlexRay Bus .................................................................... 121
Figure 8.21 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus .......................................................... 124
Figure 8.22 Sample Position ..............................................................................................126
Figure 8.23 Sequential Chart of I2S Bus ........................................................................127
Figure 8.24 Formats of the Command Word, Data Word, and Status Word of
the 1553B Bus ....................................................................................................................
130
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
XI
background
Figure 8.25 Trigger Output Connector ...........................................................................135
Figure 9.1 Time Parameters ............................................................................................... 174
Figure 9.2 Voltage Parameters ..........................................................................................179
Figure 9.3 Manual Cursor Measurement Example .....................................................193
Figure 9.4 Lissajous Schematic Diagram .......................................................................198
Figure 11.1 Connection Diagram of Power Quality Analysis ..................................206
Figure 11.2 Connection Diagram of Ripple Analysis .................................................208
Figure 13.1 Diagram of Eye Measurement Parameters ............................................217
Figure 15.1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding .............................................. 230
Figure 15.2 Parallel Decoding Event Table ....................................................................234
Figure 15.3 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus ................................................ 236
Figure 15.4 Schematic Diagram of Negative Logic ................................................... 236
Figure 15.5 I2C Serial Bus ...................................................................................................243
Figure 15.6 I2C Decoding Event Table ........................................................................... 246
Figure 15.7 SPI Serial Bus ................................................................................................... 249
Figure 15.8 SPI Decoding Event Table ............................................................................253
Figure 15.9 LIN Decoding Event Table ........................................................................... 257
Figure 15.10 Sample Position ............................................................................................262
Figure 15.11 CAN Decoding Event Table ...................................................................... 264
Figure 15.12 Sample Position ............................................................................................268
Figure 15.13 FlexRay Decoding Event Table ................................................................ 269
Figure 15.14 I2S Decoding Event Table ......................................................................... 274
Figure 15.15 1553B Decoding Event Table ...................................................................277
Figure 18.1 Recording Process ..........................................................................................290
Figure 21.1 Symmetry Definition .....................................................................................303
Figure 21.2 Duty Cycle Definition ....................................................................................304
Figure 21.3 Sinc ......................................................................................................................306
Figure 21.4 Exp.Rise ..............................................................................................................306
Figure 21.5 Exp.FallExp.Fall .................................................................................................307
XII
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 21.6 ECG ......................................................................................................................308
Figure 21.7 Gauss ..................................................................................................................309
Figure 21.8 Lorentz ...............................................................................................................310
Figure 21.9 Haversine .......................................................................................................... 311
Figure 21.10 AM .....................................................................................................................316
Figure 21.11 FM .....................................................................................................................317
Figure 22.1 Disk Management Interface .......................................................................333
Figure 22.2 Create a Folder ................................................................................................334
Figure 23.1 Network Connection Setting Interface ...................................................359
Figure 23.2 SelfCal ................................................................................................................ 367
Figure 24.1 Search for the Available Device .................................................................382
Figure 24.2 Confirm the Available Device .....................................................................382
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
XIII
background
List of Tables
Table 4.1 Front Panel Description .......................................................................................
21
Table 5.2 BW Limit ...................................................................................................................52
Table 5.3 Probe Ratio ..............................................................................................................53
Table 9.1 Window Function ................................................................................................146
Table 9.2 Logic "AND" Operation .................................................................................... 147
Table 9.3 Logic "OR" Operation ........................................................................................149
Table 9.4 Logic "XOR" Operation .....................................................................................151
Table 9.5 Logic "NOT" Operation .....................................................................................152
Table 22.4 Factory Settings ................................................................................................339
XIV
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
1
Safety Requirement
1.1 General Safety Summary
Please review the following safety precautions carefully before putting the instrument
into operation so as to avoid any personal injury or damage to the instrument and
any product connected to it. To prevent potential hazards, please follow the
instructions specified in this manual to use the instrument properly.
Use Proper Power Cord.
Only the exclusive power cord designed for the instrument and authorized for
use within the destination country could be used.
Ground the Instrument.
The instrument is grounded through the Protective Earth lead of the power cord.
To avoid electric shock, it is essential to connect the earth terminal of the power
cord to the Protective Earth terminal before connecting any inputs or outputs.
Connect the Probe Correctly.
If a probe is used, the probe ground lead must be connected to earth ground.
Do not connect the ground lead to high voltage. Improper way of connection
could result in dangerous voltages being present on the connectors, controls or
other surfaces of the oscilloscope and probes, which will cause potential hazards
for operators.
Observe All Terminal Ratings.
To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markers on the instrument
and check your manual for more information about ratings before connecting
the instrument.
Use Proper Overvoltage Protection.
Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach
the product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an
electric shock.
Do Not Operate Without Covers.
Do not operate the instrument with covers or panels removed.
Do Not Insert Objects into the Air Outlet.
Do not insert objects into the air outlet, as doing so may cause damage to the
instrument.
Use the Proper Fuse.
Please use the specified fuses.
Safety Requirement
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
1
background
Avoid Circuit or Wire Exposure.
Do not touch exposed junctions and components when the instrument is
powered on.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures.
If you suspect that any damage may occur to the instrument, have it inspected
by RIGOL authorized personnel before further operations. Any maintenance,
adjustment or replacement especially to circuits or accessories must be
performed by RIGOL authorized personnel.
Provide Adequate Ventilation.
Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the instrument,
which would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument
well ventilated and inspect the air outlet and the fan regularly.
Do Not Operate in Wet Conditions.
To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never operate the
instrument in a humid environment.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
To avoid personal injuries or damage to the instrument, never operate the
instrument in an explosive atmosphere.
Keep Instrument Surfaces Clean and Dry.
To avoid dust or moisture from affecting the performance of the instrument,
keep the surfaces of the instrument clean and dry.
Prevent Electrostatic Impact.
Operate the instrument in an electrostatic discharge protective environment to
avoid damage induced by static discharges. Always ground both the internal and
external conductors of cables to release static before making connections.
Use the Battery Properly.
Do not expose the battery (if available) to high temperature or fire. Keep it out of
the reach of children. Improper change of a battery (lithium battery) may cause
an explosion. Use the RIGOL specified battery only.
Handle with Caution.
Please handle with care during transportation to avoid damage to keys, knobs,
interfaces, and other parts on the panels.
WARNING
Equipment meeting Class A requirements may not offer adequate protection to broadcast
services within residential environment.
Safety Requirement
2
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
1.2 Safety Notices and Symbols
Safety Notices in this Manual:
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not avoided, will result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not avoided, could result
in damage to the product or loss of important data.
Safety Notices on the Product:
DANGER
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in injury
or hazard immediately.
WARNING
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in
potential injury or hazard.
CAUTION
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in
damage to the product or other devices connected to the product.
Safety Symbols on the Product:
Hazardous
Voltage
Safety Warning Protective Earth
Terminal
Chassis Ground Test Ground
1.3 Measurement Category
Measurement Category
This instrument can make measurements in Measurement Category I.
WARNING
This instrument can only be used for measurements within its specified measurement
categories.
Safety Requirement
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
3
background
Measurement Category Definitions
Measurement category I is for measurements performed on circuits not directly
connected to MAINS. Examples are measurements on circuits not derived from
MAINS, and specially protected (internal) MAINS derived circuits. In the latter
case, transient stresses are variable. Thus, you must know the transient withstand
capability of the equipment.
Measurement category II is for measurements performed on circuits directly
connected to low voltage installation. Examples are measurements on household
appliances, portable tools and similar equipment.
Measurement category III is for measurements performed in the building
installation. Examples are measurements on distribution boards, circuit-breakers,
wiring (including cables, bus-bars, junction boxes, switches and socket-outlets) in
the fixed installation, and equipment for industrial use and some other
equipment. For example, stationary motors with permanent connection to a
fixed installation.
Measurement category IV is for measurements performed at the source of a
low-voltage installation. Examples are electricity meters and measurements on
primary overcurrent protection devices and ripple control units.
1.4 Ventilation Requirement
This instrument uses a fan to force cooling. Please make sure that the air inlet and
outlet areas are free from obstructions and have free air. When using the instrument
in a bench-top or rack setting, provide at least 10 cm clearance beside, above and
behind the instrument for adequate ventilation.
CAUTION
Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the instrument, which
would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument well ventilated and
inspect the air outlet and the fan regularly.
1.5 Working Environment
Temperature
Operating: 0℃ to +50℃
Non-operating: -30℃ to +70℃
Humidity
Operating:
Below +30℃: ≤90%RH (without condensation)
+30℃ to +40℃: ≤75% RH (without condensation)
Safety Requirement
4
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
+40℃ to +50℃: ≤45%RH (without condensation)
Non-operating:
Below +65℃: ≤90%RH (without condensation)
WARNING
To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never operate the
instrument in a humid environment.
Altitude
Operating: below 3 km
Non-operating: below 15 km
Protection Level Against Electric Shock
ESD ±8kV
Installation (Overvoltage) Category
This product is powered by mains conforming to installation (overvoltage) category II.
WARNING
Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach the
product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an electric shock.
Installation (Overvoltage) Category Definitions
Installation (overvoltage) category I refers to signal level which is applicable to
equipment measurement terminals connected to the source circuit. Among these
terminals, precautions are done to limit the transient voltage to a low level.
Installation (overvoltage) category II refers to the local power distribution level which
is applicable to equipment connected to the AC line (AC power).
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 2
Pollution Degree Definition
Pollution Degree 1: No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs.
The pollution has no effect. For example, a clean room or air-conditioned office
environment.
Pollution Degree 2: Normally only nonconductive pollution occurs. Temporary
conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected. For example, indoor
environment.
Pollution Degree 3: Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that
becomes conductive due to condensation occurs. To be found in industrial
Safety Requirement
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
5
background
environment or construction sites (harsh environments). For example, sheltered
outdoor environment.
Pollution Degree 4: The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused by
conductive dust, rain, or snow. For example, outdoor areas.
Safety Class
Class 1 – Grounded Product
1.6 Care and Cleaning
Care
Do not store or leave the instrument where it may be exposed to direct sunlight for
long periods of time.
Cleaning
Clean the instrument regularly according to its operating conditions.
1. Disconnect the instrument from all power sources.
2. Clean the external surfaces of the instrument with a soft cloth dampened with mild
detergent or water. Avoid having any water or other objects into the chassis via the
heat dissipation hole. When cleaning the LCD, take care to avoid scarifying it.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the instrument, do not expose it to caustic liquids.
WARNING
To avoid short-circuit resulting from moisture or personal injuries, ensure that the
instrument is completely dry before connecting it to the power supply.
1.7 Environmental Considerations
The following symbol indicates that this product complies with the WEEE Directive
2002/96/EC.
The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or
human health. To avoid the release of such substances into the environment and
avoid harm to human health, we recommend you to recycle this product
appropriately to ensure that most materials are reused or recycled properly. Please
contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information.
Safety Requirement
6
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
You can click on the following link
https://int.rigol.com/services/services/declaration
to download the latest version of the RoHS&WEEE certification file.
Safety Requirement
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
7
background
2
MSO8000A Series Overview
MSO8000A series digital oscilloscope developed by RIGOL is a medium and high-end
mixed signal digital oscilloscope designed on UltraVision II technical platform. With
the analog bandwidth up to 2 GHz, the digital oscilloscope integrates 7 instruments
into one, with 500 Mpts memory depth, sound waveform display effects, excellent
waveform capture rate, and powerful data analysis functions. Many of its
specifications have reached the top level in the industry. Meanwhile, it supports the
real-time eye diagram measurement and jitter analysis. Its cost-effective features and
high performance make it prominent as the 2 GHz mixed signal digital oscilloscope.
Main Features:
Analog channel bandwidth: 750 MHz, 1.5 GHz, and 2 GHz
4 analog channels and 1 EXT channel,16 digital channels (required to purchase
the probe)
Up to 10 GSa/s real-time sample rate
Max. memory depth: 500 Mpts (std.)
Waveform capture rate 600,000 wfms/s
Recording and playback for a maximum of 450,000 frames of hardware real-time
and ceaseless waveforms
Integrates 7 independent instruments into 1, including digital oscilloscope, 16-
channel logic analyzer, spectrum analyzer, arbitrary waveform generator (option),
digital voltmeter, 6-digit frequency counter and totalizer, and protocol analyzer
(option)
Provides auto measurement for up to 41 waveform parameters, offers full-
memory hardware measurement function
Various math operations, built-in powerful FFT analysis and peak search
functions
Histogram analysis (standard)
Independent search, navigation key, and event table
Real-time eye diagram and jitter analysis software (option)
Advanced built-in power analysis software (option)
MSO8000A Series Overview
8
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
User-defined one-key quick operation
10.1-inch capacitive multi-touch screen, 256-level intensity grading display, with
color persistence
Multiple interfaces available: USB HOST & DEVICE, LAN (LXI), HDMI, TRIG OUT,
and USB-GPIB
Web Control remote command
Unique online upgrade
Compact and portable industrial design, easy to operate
MSO8000A Series Overview
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
9
background
3
Document Overview
This manual gives you a quick review about the front and rear panel of MSO8000A
series, the user interface, and the basic operation method.
TIP
For the latest version of this manual, download it from the official website of RIGOL (
http://
www.rigol.com
).
Publication Number
UGA31100-1110
Format Conventions in this Manual:
1. Key
The front panel key is denoted by menu key icon. For example,
indicates
the "Default" key.
2. Menu
The menu items are denoted by the format of "Menu Word (Bold) + Character
Shading". For example,
System denotes the "System" menu item under the
menu.
3. Operation Procedures:
">" denotes the next step of operation. For example, > System denotes that
first press , and then press the System key.
4. Connector
The connectors on the front or rear panel are usually denoted by the format of
"Connector Name (Bold) + Square Brackets (Bold)". For example, [TRIG OUT].
5. Knob
Label Knob Label Knob
Horizontal
SCALE
Horizontal Scale
Knob
Vertical
SCALE
Vertical Scale
Knob
Horizontal
POSITION
Horizontal
Position Knob
Vertical
OFFSET
Vertical Offset
Knob
Document Overview
10
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Label Knob Label Knob
Wave Vertical
SCALE
Vertical Scale
Knob
Trigger
LEVEL
Trigger Level
Knob
Wave Vertical
POSITION
Wave Vertical
Position Knob
Multifunction
knob
Content Conventions in this Manual:
MSO8000A series includes the following models. Unless otherwise specified, this
manual takes MSO8204A as an example to illustrate the functions and operation
methods of the MSO8000A series.
Model
Max. Analog
Bandwidth
No. of Digital
Channels
No. of
Analog
Channels
No. of AWG
Channels
MSO8074A 750 MHz 16 4 2
MSO8154A 1.5 GHz 16 4 2
MSO8204A 2 GHz 16 4 2
Document Overview
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
11
background
4
Quick Start
This chapter introduces the precautions when using the oscilloscope for the first time,
the front/rear panels of the oscilloscope, the user interface, touch screen controls, and
how to use the built-in help system.
4.1 General Inspection
1. Inspect the packaging
If the packaging has been damaged, do not dispose the damaged packaging or
cushioning materials until the shipment has been checked for completeness and
has passed both electrical and mechanical tests.
The consigner or carrier shall be liable for the damage to the instrument resulting
from shipment. RIGOL would not be responsible for free maintenance/rework or
replacement of the instrument.
2. Inspect the instrument
In case of any mechanical damage, missing parts, or failure in passing the electrical
and mechanical tests, contact your RIGOL sales representative.
3. Check the accessories
Please check the accessories according to the packing lists. If the accessories are
damaged or incomplete, please contact your RIGOL sales representative.
Quick Start
12
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
4.2 Appearance and Dimensions
Figure 4.1 Front View
134.2mm
Figure 4.2 Vertical View
4.3 To Prepare for Use
4.3.1 To Adjust the Supporting Legs
Adjust the supporting legs properly to use them as stands to tilt the oscilloscope
upwards for stable placement of the oscilloscope as well as better operation and
observation. Users can also fold the supporting legs when the instrument is not in
use for easier storage or shipment, as shown in the figure below.
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
13
background
Supporting Legs
(a) To unfold the supporting legs
(b) To fold the supporting legs
Figure 4.3 To Adjust the Supporting Legs
4.3.2 To Connect to AC Power
The input AC power requirements of the oscilloscope are 100 V-240 V, 45 Hz-440 Hz.
Please use the power cord provided in the accessories to connect the oscilloscope to
the AC power source, as shown in the figure below.
Power Cord Connector
Figure 4.4 To Connect to AC Power
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, ensure that the instrument is correctly grounded.
4.3.3 Turn-on Checkout
When the oscilloscope is connected to power, press the Power key at the lower-left
corner of the front panel to start the oscilloscope. (You can also press > System
> Power status, and select "Switch On". After the instrument is connected to power
source, it will start directly.) You can also enable the touch screen to perform the
above operations.) During the start-up process, all the backlights of the front-panel
Quick Start
14
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
keys are illuminated for a few seconds. The oscilloscope starts to perform a series of
self-tests. After the self-test, the splash screen is displayed.
NOTE
Restart and Shutdown:
1. Enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left
corner of the touch screen to enable the function navigation.
2. Tap the "Restart" icon, and then you can select "Restart" or "Shutdown", as shown in the
figure below.
3. If you tap "Restart" , the oscilloscope powers off and then automatically restarts again.
If you tap "Shutdown"
, the oscilloscope powers off (you can also press the Power key
at the lower-left corner of the front panel to turn off the oscilloscope).
4.3.4 Fuse Replacement
If you need to replace the fuse, please use the specified fuse (AC 250 V, T3.15 A; 5.2
mm × 20 mm) and perform the following operations (as shown in
Figure 4.5
):
1. Turn off the instrument, cut off the power, and remove the power cord.
2. Use a small straight slotted screwdriver to pry out the fuse holder.
3. Take out the fuse holder.
4. Replace the old fuse with a specified fuse.
5. Install the fuse holder.
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
15
background
Fuse Holder
Fuse
Figure 4.5 Fuse Replacement
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, please ensure that the instrument has been turned off, the power
source has been cut off, and the fuse to be used conforms to the fuse rating.
4.3.5 To Connect the Probe
RIGOL provides the passive probe, the active probe, and the logic probe for the
MSO8000A series. For specific probe models, please refer to
MSO8000A Datasheet
.
For detailed technical information of the probes, please refer to the corresponding
Probe User Guide.
Connect the passive probe:
1. Connect the BNC terminal of the probe to an analog channel input terminal of the
oscilloscope on the front panel as shown in
Figure 4.6
.
2. Connect the ground alligator clip or spring of the probe to the circuit ground
terminal, and then connect the probe tip to the circuit point to be tested.
Quick Start
16
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 4.6 Connect the Passive Probe
After you connect the passive probe, check the probe function and probe
compensation adjustment before making measurements. For detailed procedures,
refer to "
Function Inspection
" and "
Probe Compensation
".
Connect the active probe:
Take RP7150 (active differential probe head) as an example.
1. Connect the probe head to the preamp of the active probe, as shown in
Figure
4.7
.
Figure 4.7 To Connect the Probe Head to the Preamp of the Active Probe
2. Connect the other end of the preamp to an analog channel input terminal of the
oscilloscope on the front panel, as shown in the figure below.
3. Note that you need to push the probe to the due position to lock it firmly.
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
17
background
Figure 4.8 Connect the Active Probe
4. Use the probe's auxiliary device to connect the probe head to the circuit under
test. For details about the probes, refer to
RP7000 Series Active Probe User Guide
.
After you connect the active probe, you can make probe calibration and offset
voltage adjustment.
Connect the logic probe
1. Connect the output terminal of the logic probe to the digital channel input
terminal on the front panel of the oscilloscope in the correct direction, as shown in
Figure 4.9
.
2. Connect the other terminal of the logic probe to the signal terminal under test.
RIGOL's MSO8000A series has a standard configuration of a logic probe RPL2316.
To apply to different application scenarios, RPL2316 provides three connection
methods to connect the signal under test. For details, refer to
RPL2316 Logic Probe
User Guide
.
Quick Start
18
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 4.9 Connect the logic probe
NOTE
Before you connect the logic probe to the signal under test, connect logic probe's
adapter provided in the accessories to its corresponding channel group.
The digital channel input terminal does not support hot plugging. Please do not insert or
pull out the logic probe when the instrument is in power-on state.
4.3.6 Function Inspection
1. Press on the front panel, then a prompt message "Restore default
settings?" is displayed. Press OK or tap OK to restore the instrument to its factory
default settings.
2. Connect the ground alligator clip of the probe to the "Ground Terminal" as shown
in
Figure 4.10
.
3. Use the probe to connect the input terminal of CH1 of the oscilloscope and the
"Compensation Signal Output Terminal" of the probe, as shown in
Figure 4.10
.
Compensation Signal Output Terminal
Ground Terminal
Figure 4.10 To Use the Compensation Signal
4. Set the probe attenuation to 10X, and then press
.
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
19
background
5. Observe the waveform on the display. In normal condition, the square waveform as
shown in
Figure 4.11
should be displayed.
Figure 4.11 Square Waveform Signal
6. Use the same method to test the other channels. If the square waveforms actually
shown do not match that in the figure above, please perform "
Probe
Compensation
" introduced in the next section.
WARNING
To avoid electric shock when using the probe, please make sure that the insulated wire of
the probe is in good condition. Do not touch the metallic part of the probe when the
probe is connected to high voltage source.
4.3.7 Probe Compensation
When the probes are used for the first time, you should compensate the probes to
make them match the input channels of the oscilloscope. Non-compensated or
poorly compensated probes may cause measurement inaccuracy or errors. The probe
compensation procedures are as follows:
1. Perform Step 1, 2, 3 and 4 specified in "
Function Inspection
".
2. Check the displayed waveforms and compare them with the waveforms shown in
Figure 4.12
.
Quick Start
20
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Over compensated Under compensatedPerfectly compensated
Figure 4.12 Probe Compensation
3. Use the probe compensation adjustment tool provided in the accessories to adjust
the low-frequency compensation adjustment hole on the probe until the displayed
waveform is consistent with the "Perfectly compensated" waveform shown in
Figure 4.12
.
4.4 Front Panel Overview
18
20
19
17
16
1415
1 2
3
4 5
6
7 8 109
12
1311
Figure 4.13 Front Panel Overview
Table 4.1 Front Panel Description
No. Description No. Description
1 Capacitive Touch Screen 11 RUN/STOP Key
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
21
background
No. Description No. Description
2
Function Menu Operation
Keys
12 Single Trigger Control Key
3 Quick Key (Shortcut Key) 13 Trigger Control System
4 Multifunction Knob 14 Vertical Control System
5 Common Operation Keys 15 Analog Channel Input Terminals
6 Touch Lock Key 16
Probe Compensation Signal Output
Terminal/Ground Terminal
7 Horizontal Control System 17 Digital Channel Input Interface
8 CLEAR Key 18
Dual-channel Function/Arbitrary
Waveform Generator Output
Terminals
[1]
9 Auto Waveform Display Key 19 USB HOST Interface
10 Waveform Control System 20 Power Key
NOTE
[1]
: This function is only available for the model installed with the MSO8000-AWG option.
Quick Start
22
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
4.5 Rear Panel Overview
10 9 8
7
6
5
4
21
3
11
Figure 4.14 Rear Panel Overview
1. Handle
Rotate the handle upright to carry the instrument easily. Rotate it downward if you
do not need to carry it.
2.
LAN Interface
Connect the instrument to network via this interface. The instrument is in
compliance with the standards specified in LXI Device Specification 2011. It can be
used to set up a test system.
When you access to the Internet, you can use the Web Control or PC software
Ultra Scope to send the SCPI commands or use the user-defined programming to
control the instrument. When update is available, you can perform online
upgrading for the system software of the instrument via the LAN interface. After it
is connected to the network, you can print the waveform displayed on the screen
when you use the network printer.
TIP
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
23
background
After the oscilloscope is connected to network (if you do not have the access to the
Internet, please ask the administrator to open the specified network authority), you can
perform online upgrading for the system software:
1. Enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon
at the lower-left
corner of the touch screen to enable the function navigation.
2. Tap the "Help" icon, and then the "Help" menu is displayed on the screen.
3. Press Online upgrade or enable the touch screen to tap "Online upgrade", then a
"System Update Information" window is displayed, requesting you whether to accept or
cancel "RIGOL TERMS OF ONLINE UPGRADE SERVICE". Tap "Accept" to start online
upgrade. Tap "Cancel" to cancel the online upgrade.
3. USB DEVICE Interface
You can connect the instrument to the PC via this interface. Then you can use the
PC software Ultra Scope to send the SCPI commands or use the user-defined
programming to control the instrument.
4.
USB HOST Interface
You can connect the storage device that is compatible with the USB to the
instrument via the USB HOST interface.
Connecting the storage device can save or recall the waveform files and setup files,
as well as save the data and screen image. When update is available, you can
perform local upgrading for the system software of the instrument via the USB
HOST interface.
NOTE
Perform local upgrading for the system software:
1. Insert the USB storage device (stored with upgrading files under its root directory) into
the USB HOST interface, and then the "Help" menu is automatically displayed.
2. Press
Local upgrade or enable the touch screen to tap "Local upgrade", then a dialog
box "Upgrade system firmware?" is displayed.
3. Press OK or enable the touch screen to tap "OK" to start local upgrade for the
oscilloscope. If you tap "Cancel", the local upgrade will be cancelled.
5. HDMI Video Output
Through this interface, you can connect the instrument to an external display (e.g.
monitor or projector) equipped with the HDMI interface to better observe the
waveform display clearly. At this time, you can also view the waveforms on the LCD
of the instrument.
6. 10 M In/Out
Indicates the reference clock. It can provide accurate sample clock signal for the
oscilloscope, and can be used to synchronize the clock of two or multiple
oscilloscopes.
Quick Start
24
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
7. EXT TRIG
Inputs the external signal via the external input terminal.
8. Trigger Out and Pass/Fail
- TRIG OUT
The oscilloscope can output a signal that can reflect the current capture rate of
the oscilloscope at each trigger via this interface. Connect the signal to a
waveform display device and measure the frequency of the signal. The
measurement result is the same as the current capture rate.
- Pass/Fail
The instrument can output a pulse from the [TRIG OUT] connector when a
pass/failed event is detected during the pass/fail test.
9. Lock Hole
You can lock the instrument to a fixed location by using the security lock (please
purchase it by yourself) via the lock hole.
10. Fuse
If you need to replace the fuse, use only the specified fuse. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Fuse Replacement
".
11. AC Power Cord Connector
Indicates the input terminal where AC power source is connected. The power
supply requirements of the instrument are: 100 V~240 V; 45 Hz~ 440 Hz. Please
use the power cord provided in the accessories to connect the oscilloscope to the
AC power source.
4.6 Front Panel Function Overview
4.6.1 Vertical
, , , : indicates the analog channel switch key. The four channels are
marked by different colors which are also used to mark both the corresponding
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
25
background
waveforms of the specified channel on the screen and the channel input
connectors.
, : indicates the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator key. Press GI
to enable or disable the output of the [GI] connector on the front panel; press
GII to enable or disable the output of the [GII] connector on the front panel;
and then enter the corresponding signal source setting interface. Enable or
disable the status display of the current signal.
NOTE
This function is only available for model installed with the MSO8000-AWG option.
: indicates the default setting key. Press this key to restore the
instrument to its factory default settings.
Vertical OFFSET: indicates the channel vertical offset knob. You can rotate
the knob to modify the vertical offset of the current channel waveform. Each
analog channel is configured with an independent vertical offset adjustment
knob. Turn it clockwise to increase the offset, and turn it counterclockwise to
decrease the offset. During the modification, the waveform would move up and
down. Meanwhile, the offset information in the corresponding status label
would change accordingly. Press down this knob to quickly reset the vertical
offset to zero.
Vertical SCALE: indicates the channel vertical scale knob. It is used to modify
the vertical scale of the current channel. Each analog channel is configured with
an independent vertical scale adjustment knob. Turn it clockwise to decrease
the scale, and turn it counterclockwise to increase the scale. During the
modification, the display amplitude of the waveform will enlarge or reduce. The
scale information in the corresponding status label will change accordingly.
Press down this knob to quickly switch the vertical scale adjustment mode
between "Coarse" and "Fine".
4.6.2 Horizontal
: indicates the delayed sweep key. Press this key to enable or disable the
delayed sweep function.
Quick Start
26
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
: indicates the Search key. Press this key to enter the search setting menu.
The search function allows you to search for relevant events from the collected
data based on the user-set search condition.
: indicates the navigation combination key. With the
combination keys, you can perform recording&playing navigation, time
navigation, and event navigation.
Horizontal POSITION: indicates the horizontal position knob. Rotate the
knob to modify the horizontal position (i.g. trigger position). The trigger point
would move left or right relative to the center of the screen when you rotate the
knob. During the modification, waveforms of all the channels would move left or
right, and the horizontal position message (e.g. ) at the upper-right
corner of the screen would change accordingly. Press down this knob to quickly
reset the horizontal position (or the delayed sweep position).
Horizontal SCALE: indicates the horizontal time base knob. You can rotate
the knob to modify the horizontal time base. Turn it clockwise to decrease the
time base, and turn it counterclockwise to increase the time base. During the
modification, waveforms of all the channels will be displayed in expanded or
compressed form, and the time base message (e.g. ) at the upper section
of the screen would change accordingly. Press down this knob to quickly switch
the horizontal time base adjustment mode between "Coarse" and "Fine".
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
27
background
4.6.3 Wave
: indicates the math operation key. Press this key to enable the math
operation function. The math operations include A+B, A-B, A×B, A/B, FFT, and
etc. Besides, you can also set the math operation label.
: indicates the logic analyzer key. Press this key to open the logic analyzer
control menu. You can enable or disable any channel or channel group, modify
the waveform sizes of the digital channel, modify the threshold of the digital
channel, and group the 16 digital channels. Besides, you can also set a label for
each digital channel.
: indicates the reference waveform key. Press this key to open the reference
waveform setting menu. You can compare the actually measured waveform with
the reference waveform to locate the circuit failure.
: indicates the decode key. Press this key to open the decode setting menu,
and then you can set the decode options. This series of oscilloscope supports
the parallel decoding and many protocol decodings. (For details, refer to the
descriptions in "
Protocol Decoding
").
Wave Vertical POSITION: indicates the waveform vertical position knob.
Rotate the knob to adjust the vertical position of the current digital channel
waveform, the vertical position of the math operation waveform, the vertical
Quick Start
28
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
position of the reference waveform, or the vertical display position of the bus
decoding.
Wave Vertical SCALE: indicates the waveform vertical scale knob. Rotate the
knob to adjust the vertical scale of math operation waveform or the vertical scale
of the reference waveform, and also can adjust the size of the displayed digital
channel waveforms.
4.6.4 Trigger
: Press this key to open the trigger operation menu.
This oscilloscope provides various trigger types.
: Press this key to switch the trigger mode to Auto,
Normal, or SINGLE.
: Press this key to generate a trigger signal forcibly.
Trigger LEVEL: modifies the trigger level/threshold level.
Turn it clockwise to increase the level, and turn it
counterclockwise to decrease the level. During the
modification, the trigger level line would move up and down
and the trigger level/threshold level value at the upper-right
corner of the screen would change accordingly. Press down
the knob to quickly set the trigger level to 50% of the
waveform peak-peak value.
4.6.5 Clear
Press this key to clear all the waveforms on the screen. If the
oscilloscope is in the "RUN" state, new waveforms will continue
being displayed.
4.6.6 Auto
Press this key to enable the waveform auto setting function.
The oscilloscope will automatically adjust the vertical scale,
horizontal time base, and trigger mode according to the input
signal to realize optimal waveform display.
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
29
background
4.6.7 RUN/STOP
Press this key to set the operating state of the oscilloscope to
"RUN" or "STOP". In the "RUN" state, the key is illuminated in
yellow. In the "STOP" state, the key is illuminated in red.
4.6.8 Single
Press this key to set the trigger mode to "Single".
4.6.9 Multifunction knob
Non-menu Operation:
In non-menu-operation mode, rotate this knob to adjust the brightness of
waveform display. The settable screen brightness ranges from 1% to 100%. Turn
it clockwise to increase the brightness, and turn it counterclockwise to decrease
the brightness. Press > Intensity to adjust the waveform brightness. You
can also use the knob to adjust it.
Menu Operation:
When you operate on the menu, the backlight of the knob is illuminated. For the
menu item that has multiple parameters under it, when you press the menu
softkey, rotate the knob to select the parameter item, then press down the knob
to select the item (sometimes, the specified parameter item can be selected by
rotating the knob). The knob can also be used to modify parameters, input
filenames, etc.
4.6.10 Function Menu
Quick Start
30
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
: Press this key to enter the measurement setting menu. You can set the
measurement source, enable or disable the all measurement function, the statistical
analysis function, and etc. You can make a quick measurement for 41 waveform
parameters.
: Press this key to enter the acquisition setting menu. You can set the time base
mode, the acquisition mode, memory depth, and etc.
: Press this key to enter the file or waveform storage and load interface. The file
types for storage include image, waveform, and setups. Besides, waveform load and
setup load are supported. The disk management and file auto naming function are
also supported in this menu.
: Press this key to enter the cursor measurement menu. The oscilloscope
provides four cursor modes: Manual, Track, XY, and Measure. Note that XY cursor
mode is only available when the horizontal time base is set to "XY".
: Press this key to enter the Display setting menu. You can set the display type,
persistence time, wave intensity, and etc.
: Press this key to enter the system function setting menu. You can set system-
related functions or parameters, such as I/O, sound, language, and etc. Besides, some
advanced functions (such as the pass/fail test, waveform recording, and self-
calibration) are also supported.
4.6.11 Touch Lock Key
Press this key to disable the touch screen function.
NOTE
By default, the touch screen function of the oscilloscope is always enabled. If you disable the
function, press the key again to enable it.
4.6.12 Quick key (shortcut key)
Press this key to perform the quick operation, including screenshot,
waveform saving, setup saving, all measurement, statistics reset, and etc.
Press > More > Quick settings to set the quick shortcut keys.
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
31
background
4.7 User Interface
MSO8000A series has a 10.1-inch WSVGA (1024×600) LCD, with 256 level gray-scale
display. The user interface displays the acquired waveforms, the setting information,
and the measurement results.
1
2 3 4 5 8
6 7 9 10 11 12
13141516
1718
19202122
23
24
Figure 4.15 User Interface
1. Analog Channel Label/Waveform
Different channels are marked with different colors. The color of the channel label
is the same as that of the waveform.
2. Operating Status
The available states include RUN, STOP, T'D (triggered), WAIT, and AUTO.
3. Horizontal Time Base
- Represents the time length per grid in the horizontal axis of the screen.
- Use Horizontal
SCALE to modify this parameter. The adjustable range of the
horizontal time base is different for different models.
4. Sample Rate/Memory Depth
- Displays the current sample rate and memory depth of the analog channel.
Quick Start
32
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- The sample rate and the memory depth will change along with the horizontal
time base.
5. Auto Measurement Label
Enable the touch screen, and then tap the label. Up to 41 waveform parameters are
available for auto measurement. It also offers full-memory hardware measurement
function.
6. Save Wave
Provides a diagram of the position of the screen waveform in the memory.
waveform in the memory
screen waveform
7. Trigger Position
Displays the trigger position of the screen waveform and that of the waveform in
the memory.
8. Run/Stop Label
In the run state, the label is displayed in green; while in the stop state, it is
displayed in red. You can enable the touch screen to tap the icon "STOP/RUN" to
control its operating status.
9. Horizontal Position
Use Horizontal
POSITION to modify this parameter. Press down this knob to
quickly reset the horizontal position.
10. Trigger Type
Displays the currently selected trigger type and trigger condition setting. When
you select different trigger types, different labels are displayed. For example,
represents triggering on the rising edge in "Edge" trigger.
11. Source
Displays the currently selected trigger source (CH1-CH4, AC Line, EXT, or D0-D15).
When you select different trigger sources, different labels are displayed. For
example,
denotes that CH1 is selected as the trigger source.
12. Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
33
background
- When CH1-CH4 or EXT is selected as the trigger source, you need to set a
proper trigger level.
- When D0-D15 is selected as the trigger source, you need to set a proper
threshold level.
- The trigger level label is displayed at the left section of the screen, and the
trigger level/threshold level value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
- When you use Trigger LEVEL to modify the trigger level/threshold level, the
trigger level/threshold level value will change with the up and down of .
13. Operation Menu
Press any softkey on the front panel to activate the corresponding menu.
14. Notification Area
Displays the beeper icon, the USB storage device icon, time, and the LAN
connection icon.
- Sound icon: Press > Sound to turn on or off the sound. When the sound
is turned on,
will be displayed; when off, will be displayed.
- USB storage device icon: When a USB storage device is detected, will be
displayed.
- Time: displays the system time. For the system time setting, refer to
descriptions in "
System Time
".
- LAN connection icon: When the LAN interface is successfully connected,
will be displayed.
15. AWG 2
- Displays the on/off status of AWG 2.
- Displays the waveform type set for the current AWG 2.
- It is only available for the model installed with the MSO8000-AWG option.
Quick Start
34
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
16. AWG 1
- Displays the on/off status of AWG 1.
- Displays the waveform type set for the current AWG 1.
- It is only available for the model installed with the MSO8000-AWG option.
17. Digital Channel Status Area
Displays the current status of the 16 digital channels. The digital channels currently
turned on are displayed in green, and the currently selected digital channel is
highlighted in red. The digital channels turned off are displayed in gray.
18. CH4 Status Label
- Displays the status of CH4.
- It displays the vertical scale of CH4. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH4 in
the vertical axis.
- Displays the offset of CH4, i.g. the vertical offset of CH4 waveform.
- Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting. For
example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling, is displayed; if you enable
the bandwidth limit, is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for impedance, is
displayed.
19. Message Box
Displays the prompt messages.
20. CH3 Status Label
- Displays the status of CH3.
- Displays the vertical scale of CH3. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH3 in
the vertical axis.
- Displays the offset of CH3, i.g. the vertical offset of CH3 waveform.
- Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting. For
example,if you select "DC" for channel coupling, is displayed; if you enable
the bandwidth limit, is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for impedance, is
displayed.
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
35
background
21. CH2 Status Label
- Displays the status of CH2.
- Displays the vertical scale of CH2. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH2 in
the vertical axis. Displays the offset of CH2, i.g. the vertical offset of CH2
waveform.
- Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting. For
example,if you select "DC" for channel coupling, is displayed; if you enable
the bandwidth limit, is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for impedance, is
displayed.
22. CH1 Status Label
- Displays the on/off status of CH1.
- Displays the vertical scale of CH1. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH1 in
the vertical axis.
- Displays the offset of CH1, i.g. the vertical offset of CH1 waveform.
- Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting. For
example,if you select "DC" for channel coupling, is displayed; if you enable
the bandwidth limit, is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for impedance, is
displayed.
23. Digital Channel Label/Waveform
The logic high and low level of the digital waveform are displayed in green. Its
edge is displayed in white. The color of the currently selected waveform of the
digital channel is consistent with that of the channel label, being displayed in red.
The grouping setting function under the logic analyzer function menu can divide
the digital channels into 4 channel groups. The channel label of the same channel
group is displayed in the same color; different channel groups are marked with
different colors.
24. Function Navigation
Enable the touch screen and then tap this icon to enable the function navigation.
Quick Start
36
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
NOTE
In Slope Trigger, Runt Trigger, and Window trigger, you need to set the upper and lower limits
of the trigger level, and two trigger level labels ( and ) are displayed.
4.8 Touch Screen Controls
MSO8000A series provides a 10.1-inch super large capacitive touch screen, which
supports multi-touch and gesture operation. It has strong waveform display capability
and excellent user experience. It features great convenience, high flexibility, and great
sensitivity. The actions supported by the touch screen controls include tapping,
pinching & stretching, dragging, and rectangle drawing.
TIP
The touch screen function is available for all the menus displayed on the screen and the
buttons enabled. In this manual, key operation descriptions are illustrated in details, and as for
the touch screen function about some operations, refer to descriptions in relevant chapters.
4.8.1 Tap
Use one finger to touch the symbol or characters on the screen slightly, as shown in
Figure 4.16
. With the Tap gesture, you can perform the following operation:
Tap the menu displayed on the screen to operate on the menu.
Tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the touch screen
to open the function navigation.
Tap the displayed numeric keypad to set the parameters.
Tap the virtual keypad to set the label name and the filename.
Tap the close button at the upper-right corner of the message box to close the
prompt window.
Tap other windows on the touch screen and operate on the windows.
Figure 4.16 Tap Gesture
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
37
background
4.8.2 Pinch & Stretch
Pinch or stretch two points on the screen with two fingers to zoom in or out the
waveform. To zoom in the waveform, first pinch the two fingers and then stretch the
fingers; to zoom out the waveform, first stretch the two fingers, and then pinch the
fingers together, as shown in
Figure 4.17
. With the pinch&stretch gesture, you can
perform the following operation:
Pinching&stretching in the horizontal direction can adjust the horizontal time
base of the waveform.
Pinching&stretching in the vertical direction can adjust the vertical scale of the
waveform.
Figure 4.17 Pinch & Stretch Gesture
4.8.3 Drag
Use one finger to select the object, and then drag the object to a destination place, as
shown in
Figure 4.18
. With the drag gesture, you can perform the following
operation:
Drag the waveform to change its position or scale.
Drag the window controls to change the position of the window (e.g. numeric
keypad).
Drag the marker to change the position of the marker.
Figure 4.18 Drag Gesture
Quick Start
38
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
4.8.4 Rectangle Drawing
Enable the function navigation, and then tap the "Draw rect" icon to switch to the
rectangle drawing mode. Drag a finger from upper left to lower right across the
screen to draw a rectangle on the screen, as shown in
Figure 4.19
. Move your finger
away from the screen, and then a menu is displayed on the screen. At this time, you
can tap to select "Trigger zone A", "Trigger zone B", "Histogram", "Horizontal zoom
in", "Vertical zoom in", or "Waveform zoom in". Drag a finger from lower right to
upper left across the screen to draw a rectangle on the screen, as shown in
Figure
4.20
. Move your finger away from the screen, and then a menu is displayed on the
screen. At this time, you can tap to select "Trigger zone A", "Trigger zone B",
"Histogram", "Horizontal zoom out", "Vertical zoom out", or "Waveform zoom out".
Figure 4.19 Rectangle Drawing Gesture(a)
Figure 4.20 Rectangle Drawing Gesture(b)
Select "Trigger zone A":
- Draw the region for Trigger zone A;
- Open Trigger zone A:
- Open the "Zone Trigger" menu.
Select "Trigger zone B":
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
39
background
- Draw the region for Trigger zone B;
- Open Trigger zone B:
- Open the "Zone Trigger" menu.
Select "Histogram":
- Draw the region for the histogram;
- Open the "Histogram" menu.
Select "Horizontal zoom in": expands the waveforms in the horizontal direction.
Select "Horizontal zoom out": compresses the waveforms in the horizontal
direction.
Select "Vertical zoom in": expands the waveforms in the vertical direction. Select
"Vertical zoom out": compresses the waveforms in the vertical direction.
Select "Waveform zoom in": expands the waveforms both in the horizontal and
vertical direction. Select "Waveform zoom out": compresses the waveforms both
in the horizontal and vertical direction.
TIP
Tap the "Draw rect" icon to switch between the rectangle drawing and waveform operation
modes.
Tap the "Draw rect" icon, if is displayed, it indicates that the rectangle drawing mode is
enabled. Tap the "Draw rect" icon, if
is displayed, it indicates that the waveform operation
mode is enabled. By default, the waveform operation mode is enabled.
4.9 Parameter Setting Method
You can use the knob or enable the touch screen to set the parameters of MSO8000A
series. The common parameter setting methods are as follows:
Method 1:
For the parameters with the sign , rotate the multifunction knob on the front
panel directly to select the parameter item or modify the parameter value.
Method 2:
Quick Start
40
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
For the parameters with the sign , rotate the multifunction knob on the front
panel and then press it down to select the parameter item or modify the parameter
value.
Method 3:
For the parameters with displayed on the menu, rotate the multifunction knob
on the front panel directly to set the parameter, or press down the multifunction knob
or the specified menu softkey, and then the numeric keypad is shown in
Figure
4.21
below.
Parameter Input Field
Delete Key
Max. Value
Min. Value
Default Value
Clear Key
Figure 4.21 Numeric Keypad
In the numeric keypad, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the parameter, then
press down the knob to select it. Then input the value or the unit. You can also enable
the touch screen and tap the value or unit in the numeric keypad to input them. After
you input all the values and select the desired units, the numeric keypad is turned off
automatically. This indicates that you have completed parameter setting. Besides,
after you have input the values, you can also press OK directly to confirm the input
and close the numeric keypad. At this time, the unit of the parameter is the default
unit. In the numeric keypad, you can also perform the following operations:
Delete the parameter value that has been input.
Set the parameter to a maximum or minimum value (sometimes, the maximum
or minimum value are the specified one for the current state).
Set the parameter to a default value.
Clear the parameter input field.
Method 4:
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
41
background
For the parameters without the above signs, press the desired menu softkey to switch
between the parameter items. This method is applicable to the parameters with only
two available options.
TIP
The above method is commonly used for the parameter settings of the oscilloscope. For other
methods of parameter settings, refer to details in User Guide of this instrument.
4.10 To Use the Security Lock
If necessary, you can lock the instrument to a fixed location by using the security lock
(please purchase it by yourself), as shown in
Figure 4.22
.
The method is as follows: align the lock with the lock hole and plug it into the lock
hole vertically, turn the key clockwise to lock the oscilloscope, and then pull the key
out.
Security Lock Hole
Figure 4.22 To Use the Security Lock
NOTE
Please do not insert other objects into the security lock hole to avoid damaging the
instrument.
4.11 To Use the Built-in Help System
The help system of this oscilloscope provides instructions for all the function keys on
the front panel and their corresponding menu keys. The steps for opening the built-in
help system are as follows:
Quick Start
42
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
1. Press > System > Help, and then the "Help" menu is displayed on the
screen. You can also use the touch screen function , tap the navigation icon at
the lower-left corner of the touch screen to enable the function navigation. Tap the
"Help" icon, and then the "Help" menu is displayed on the screen.
2. Press the Content menu key or tap the "Content" menu item, then the help
information is displayed on the screen, as shown in
Figure 4.23
. The help interface
mainly consists of two sections. The left section lists "Help Options", and the right
section is the "Help Display Area".
Help Options Help Display Area
Figure 4.23 Help Information
After opening the help interface, you can get its help information in the "Help Display
Area" through the following three methods:
Method 1:
For the key operation, you can directly press the front-panel keys (except the Power
key, key, and the key) to obtain the help information. For the knob operation,
you can rotate the knob or press down the knob to get the help information (except
the multifunction knob , Wave Vertical POSITION, and Wave Vertical
SCALE). As the function of rotating the knob is different from that of pressing down
the knob, these two operations will give you different help information.
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
43
background
Method 2:
In the "Help Options", rotate the multifunction knob to switch among the help
options to get the corresponding help information.
Method 3:
Enable the touch screen and tap the desired help option to get the corresponding
help information.
TIP
Help information for other keys and buttons:
- Power key: powers on/off the instrument.
- key: displays or hides menus. Pressing this key can hide the menus.
-
key: returns to the previous menu or last set function menu.
- Multifunction knob
: In non-menu-operation mode, rotate this knob to adjust
the brightness of waveform display. When you operate on the menu, the backlight
of the knob is illuminated. For the menu item that has multiple parameters under it,
when you press the menu softkey, rotate the knob to select the parameter item,
then press down the knob to select it (sometimes, the specified parameter item can
be selected by rotating the knob). The knob can also be used to modify parameters,
input the filename, etc.
- Wave Vertical
POSITION: Rotate the knob to adjust the vertical position of the
current digital channel waveform, the vertical position of the math operation
waveform, the vertical position of the reference waveform, or the vertical display
position of the bus decoding.
- Wave Vertical
SCALE: Rotate the knob to adjust the vertical scale of math
operation waveform or the vertical scale of the reference waveform, and also can
adjust the size of the displayed digital channel waveforms.
If the menu item is grayed out, you cannot press the corresponding front-panel menu
key to obtain the help information. What you can do is only to follow the above Method
2 or 3 to get the help information.
4.12 To View the Option Information and the Option
Installation
This series of oscilloscope provides multiple options to fulfill your measurement
requirements. If you need any of these options, order them according to the Order
No. available in "
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
", and then install the options
according to this section. Besides, you can also view the options currently installed on
the oscilloscope or activate the newly purchased option.
1. View the Installed Option
Quick Start
44
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
The instrument is installed with the trial versions of the options before leaving
factory. When you power on the instrument for the first time, the trial time is
about 2,160 minutes. If your instrument has currently installed the option, perform
the following operations to view the name of the installed option and other
detailed information about the option from the option list.
a. Press > System > Help, and then the "Help" menu is displayed on the
screen. You can also use the touch screen function , tap the navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the touch screen to enable the function navigation.
Tap the "Help" icon, and then the "Help" menu is displayed on the screen.
b. Press the Option list or tap the Option list menu item, and then a list of the
options installed is displayed on the screen for users to view.
2. Install the option
The option license is a string of fixed characters. Each instrument has one unique
license. The license file should be in specific format, with the filename extension
".lic". After you purchase an option, you will obtain a key (used for obtaining the
license). Then, you can install the option according to the following steps.
a. Obtain an option license
a. Log in to the RIGOL official website (
www.rigol.com
), click SERVICE CENTRE
(Products & Services) > License Activation to enter the license activation
interface.
b. In the software license registration interface, input the correct key, serial
number (press > System > About to obtain the serial number of the
instrument. You can also open the "Help" function menu, and then press
About to obtain the serial number), and the verification code. Click Generate
to obtain the download link of the option license file. If you need to use the
option license file, please click the link to download the file to the root
directory of the USB storage device.
b. Install the option
Quick Start
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
45
background
a. Confirm that the option license file is located in the root directory of the USB
storage device, and connect the USB storage device to the oscilloscope
properly.
b. The Option install key is activated, and press this menu key to start installing
the option.
c. After installation, a prompt message "Option activated successfully" is
displayed.
NOTE
After the option has been installed, you are recommended to restart the instrument.
TIP
Only 1 option license file of one instrument is allowed to be stored in the same USB
storage device, but the USB storage device can store the option license file of several
different instruments. You are not allowed to modify the licensed filename.
During the installation process, you are not allowed to power off the instrument or pull
out the USB storage device.
Sending the SCPI commands (:SYSTem:OPTion:INSTall <license>) to install options is
supported. Installing options by inputting the license code manually is not supported.
Quick Start
46
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
5
To Set the Vertical System
MSO8000A series provides 4 analog input channels (CH1-CH4). Each channel is
equipped with an independent vertical control system. The setting methods for the
vertical systems of the 4 channels are the same. This chapter takes CH1 as an example
to introduce the setting method for the vertical system. By default, only CH1 is
enabled.
5.1 To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel
Enable the Analog Channel:
Connect a signal to CH1, and then press in the vertical control area (Vertical) on
the front panel to enable CH1. Then, the backlight of the channel is illuminated. At
this point, the channel setting menu is displayed at the right section of the screen and
the channel is activated. The channel status label at the bottom of the screen is shown
in the figure below. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the channel status
label to enable the channel.
Vertical Scale
The information displayed in the channel status label is related to the current channel
setting (irrelevant with the on/off status of the channel). After the channel is turned
on, modify the parameters such as the vertical scale, horizontal time base, trigger
mode, and trigger level according to the input signal for easy observation and
measurement of the waveform.
If CH1 is enabled but not activated, the channel status label is shown in the following
figure. To activate the channel, press
on the front panel in the vertical control area
(Vertical) or enable the touch screen to tap the waveform activation channel displayed
on the screen.
Disable the Analog Channel:
If the setting menu of the channel that needs to be disabled (the current channel is
activated) is displayed at the right section of the screen, press the channel key to
disable the channel. If the setting menu of the channel that needs to be disabled is
not displayed at the right section of the screen, first open the setting menu of the
channel to be disabled (activate the channel), then press the channel key to disable
the channel. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the channel status label to
To Set the Vertical System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
47
background
disable the channel. For example, if CH1 and CH2 are enabled and CH2 channel
setting menu is displayed on the screen, then if you need to disable CH1, first activate
CH1, and then press or enable the touch screen to tap CH1 channel status label to
disable CH1. If CH1 is disabled, the channel status label is shown in the following
figure.
5.2 To Adjust the Vertical Scale
Vertical scale indicates the voltage value per grid in the vertical axis of the screen. It is
often expressed in V/div. While you adjust the vertical scale, the display amplitude of
the waveform would enlarge or reduce. The scale information of the channel status
label (e.g. as shown in the following figure) at the lower section of the screen would
change accordingly.
Vertical Scale
The adjustable range of the vertical scale is related to the currently set probe ratio
and input impedance. By default, the probe ratio is 1X and the input impedance is 1
MΩ. In this case, the adjustable range of the vertical scale is from 1 mV/div to 10 V/
div.
When CH1 is turned on, you can adjust the vertical scale with the following three
methods:
Rotate Vertical
SCALE that corresponds to CH1 to adjust the vertical scale
(clockwise to reduce the scale and counterclockwise to increase).
Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the vertical scale with the
pinch & stretch gesture on the touch screen. For details, refer to the "
Pinch &
Stretch
" section.
Enable the touch screen function, and tap the channel status label at the bottom
of the screen. The following window is displayed. Tap the icon at the right side of
the Scale input field to decrease or increase the scale. You can also tap the input
field to input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.
To Set the Vertical System
48
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Value Input Field
Decrease
Increase
In the vertical control area (Vertical) on the front panel, press Vertical SCALE to
adjust the vertical scale in "Coarse" (by default) or "Fine" mode. You can also press
> More > Fine to enable or disable the fine adjustment.
Fine adjustment: Rotate Vertical SCALE to further adjust the vertical scale
within a relatively smaller range to improve the vertical resolution. If the
amplitude of the input waveform is a little bit greater than the full scale under
the current scale and the amplitude would be a little bit lower if the next scale is
used, fine adjustment can be used to improve the amplitude of waveform
display to view signal details.
Coarse adjustment (take counterclockwise as an example): Rotate Vertical
SCALE to set the vertical scale at 1-2-5 step, i.e. 1 mV/div, 2 mV/div, 5 mV/div, 10
mV/div…10 V/div.
5.3 Vertical Expansion
When changing the vertical scale of the analog channel by rotating the Vertical
SCALE, you can select to expand or compress the waveform around the "Center" or
"GND" (Ground). By default, "GND" is selected under Expand.
Press > More, then press Expand continuously to select "Center" or "GND".
Center: when the vertical scale is changed, the waveform will be expanded or
compressed around the screen center.
GND: when the vertical scale is changed, the waveform will be expanded or
compressed around the signal ground level position.
To Set the Vertical System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
49
background
5.4 To Adjust the Vertical Offset
Vertical offset indicates the offset of the signal ground level position of the waveform
from the screen center in the vertical direction. Its unit is consistent with the currently
selected amplitude unit (refer to "
Amplitude Unit
"). When adjusting the vertical offset,
the waveforms of the corresponding channel moves up and down. The vertical offset
information (as shown in the following figure) in the channel status label at the
bottom of the screen will change accordingly.
The adjustable range of the vertical offset is related to the current input impedance,
probe ratio, and vertical scale.
When CH1 is turned on, you can adjust the vertical offset with the following four
methods:
Rotate Vertical OFFSET that corresponds to CH1 to adjust the vertical offset
within the adjustable range. Rotate this knob clockwise to increase the vertical
offset, and rotate it counterclockwise to reduce the vertical offset. Pressing down
the knob can quickly reset the vertical offset (set the vertical offset to 0).
Menu setting: Press > More > Offset, and then the numeric keypad is
displayed. Input the offset value with the numeric keypad.
Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the vertical offset with the
drag gesture. For details, refer to the "
Drag
" section.
Enable the touch screen function, and tap the channel status label at the bottom
of the screen. The following window is displayed. Tap the
icon at the
right side of the Offset input field to decrease or increase the offset. You can also
tap the input field to input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.
To Set the Vertical System
50
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Value Input Field
Decrease
Increase
5.5 Channel Coupling
The undesired signals can be filtered out by setting the coupling mode. For example,
the signal under test is a square waveform with DC offset.
When the coupling mode is "DC": the DC and AC components of the signal
under test can both pass the channel.
When the coupling mode is "AC": the DC components of the signal under test
are blocked.
When the coupling mode is "GND": the DC and AC components of the signal
under test are both blocked.
Press to open the CH1 setting menu.Then, press Coupling continuously or rotate
the multifunction knob to select the desired coupling mode (by default, it is DC).
The current coupling mode is displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of
the screen, as shown in the figure below. You can also enable the touch screen, and
then touch the CH1 setting menu to select the desired coupling mode.
DC AC GND
NOTE
When the input impedance is set to "50 Ω", the channel coupling is set to DC coupling by
force, and the
Coupling menu is grayed out and cannot be modified.
When the coupling mode is "AC", the input impedance is set to 1 MΩ by force, and the
Impedance menu is grayed out and cannot be modified.
To Set the Vertical System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
51
background
5.6 BW Limit
This series oscilloscope supports the bandwidth limit function. Setting the bandwidth
limit can reduce the noises in the displayed waveforms. For example, the signal under
test is a pulse with high frequency oscillation.
When the bandwidth limit is disabled, the high frequency components of the
signal under test can pass the channel.
When you enable the bandwidth limit and limit it to 20 MHz or 250 MHz, the
high frequency components found in the signal under test that are greater than
20 MHz or 250 MHz are attenuated.
Press to open the CH1 setting menu.Then, press BW Limit continuously or rotate
the multifunction knob to select the desired bandwidth limit. Press down the knob
to select it. By default, it is OFF. When the bandwidth limit is enabled, the character
"B" will be displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. You can
also enable the touch screen to select the desired BW limit.
The bandwidth limit that you select is based on the input impedance of the
oscilloscope, as shown in
Table 5.2 BW Limit
.
Table 5.2 BW Limit
Input Impedance of the Oscilloscope Available Bandwidth Limit
50 Ω 20 M
1 MΩ 20 MHz and 250 MHz
NOTE
Bandwidth limit can not only reduce the noise, but also can attenuate or eliminate the high
frequency components of the signal.
5.7 Probe Ratio
This series oscilloscope allows you to set the probe attenuation manually. To obtain
the correct measurement results, you must set the probe ratio properly. By default,
the probe ratio is 1X.
To Set the Vertical System
52
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press to open the CH1 setting menu.Then, press Attenuation continuously or
rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired probe ratio. You can also
enable the touch screen, and then tap to select the desired probe ratio. The probe
ratio values available are as shown in the following table.
Table 5.3 Probe Ratio
Menu
Attenuation
(display amplitude of the signal under test: actual
amplitude of the signal under test)
0.0001X
0.0002X
0.0005X
0.001X
0.002X
0.005X
0.01X
0.02X
0.05X
0.1X
0.2X
0.5X
1X (default)
2X
5X
10X
20X
50X
100X
200X
500X
1000X
2000X
0.0001:1
0.0002:1
0.0005:1
0.001:1
0.002:1
0.005:1
0.01:1
0.02:1
0.05:1
0.1:1
0.2:1
0.5:1
1:1
2:1
5:1
10:1
20:1
50:1
100:1
200:1
500:1
1000:1
2000:1
To Set the Vertical System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
53
background
Menu
Attenuation
(display amplitude of the signal under test: actual
amplitude of the signal under test)
5000X
10000X
20000X
50000X
5000:1
10000:1
20000:1
50000:1
NOTE
After the oscilloscope auto-recognized certain probes with a fixed attenuation ratio, the probe
ratio will also be auto recognized. You do not have to set it manually.
5.8 Input Impedance
To reduce the circuit load between the oscilloscope and the circuit under test, this
oscilloscope provides two input impedance modes: 1 MΩ (default) and 50 Ω.
1 MΩ: The input impedance of the oscilloscope is very high, and the current
flowed from the circuit under test can be ignored.
50 Ω: makes the oscilloscope match with the device whose input impedance is
50 Ω.
Press to open the CH1 setting menu.Then, press Impedance continuously to select
the input impedance of the oscilloscope. If you select "50Ω", the channel status label
at the bottom of the screen will display the icon
.
NOTE
After the oscilloscope recognizes the probe automatically, the input impedance will also
be auto recognized. You do not have to set it manually.
The setting of the input impedance will affect the ranges of channel vertical scale and
offset.
5.9 Waveform Invert
Press to open the CH1 setting menu. Then, press Invert continuously to enable or
disable the waveform invert. When enabled, the channel label is displayed, as shown
in the following figure.
To Set the Vertical System
54
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
When the waveform invert is turned off, the waveform is displayed normally; when
the waveform invert is turned on, the voltage values of the displayed waveform are
inverted. Enabling the waveform invert will change the result of math function and
waveform measurement.
Figure 5.1 Waveform Invert
NOTE
When the waveform invert is enabled, the trigger edge or the trigger polarity will change (e.g.
Edge trigger, Pulse trigger, or Slope trigger).
5.10 To Set the Probe
The analog channel of this oscilloscope not only supports the common passive probe,
but also the active probe. It can automatically recognize the currently connected
probe type and its probe ratio. For detailed technical information of the probes,
please refer to the corresponding Probe User Guide.
Press to open the CH1 setting menu. Then, press Probe to open the probe menu.
If different probes are connected to the oscilloscope, different information about the
probe will be displayed, and you can perform the different operations on the menu.
5.10.1 Passive Probe
If a passive probe is connected, for example, when RIGOL RP3500A probe model is
connected to the oscilloscope, press Probe to open the probe menu. Its sub-menus
are grayed out and disabled.
TIP
For some of the ordinary passive probes, the oscilloscope can recognize their probe ratio
automatically. If not recognized, please refer to "
Probe Ratio
" to set the probe ratio.
To Set the Vertical System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
55
background
5.10.2 Active Probe
If an active probe is connected, for example, when RIGOL RP7150 probe model is
connected to the oscilloscope, press Probe to open the probe menu, then operate on
the menu item.
TIP
When a 50 Ω active probe is connected, the input impedance (refer to "
Input
Impedance
") of the channel will be automatically set to "50 Ω".
For the active probe, the oscilloscope can recognize the probe ratio automatically. If the
currently connected probe supports a variety of probe ratios, please refer to
Probe Ratio
to set the probe ratio.
Probe Delay
To avoid measurement result errors arising from the transmission delay of the probe
cable, the oscilloscope provides the probe delay adjustment function for the active
probe. Press
Skew, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the probe delay.
Bias Voltage
The oscilloscope provides the bias voltage adjustment function for active probes. This
function is used to adjust the signal under test that exceeds the input dynamic range
of the probe amplifier to an appropriate range to ensure the integrity of the signal
under test. Press Bias, rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the DC bias voltage.
Probe Information
Press About to view information about the probe currently connected, such as the
manufacturer, model, serial number, and the last calibration date.
Probe Calibration
Press Calibration to start zero calibration automatically for the probe.
5.11 Amplitude Unit
Sets the amplitude display unit for the current channel. The available units are W, A, V,
and U. When the amplitude unit is changed, the unit related to the channel will also
be changed accordingly.
Press > More > Unit, then press Unit continuously or rotate the multifunction
knob to select a unit. You can also enable the touch screen to select the desired
unit. The default unit is V.
To Set the Vertical System
56
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
5.12 Channel Delay
When using an oscilloscope for actual measurement, the transmission delay of the
probe cable may bring relatively greater errors (zero offset). This series oscilloscope
allows you to set a delay time for calibrating the zero offset of the corresponding
channel. Zero offset is defined as the offset of the crossing point of the waveform and
trigger level line relative to the trigger position, as shown in
Figure 5.2
.
Figure 5.2 Zero Offset
Press > More > CH-CH Skew, rotate the multifunction knob or use the
numeric keypad to set the desired delay calibration time. The available range of the
delay calibration time is from -100 ns to 100 ns.
NOTE
This parameter is related to the instrument model and the current horizontal time base setting.
The larger the horizontal time base is, the larger the setting step will be.
5.13 To Set the Bias
When you use an oscilloscope to make actual measurements, a small offset that arises
from the temperature drift of the component or external environment disturbance
may occur on the zero-cross voltage of the channel, which will affect the
measurement results of the vertical parameters. This series oscilloscope allows you to
set an offset calibration voltage for calibrating the zero point of the corresponding
channel, so as to improve the accuracy of the measurement results.
To Set the Vertical System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
57
background
Press > More > Bias, rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad
to set the desired bias voltage.
NOTE
If the zero-cross voltage of the channel has a larger amplitude offset that exceeds the
adjustable null range, please perform self-calibration for the instrument to ensure the
measurement accuracy. For details, refer to descriptions in "
SelfCal
".
5.14 Channel Label
The instrument uses the channel number to mark the corresponding channel by
default. For ease of use, you can also set a label for each channel. For example, " ".
Press > More > Label to enter the label setting menu. You can use the built-in
label or manually input a label. Three input methods are available for you to input a
label name, including Chinese, English, and Traditional Chinese.
The label setting menu includes the following menu items.
Press Display to turn on or off the display of the channel label. If it is enabled,
the label will be displayed at the left side of the waveform. When on, CH1 is, by
default, displayed to be the channel label.
Press Library to select the preset labels such as CH1, ACK, ADDR, BIT, CLK, CS,
DATA, IN, MISO, MOSI, OUT, RX and TX.
Press Label, and the label editing interface is automatically displayed, as shown
in
Figure 5.3
. You can input the label manually. For details, refer to descriptions
in "
To Create a Folder
".
Label Input Area
Virtual Keypad
Delete KeyInput Selection Area
Upper/Lower Case Switch
Figure 5.3 Label Editing Interface
To Set the Vertical System
58
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
For example, set the label to " ". In the virtual keypad, tap "Caps" to switch
the uppercase or lowercase mode. Input "C", then tap OK to confirm the input. If
Display is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the CH1
waveform.
To delete or modify the input characters, tap to move the cursor to the right side
of the character required to be deleted or modified, and then tap the delete key
to delete the character. To modify the characters, input the desired characters
again.
The "Input Selection Area" is available for you to select Chinese characters when you
choose the Chinese input mode.
Press Info, and the channel information sub-menu is displayed. Rotate the
multifunction knob to select "Bandwidth" or "Bias", and press down the knob
to select it. Then the channel label displays the current bandwidth or bias. Both
the bandwidth and bias information can also be displayed at the same time in
the channel label, as shown in the figure below.
You can also enable the touch screen to drag the channel label to move its position
on the screen.
You can run the :CHANnel<n>:LABel:POSition command to set the position of the
specified channel label;
run the :CHANnel<n>:LABel:SIZe command to set the font size of the specified
channel label.
To Set the Vertical System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
59
background
6
To Set the Horizontal System
6.1 To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base
Horizontal time base, also called the horizontal scale, refers to the time of each grid in
the horizontal direction of the screen. It is usually expressed in s/div. The adjustable
range of the horizontal time base is related to the model type.
While you change the horizontal time base, the displayed waveforms of all channels
are expanded or compressed (please refer to "
Horizontal Expansion
") horizontally
relative to the current selected horizontal Expand baseline. The horizontal time base
at the upper-left corner of the screen will be changed accordingly, as shown in the
figure below.
You can adjust the horizontal time base with the following three methods:
Rotate Horizontal SCALE to adjust the horizontal time base within the
available range (clockwise to reduce the horizontal time base and
counterclockwise to increase).
Enable the touch screen function and adjust the horizontal time base with the
pinch & stretch gesture on the touch screen. For details, refer to the "
Pinch &
Stretch
" section.
Enable the touch screen function, and tap the Horizontal Scale label at
the top of the screen. The following window is displayed. Tap the icon at the
right side of the Scale input field to decrease or increase the horizontal time
base.You can also tap the Scale input field to input a specific value with the
displayed numeric keypad.
Decrease the timebase Increase the timebase
To Set the Horizontal System
60
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
In the Horizontal control area (Horizontal) on the front panel, press the Horizontal
SCALE knob to switch the adjustment mode between "Coarse" and "Fine" (by default,
it is Coarse). You can also press > More > Fine to enable or disable the fine
adjustment of the horizontal time base.
Coarse adjustment: Rotate the Horizontal SCALE knob will adjust the
horizontal time base of the waveforms of all channels at 1-2-5 step within the
adjustable range. Rotate it clockwise to reduce the horizontal time base, and
counterclockwise to increase the horizontal time base.
Fine adjustment: Rotate the Horizontal SCALE knob will adjust the horizontal
time base of the waveforms of all channels with a minor step value within the
adjustable range. Rotate it clockwise to reduce the horizontal time base, and
counterclockwise to increase the horizontal time base.
NOTE
When the delayed sweep is enabled, rotate the Horizontal SCALE knob to adjust the time
base for the delayed sweep. The delayed sweep time base displayed in the center of the screen
will be changed accordingly, as shown in the following figure.
6.2 To Adjust the Horizontal Position
Horizontal position, also called trigger position, refers to the trigger point position of
the waveforms of all channels in the horizontal direction relative to the screen center.
When the waveform trigger point is at the left (right) side of the screen center, the
horizontal position is a positive (negative) value.
While you change the horizontal position, the waveform trigger points and the
displayed waveforms of all channels are moved left and right. The horizontal position
at the right-upper corner of the screen changes accordingly, as shown in the figure
below.
You can adjust the horizontal Position with the following three methods:
Rotate Horizontal POSITION to adjust the horizontal position of the
waveforms of all channels. When you rotate the knob clockwise, the waveform
To Set the Horizontal System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
61
background
trigger point moves right on the screen; when rotate it counterclockwise, the
waveform trigger point moves left. Press down this knob to quickly reset the
horizontal position (the horizontal position is reset to zero).
Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the Horizontal Position with
the drag gesture. For details, refer to the "
Drag
" section.
Enable the touch screen function, and tap the Horizontal position label
at the top of the screen. The following window is displayed. Tap the
icon at the right side of the Pos input field to decrease or increase the horizontal
position.You can also tap the Pos input field to input a specific value with the
displayed numeric keypad.
Decrease the position
Increase the position
NOTE
When the delayed sweep is enabled, rotate the Horizontal POSITION to adjust the
horizontal position of the delayed sweep (press down the knob to quickly reset it). The
horizontal position of the delayed sweep at the upper-right corner of the screen changes
accordingly.
6.3 Delayed Sweep
Delayed sweep can be used to enlarge a length of waveform horizontally to view
waveform details.
In the horizontal control area on the front panel, press to enable or disable the
delayed sweep. By default, it is disabled. You can also press > More > Zoom to
enable or disable the delayed sweep function.
To Set the Horizontal System
62
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
NOTE
To enable the delayed sweep, you must ensure that the current time base mode is "YT".
In delayed sweep mode, the screen is divided into two display areas as shown in
Figure 6.1
.
Main Time Base
Horizontal Position of
the Delayed Sweep
Waveform Before
Enlargement
Waveform After Enlargement
Figure 6.1 Delayed Sweep Mode
Waveform before enlargement:
The waveform in the area that is not covered by subtransparent blue in the upper part
of the screen is the waveform before enlargement. Its horizontal time base (also
called main time base) is displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen. You can
rotate the Horizontal
POSITION knob to move the area left and right or rotate the
Horizontal SCALE knob to enlarge or reduce this area.
NOTE
If you need to modify the horizontal time base (also called main time base) of the normal
sweep, please disable the delayed sweep function first. Rotate the Horizontal SCALE knob
to set the required main time base, and then enable the delayed sweep function.
Waveform after enlargement:
The waveform in the lower part of the screen is the horizontally expanded delayed
sweep waveform. Its horizontal time base (also called the time base of the delayed
sweep) is displayed on the screen. Compared with the main time base, the time based
of the delayed sweep has increased the waveform resolution. At this time, the
To Set the Horizontal System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
63
background
Horizontal SCALE knob is to adjust the time base of the delayed sweep, and the
Horizontal POSITION knob is to adjust the horizontal position of the delayed
sweep.
NOTE
The time base of the delayed sweep should be smaller than or equal to the main time base.
To Set the Horizontal System
64
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
7
To Set the Sample System
7.1 Timebase Mode
This series of oscilloscope supports three available time base modes: YT mode, XY
mode, and ROLL mode. By default, the time base mode is YT.
Press > Timebase Mode on the front panel, and then rotate the multifunction
knob to select the desired mode. Then, press down the knob to select the mode.
You can also press Timebase Mode continuously or enable the touch screen to select
the desired mode.
7.1.1 YT Mode
In this mode, the Y axis represents voltage, and the X axis represents time.
NOTE
Only when this mode is enabled, can delayed sweep be turned on. In this mode, when the
horizontal time base is equal to or greater than 200ms/div, the instrument enters slow sweep
mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
ROLL Mode
".
7.1.2 XY Mode
In this mode, both the X axis and the Y axis represent the voltage. The mode changes
the display from voltage-time display mode to voltage-voltage display. You can use
the Lissajous method to measure the phase deviation of the two input signals whose
frequencies are the same. The following figure shows the measurement schematic
diagram of phase deviation.
To Set the Sample System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
65
background
Figure 7.1 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation
According to sinθ=A/B or C/D, θ is the phase deviation angle between the two
channels. The definitions of A, B, C, and D are shown in the above figure. The phase
deviation angle is obtained, that is:
θ=±arcsin(A/B) or ±arcsin(C/D)
If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant I and III, the phase deviation
angle obtained should be within Quadrant I and IV, namely within (0 to π/2) or (3π/2
to 2π). If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant II and IV, the phase
deviation angle obtained should be within Quadrant II and III, namely within (π/2 to
π) or (π to 3π/2).
The XY function can be used to measure the phase deviation occurred when the
signal under test passes through a circuit network. Connect the oscilloscope to the
circuit to monitor the input and output signals of the circuit.
Application example: measures the phase deviation between the input signals of two
channels.
Use Lissajous method
1. Connect one sine signal to CH1, and then connect another sine signal (with the
same frequency and amplitude as the previous one but a 90° phase deviation from
the previous one) to CH2.
To Set the Sample System
66
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
2. Press AUTO, after you select "XY" mode, rotate the Horizontal SCALE knob to
adjust the sample rate properly to obtain a better view of Lissajous graph for
observation and measurement.
3. Rotate the Vertical SCALE knob that corresponds to CH1 and CH2 respectively
to make the signals easy to observe. Then, a circle, as shown in the figure below,
should be displayed.
4. Observe the measurement result shown in the figure above. According to the
measurement schematic diagram of the phase deviation (as shown in
Figure 7.1
),
A/B(C/D)=1. Thus, the phase deviation angle of the two channel input signals is
θ=±arcsin1=90°.
NOTE
The maximum sample rate in XY mode is 2.5 GSa/s. In this mode, CH1 and CH2 are
forced to be enabled; CH3 and CH4 are forced to be disabled. Generally, a longer sample
waveform can ensure better display effect of Lissajous figure. But due to the limitation of
the memory depth, you have to reduce the waveform sample rate to acquire a longer
waveform (refer to the introduction in "
Memory Depth
"). Therefore, during the
measurement, reducing the sample rate properly can achieve better display effect of
Lissajous figure.
The following functions cannot be set in XY mode:
"
Delayed Sweep
", "
To Select the Display Type
", "
Show Scale
", "
Protocol Decoding
", "
Pass/
Fail Test
", "
Waveform Recording and Playing
", and "
Digital Channel
".
To Set the Sample System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
67
background
7.1.3 ROLL Mode
In this mode, the waveform scrolls from right to left to update the display. The
available range of the horizontal scale is from 200 ms to 1 ks. Press More > Auto
ROLL to select "ON". The system automatically enters the ROLL mode, and slow
sweep mode is disabled.
NOTE
If the current delayed sweep is enabled, then when you enable the ROLL mode, the
delayed sweep is disabled automatically. When you re-enable the "YT" mode, the delayed
sweep will be re-enabled.
The following functions cannot be set in ROLL mode:
"
To Adjust the Horizontal Position
” (available when the oscilloscope is in "Stop"
operating status), "
Delayed Sweep
", "
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
", "
Protocol Decoding
",
"
Pass/Fail Test
", "
Waveform Recording and Playing
", and "
To Set the Persistence Time
".
Slow Sweep
It is similar to the ROLL mode. In YT mode, when the horizontal time base is set to
200 ms/div or smaller, the instrument enters the "slow sweep" mode in which the
instrument first acquires the data at the left of the trigger point and then waits for a
trigger event. After the trigger occurs, the instrument continues to finish the
waveform at the right of the trigger point. When observing the low-frequency signal
in the slow sweep mode, it is recommended that you set "
Channel Coupling
" to
"DC".
7.2 Acquisition Mode
The acquisition mode is used to control how to generate waveform points from the
sample points.
This series of oscilloscope supports the following four acquisition modes: Normal,
Average, Peak, and High Res. By default, the acquisition mode is Normal.
Press > Acquisition on the front panel, and then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired acquisition mode. Then, press down the knob to select the
mode. You can also press Acquisition continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the mode.
7.2.1 Normal
In this mode, the oscilloscope samples the signal at a specified fixed time interval to
rebuild the waveform. For most of the waveforms, using this mode can produce the
optimal display effects.
To Set the Sample System
68
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
7.2.2 Average
In this mode, the oscilloscope averages the waveforms from multiple samples to
reduce the random noise of the input signal and improve the vertical resolution.
Greater number of averages can lower the noise and increase the vertical resolution;
while at the same time, it will slow the response of the displayed waveform to the
waveform changes.
When you select "Average" mode, press Averages, and rotate the multifunction knob
to set the desired number of averages. You can also use the pop-up numeric
keypad to input the average count. When the average count value is not in N power-
of-2 increments, a prompt message "Truncation average error" is displayed. At this
time, a value that is smaller than the one you input and the closest to N power-of-2
increments will be input automatically. For example, if you input 9 with the numeric
keypad, the average count will be automatically input as 8.
The number of averages can be set to 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048,
4096, 8192, 16384, 32768, or 65536. By default, it is 2.
Figure 7.2 Waveforms before Averaging
Figure 7.3 Waveforms after 128 Times of Averaging
To Set the Sample System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
69
background
7.2.3 Peak
In this mode, the oscilloscope acquires the maximum and minimum values of the
signal within the sample interval to get the envelope of the signal or the narrow pulse
that might be lost. In this mode, signal aliasing can be prevented, but the noise
displayed would be larger.
In this mode, the oscilloscope can display all the pulses whose pulse widths are at
least the same as the sample period.
7.2.4 High Resolution
This mode uses a kind of ultra-sample technique to average the neighboring points
of the sample waveform to reduce the random noise on the input signal and generate
much smoother waveforms on the screen. This is generally used when the sample
rate of the digital converter is higher than the storage rate of the acquisition memory.
NOTE
The averaging modes of the "Average" and "High Res" are different. The former uses
"Multi-sample Average" and the latter uses "Single Sample Average".
In "High Res" mode, the oscilloscope improves the measurement accuracy at the cost of
bandwidth. Each time the sampling rate changes, a window displaying the current
bandwidth appears temporally at the lower-left corner of the screen.
In high-resolution mode, highest capture rate is not available.
The available number of resolution bits is 9, 10, 11, and 12. When each bit resolution is
selected, a corresponding bandwidth is displayed temporarily.
The high-resolution mode supports all the timebase modes: YT mode (including
recording and ZOOM), XY mode, ROLL mode, and SCAN mode.
In high-resolution mode, the high-resolution waveforms can be exported, with 16 bits
per point.
When high-resolution waveforms are imported, waveform plotting and analysis also
support high resolution.
7.3 Sampling Mode
This oscilloscope only supports the real-time sampling mode. In this mode, the
oscilloscope produce the waveform display from samples collected during one trigger
event. The highest real-time sample rate on the analog channel of this oscilloscope
series is 10 GSa/s. The current sample rate is displayed under CH SampleRate.
TIP
Press on the front panel to stop sampling, and then the oscilloscope will maintain its
last captured graph. You can still expand or zoom the waveforms by using the horizontal and
vertical control knobs.
To Set the Sample System
70
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
7.4 Sample Rate
Sampling is the process of converting the analog signal into the digital signal at a
specified time interval and then restoring them in sequence. The sample rate is the
reciprocal of the time interval.
The sample rate of the analog channel is related to the current channel mode. The
maximum real-time sample rate in the single-channel mode of the oscilloscope is 10
GSa/s. The maximum real-time sample rate in the dual-channel mode is 5 GSa/s, and
the maximum real-time sample rate in the 4-channel mode is 2.5 GSa/s.
TIP
Single-channel mode: only one of the four channels (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4) is enabled.
Dual-channel mode: either CH1 or CH2 is enabled; and either CH3 or CH4 is enabled.
4-channel mode: CH1/CH2 are both enabled or CH3/CH4 are both enabled.
NOTE
The sample rate is displayed both in the status bar at the upper part of the screen and in the
CH SampleRate menu. To indirectly modify the sample rate, rotate the Horizontal SCALE
knob to adjust the horizontal time base or modify the memory depth. In addition, if the
triggering source selects the analog channel, the channel mode will be changed, and thus
affecting the sampling rate.
The impact of low sample rate on the waveform:
1. Waveform Distortion: when the sample rate is too low, some waveform details
are lost, and the sample waveform displayed is rather different from the actual
waveform of the signal.
2. Waveform Aliasing: when the sample rate is twice lower than the actual signal
frequency (Nyquist Frequency), the frequency of the waveform rebuilt from the
sample data is smaller than the actual signal frequency.
To Set the Sample System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
71
background
3. Waveform Leakage: when the sample rate is too low, the waveform rebuilt from
the sample data do not reflect all the actual signal information.
7.5 LA Sample Rate
LA sampling is the process of sampling on the compared digital signals at a certain
time interval. LA sample rate is the reciprocal of the time interval. For example, if the
LA sample rate is 500 MSa/s, it indicates that the oscilloscope will make data
acquisition on the digital signals at an interval of 2 ns. The maximum LA sample rate
of the oscilloscope is 1.25 GSa/s, and its display value is related to the sample rate of
the current analog channel.
NOTE
The digital signals mentioned here refers to the signal obtained from the comparison
between the input signal and the user-defined threshold level. The rule of the
comparison is that when the amplitude of the input signal is greater than the threshold
level, it is judged to be the logic high level; when the amplitude of the input signal is
smaller than the threshold level, it is judged to be the logic low level.
LA sample rate is displayed under the
LA SampleRate menu. To indirectly modify the LA
sample rate, rotate the Horizontal
SCALE knob to adjust the horizontal time base or
modify the memory depth.
7.6 Memory Depth
Memory depth refers to the number of points of the oscilloscope that can store in
one trigger acquisition. It reflects the storage capability of the acquisition storage.
This oscilloscope is equipped with a standard memory depth of up to 500 Mpts.
To Set the Sample System
72
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 7.4 Memory Depth
The following equation shows the relations among memory depth, sample rate, and
horizontal time base scale:
MDepth = SRate x TScale x HDivs
Mdepth:
indicates the memory depth. The unit is pts.
SRate:
indicates the sample rate. The unit is Sa/s.
TScale:
indicates the horizontal time base scale. The unit is s/div.
HDivs:
indicates the number of grids in the horizontal direction. The unit is div.
Therefore, under the same horizontal time base scale, a higher memory depth can
ensure a higher sample rate.
Press > Mem Depth, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired memory depth, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Mem Depth continuously or enable the touch screen to select the desired memory
depth. By default, the memory depth is Auto.
In single-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10
Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, 125 Mpts, 250
Mpts, and 500 Mpts.
In dual-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10
Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, 125 Mpts, and 250
Mpts.
To Set the Sample System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
73
background
In 4-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10 Kpts,
100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, and 125 Mpts.
NOTE
In "Auto" mode, the oscilloscope selects the memory depth automatically according to the
current sample rate.
7.7 LA Memory Depth
Press > More to view the memory depth of the current digital channel under
LA Mem Depth. The LA memory depth will change with the memory depth of the
analog channel, and cannot be set separately. The maximum LA memory depth is
62.5 Mpts.
7.8 Anti-Aliasing
At a slower sweep speed, the sample rate is reduced, and a dedicated display
algorithm can be used to minimize the possibility of aliasing.
Press > Anti-Aliasing to enable or disable the anti-aliasing function. By default,
anti-aliasing is disabled. In this case, it is more likely to generate waveform aliasing.
NOTE
This function should be enabled when the horizontal time base has a large deviation from the
period of the signal under test (e.g. when the horizontal time base is greater than five-fold the
period of the signal under test).
7.9 Horizontal Expansion
Horizontal expansion indicates the reference position that the screen waveform is
referenced to when it is horizontally expanded or compressed in adjusting the
Horizontal SCALE knob. In YT mode, press > More > Expand, then rotate
the multifunction knob to switch to the desired memory depth, and then press
down the knob to select the option. You can also press the Expand key continuously
or use the touch screen to select the desired reference. The horizontal expansion
reference supported by the oscilloscope includes Center, Left, Right, Trigger, and User.
The default is "Center".
Center: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the screen center.
To Set the Sample System
74
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Left: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be expanded
or compressed horizontally relative to the leftmost position of the screen.
Right: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be expanded
or compressed horizontally relative to the rightmost position of the screen.
Trigger: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the trigger point.
User: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the user-defined reference
position.
After you select "User", press Expand User and then rotate the multifunction
knob to set the expansion reference. Its available range is from rightmost
position of the screen to leftmost position of the screen. By default, it is the
screen center. Pressing down the multifunction knob can quickly reset the
user-defined reference position to 0.
NOTE
This function is unavailable in XY mode, ROLL mode, and YT mode with the delayed sweep
being enabled.
To Set the Sample System
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
75
background
8
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
As for trigger, you set certain trigger condition according to the requirement and
when a waveform in the waveform stream meets this condition, the oscilloscope
captures this waveform as well as the neighboring part, and displays them on the
screen. For the digital oscilloscope, it samples waveform continuously no matter
whether it is stably triggered, but only stable trigger can be stably displayed. The
trigger module ensures that every time base sweep or acquisition starts from the
user-defined trigger condition, namely every sweep is synchronous with the
acquisition and the waveforms acquired is overlapped so as to display the stable
waveforms.
Trigger settings should be based on the features of the input signal. To quickly
capture the desired waveform, you need to understand the signal under test. This
oscilloscope provides abundant trigger types that help you focus on the desired
waveform details.
8.1 Trigger Source
In the trigger control area on the front panel, press > Source, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select a desired source, then press down the knob to select
it. You can also press Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The analog channels (CH1-CH4), digital channels (D0-D15), EXT, or AC Line can all be
selected as the trigger source.
Analog channel input:
Signals input from analog channels CH1-CH4 can all be used as trigger sources. No
matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.
Digital channel input:
Signals input from digital channels D0-D15 can all be used as trigger sources. No
matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.
External trigger input:
The external trigger source can trigger on the fifth channel while all the other four
channels are acquiring data. The trigger signal (e.g. external clock or signal of the
circuit under test) will be connected to EXT trigger source via the external trigger
input terminal [EXT TRIG] connector. You can set the trigger conditions within the
range of the trigger level (from -8 V to +8 V).
AC line input:
The trigger signal is obtained from the AC power input of the oscilloscope. AC trigger
is usually used to measure signals relevant to the AC power frequency. For example,
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
76
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
stably triggering the waveform output from the transformer of a transformer
substation. It is mainly used in related measurements of the power industry.
8.2 Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
The adjustment of the trigger level/threshold level is related to the type of the trigger
source.
When the trigger source is selected from CH1 to CH4, rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level. During the adjustment, a trigger level line
(the color of the trigger level line is the same as that of the channel) and a
trigger label "
" are displayed on the screen, and they move up and down with
the variation of the trigger level. When you stopping modifying the trigger level,
the trigger level line disappears in about 2 s. The current trigger level of is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
In Runt Trigger, Slope Trigger, and Window trigger, you need to set the upper and lower
limits of the trigger level. Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level.
The difference between the current upper limit and lower limit of the trigger level is
displayed at the upper-right side of the screen. Two trigger level labels
and are
displayed at the left side of the screen. During the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger
level lines appear on the screen, and they move up and down with the change of the
trigger level. At the same time, the real-time trigger level information is displayed at the
lower-left corner of the screen (As shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit
of the trigger level, L indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the
trigger level deviation).
When the trigger source is EXT, rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the
trigger level. The current trigger level of is displayed at the upper-right corner of
the screen.
NOTE
For this trigger source, only the variation of the trigger level value is displayed on the
screen during the adjustment of the trigger level, without displaying the trigger level
lines on the screen.
When the trigger source is AC Line, there is no trigger level.
When the trigger source is D0-D15, rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust
the threshold level. The current threshold level value is displayed at the upper-
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
77
background
right corner of the screen. In addition, you can also press to enter the LA
logic analysis setting menu. Then set the threshold level of the digital channel in
the sub-menu threshold setting. For the setting method, refer to "
To Set the
Threshold
".
You can also enable the touch screen to adjust the trigger level/threshold level.
Two methods are available for you:
Method 1: Enable the touch screen and drag the trigger level line to adjust the
trigger level. For details about the operations, refer to descriptions in "
Drag
".
Method 2: Enable the touch screen, and tap the trigger setting label
at the upper-right corner of the screen. The following window is
displayed. Tap the
icon at the right side of the input field of the trigger
level to decrease or increase the trigger level. You can also tap the input field of
the trigger level to input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.
Level Input Field Decrease the level Increase the level
8.3 Trigger Mode
The following is the schematic diagram of the acquisition memory. To easily
understand the trigger event, we classify the acquisition memory into the pre-trigger
buffer and post-trigger buffer.
Pre-trigger Buffer Post-trigger Buffer
Trigger Event
Acquisition Memory
Figure 8.1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory
After the system runs, the oscilloscope operates by first filling the pre-trigger buffer.
It starts searching for a trigger after the pre-trigger buffer is filled. While searching for
the trigger, the data sampled will still be transmitted to the pre-trigger buffer (the
new data will continuously overwrite the previous data). When a trigger is found, the
pre-trigger buffer contains the data acquired just before the trigger. Then, the
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
78
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
oscilloscope will fill the post-trigger buffer and display the data in the acquisition
memory. If the acquisition is activated via , the oscilloscope will repeat this
process; if the acquisition is activated via , the oscilloscope will stop after
finishing a single acquisition (you can pan and zoom the currently displayed
waveform).
This oscilloscope provides Auto, Normal, and Single trigger modes. The default is
Auto.
In the trigger control area on the front panel, press to quickly switch the
current trigger mode. The trigger mode is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen: A (Auto), N (Normal), and S (Single).
Auto: In this trigger mode, if the specified trigger conditions are not found, the
oscilloscope will initiate a trigger and capture waveforms forcibly. This trigger
mode should be used when the signal level is unknown or the DC should be
displayed as well as when forcible trigger is not necessary as the trigger
condition always occurs.
Normal: In this trigger mode, triggers and acquisitions only occur when the
specified trigger conditions are found. This trigger mode should be used when
the signal is with low repetition rate or only the event specified by the trigger
setting needs to be sampled as well as when auto trigger should be prevented to
acquire stable display.
Single: In this trigger mode, the oscilloscope performs a single trigger and
acquisition when the specified trigger conditions are found, and then stops. This
trigger mode should be used when you need to perform a single acquisition of
the specified event and analyze the acquisition result (you can pan and zoom the
currently displayed waveform, and the subsequent waveform data will not
overwrite the current waveform). After a single trigger mode is initiated, the
operating status of the oscilloscope turns out to be in "STOP" state.
NOTE
In Normal and Single trigger modes, pressing can generate a trigger signal forcibly.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
79
background
You can also enable the touch screen to set the trigger mode. Tap the trigger setting
label at the upper-right corner of the screen. Then the following
window is displayed. Tap to select "Auto", "Normal", or "Single" as the trigger mode.
Level Input Field Decrease the level Increase the level
8.4 Trigger Coupling
Trigger coupling decides which kind of components will be transmitted to the trigger
module. Please distinguish trigger coupling from "
Channel Coupling
".
NOTE
Trigger coupling is only valid when the trigger type is Edge and the trigger source is an analog
channel.
Press
> Coupling in the trigger control area on the front panel, and then rotate
the multifunction knob to select the desired coupling mode (by default, it is DC).
You can also press Coupling key continuously or use the touch screen to select the
desired coupling mode.
DC: allows DC and AC components to pass the trigger path.
AC: blocks the DC components and attenuates signals.
LFR: blocks the DC components and rejects the low-frequency components.
HFR: rejects the high frequency components.
TIP
When "AC" or "LFR" is selected under Coupling, no trigger level lines and trigger icons are
displayed. When you adjust the trigger level, you can only see the changes of the trigger level
values at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.5 Trigger Holdoff
Trigger holdoff can be used to stably trigger on complex repetitive waveforms that
have multiple edges (or other events) between waveform repetitions (such as pulse
series). Holdoff time indicates the time that the oscilloscope waits for re-arming the
trigger module after generating a correct trigger. The oscilloscope will not trigger
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
80
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
even if the trigger condition is met during the holdoff time and will only re-arm the
trigger module after the holdoff time expires.
For example, to stably trigger the repetitive pulse series as shown in the figure below,
the holdoff time should be set to a value that is greater than t1 and smaller than t2.
Holdoff Time
Trigger Position
t1
t2
Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram of Trigger Holdoff
In the trigger control area (Trigger), press
> Holdoff (for some trigger, Holdoff
is a sub menu under
More, at this time, press > More > Holdoff), and then
rotate the multifunction knob at a small step to modify the holdoff time (the
holdoff to this time when the waveforms are stably triggered; by default, the holdoff
time is 8 ns) or use the numeric keypad to set the holdoff time. The adjustable range
of the holdoff time is from 8 ns to 10 s.
8.6 Noise Rejection
Noise rejection can reject the high frequency noise in the signal and reduce the
possibility of miss-trigger of the oscilloscope.
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to enter the
trigger setting menu, then press Noise Reject continuously (for some trigger, Noise
Reject is a sub-menu under More, at this time, press > More > Noise Reject)
to enable or disable the noise rejection.
NOTE
This function is only valid when the trigger source is an analog channel.
8.7 Trigger Type
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
81
background
8.7.1 Edge Trigger
Triggers on the trigger leve/threshold level of the specified edge of the input signal.
Trigger Type:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press > Type, and rotate
the multifunction knob to select "Edge", then press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. At this time,
the current trigger setting information (including trigger type, trigger source, and
trigger level/threshold level) is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as
shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the trigger settings.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4, AC Line, EXT, or D0-
D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press
Slope, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the input signal edge on
which the oscilloscope triggers. Then the current edge type is displayed at the upper-
right corner of the screen. You can also press Slope continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it.
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the
voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
82
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameters (trigger coupling, trigger holdoff and noise rejection)
under this trigger type. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Coupling
", "
Trigger
Holdoff
" and "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level or threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.2 Pulse Trigger
Triggers on the positive or negative pulse with a specified width. In this mode, the
oscilloscope will trigger when the pulse width of the input signal satisfies the
specified pulse width condition.
In this oscilloscope, positive pulse width is defined as the time difference between the
two crossing points of the trigger level and positive pulse; negative pulse width is
defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of the trigger level
and negative pulse, as shown in the figure below.
Trigger Level
+Width
A
B
-Width
A
B
Trigger Level
Figure 8.3 Positive Pulse Width/Negative Pulse Width
Trigger Type:
Press
Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Pulse". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
83
background
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Polarity:
Press Polarity continuously to select the desired polarity. The polarities available are
positive polarity ( ) or negative polarity ( ).
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
When you select "Positive" for polarity and ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified pulse width.
When you select "Positive" for polarity and "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is smaller
than the specified pulse width.
When you select "Positive" for polarity and "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified
upper limit of pulse width.
When you select "Negative" for polarity and ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified pulse width.
When you select "Negative" for polarity and "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is smaller
than the specified pulse width.
When you select "Negative" for polarity and "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
84
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified
upper limit of pulse width.
Pulse Width Setting:
When">" or "<" is set to trigger conditions, press Lower or Upper , and then
rotate the multifunction knob to set the lower limit value or the upper limit
value. You can also use the pop-up numeric keypad to set it. The pulse range
available is from 800 ps to 10 s.
When the trigger condition is set to "<>", press
Upper and Lower, and then
rotate the multifunction knob to set the upper limit value and the lower limit
value. You can also use the pop-up numeric keypad to set them.
NOTE
The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than the upper limit.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Holdoff
" and "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level or threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.3 Slope Trigger
In Slope trigger, the oscilloscope triggers on the positive or negative slope of the
specified time. This trigger mode is applicable to ramp and triangle waveforms.
In this oscilloscope, positive slope time is defined as the time difference between the
two crossing points of trigger level line A and B with the rising edge; negative slope
time is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of trigger level
line A and B with the falling edge. As shown in the figure below:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
85
background
Upper Limit of Trigger Level
(Up Level)
Lower Limit of Trigger Level
(Low Level)
A
B
Positive Slope Time
Negative Slope Time
Figure 8.4 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Slope". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-
right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger Wave.
Edge Type:
Press
Slope to select the input signal edge on which the oscilloscope triggers.
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal.
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal.
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select the trigger condition. You can also press
When continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
When you select "Rising" for the edge type and ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified time.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
86
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
When you select "Rising" for the edge type and "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is smaller
than the specified time.
When you select "Rising" for the edge type and "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit
time.
When you select "Falling" for the edge type and ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified time.
When you select "Falling" for the edge type and "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is smaller
than the specified time.
When you select "Falling" for the edge type and "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit
time.
Slope Time Setting:
When the Trigger Condition is set to ">" or "<", press Lower or Upper, and
then rotate the multifunction knob to set the lower limit value or the upper
limit value. You can also use the numeric keypad to set it. The available range of
the slope time is from 800 ps to 10 s.
When the
Trigger Condition is set to "<>", press Upper and Lower, and then
rotate the multifunction knob to set the upper limit value and the lower limit
value. You can also use the numeric keypad to set them.
NOTE
The lower slope time limit must be smaller than the upper slope time limit.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
87
background
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Press Level Select (when
"<>" is selected as the trigger condition, Level Select is a sub-menu under More),
then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired level type for adjustment,
and then press down the knob to select the type. You can also press Level Select
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
NOTE
In Slope trigger, pressing Trigger LEVEL can quickly switch the current level adjustment
type.
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the corresponding trigger level. During
the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen, and they
move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time, the real-
time trigger level information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the screen (As
shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level, L indicates
the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level deviation). When
you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and the trigger level
information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about 2 s. The current
trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Holdoff
" and "
Noise Rejection
".
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
88
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
8.7.4 Video Trigger
The video signal can include image information and timing information, which adopts
different standards and formats. This series oscilloscope can trigger on the standard
video signal field or line of NTSC (National Television Standards Committee), PAL
(Phase Alternating Line), or SECAM (Sequential Couleur A Memoire).
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Video". Press down
the knob to select the type. Then, the current trigger setting information is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You can also
press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-
right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger Wave.
Video Polarity:
Press
Polarity continuously to select the desired video polarity. The polarities
available are positive polarity ( ) and negative polarity ( ).
Video Standard:
Press Standard, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired video
standard. You can also press Standard continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it.
Video Standard
Frame
Frequency
(Frame)
Scan Type TV Scan Line
NTSC 30 Interlaced Scan 525
PAL/SECAM 25 Interlaced Scan 625
480p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 525
576p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 625
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
89
background
Video Standard
Frame
Frequency
(Frame)
Scan Type TV Scan Line
720p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 750
720p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 750
720p/30Hz 30 Progressive Scan 750
720p/25Hz 25 Progressive Scan 750
720p/24Hz 24 Progressive Scan 750
1080p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 1125
1080p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 1125
1080p/30Hz 30 Progressive Scan 1125
1080p/25Hz 25 Progressive Scan 1125
1080p/24Hz 24 Progressive Scan 1125
1080i/60Hz 60 Interlaced Scan 1125
1080i/50Hz 50 Interlaced Scan 1125
Sync:
Press Sync, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the sync type, and then
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Sync continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it.
All Lines: triggers on the first line found.
Line: triggers on the specified line.
When this sync type is selected, you can specify a line number. Press Line, then
rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to modify
the line number. The range of the line number is related to the currently selected
video standards. The range is from 1 to 525 (NTSC), 1 to 625 (PAL/SECAM, 1 to
525 (480p), 1 to 625 (576p), 1 to 750 (720p), or 1 to 1125 (1080p/1080i).
Odd: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the odd field. It is
available when the video standard is NTSC, PAL/SECAM, or 1080i.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
90
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Even: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the even field. It is
available when the video standard is NTSC, PAL/SECAM, or 1080i.
Noise Rejection:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to modify the level. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
".
TIP
For a better observation of the waveform details in the video signal, you can set a larger
memory depth first.
In the trigger debugging process of video signals, the frequency in different part of the
signal can be reflected by a different brightness, as RIGOL digital oscilloscope provides
the intensity graded color display function. Experienced users can quickly judge the
signal quality and discover abnormalities during the debugging process.
8.7.5 Pattern Trigger
Identifies a trigger condition by searching for a specified pattern. This pattern is a
logical "AND" combination of channels. Each channel can be set to H (high), L (low),
or X (don't care). A rising or falling edge (you can only specify a single edge) can be
specified for one channel included in the pattern. When an edge is specified, the
oscilloscope will trigger at the edge specified if the pattern set for the other channels
are true (namely the actual pattern of the channel is the same as the preset pattern). If
no edge is specified, the oscilloscope will trigger on the last edge that makes the
pattern true. If all the channels in the pattern are set to "X", the oscilloscope will not
trigger.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
91
background
. . .
H
.
.
.
L
(CH1~CH4 or D0~D15)
(CH1~CH4 or D0~D15)
Figure 8.5 Pattern Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press
Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Pattern". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger Wave.
Pattern Setting:
Press
Code, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the pattern of the
currently selected channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Code continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The following five
patterns are available:
H: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "1", i.g. the voltage level is higher
than the trigger level/threshold level of the channel.
L: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "0", i.g. the voltage level is lower
than the trigger level/threshold level of the channel.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
92
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.g. this channel is not used as
a part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the
oscilloscope will not trigger.
Rising: sets the pattern to the rising edge (" ") of the channel selected.
Falling: sets the pattern to the falling edge (" ") of the channel selected.
At this time, the corresponding pattern is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The
patterns of channels CH1-CH4 and D0-D15 are presented from left to right, as shown
in the figure below.
You can also set the pattern with the virtual keypad. The setting methods are as
follows:
Enable the touch screen to tap the channel pattern. Then, a virtual keypad is
displayed. Set the channel pattern with the keypad. For example, tap CH2 pattern,
then the the channel pattern is displayed, as shown in
Figure 8.6
. Tap the left arrow
key to move the cursor to the left or tap the right arrow key to move the
cursor to the right. Then select a pattern. After the pattern of the current channel is
set completely, the cursor goes to the next pattern bit automatically. Set them
respectively. After all the pattern bits are set completely, tap OK to confirm the
setting, and close the virtual keypad. You can also tap ALL to apply the current pattern
to all the channels. This key functions the same as the All Bits menu key.
Confirmation Key
All Bits
Move the cursor
to the left
Move the cursor
to the right
Pattern
Figure 8.6 Virtual Keypad for Pattern Setting
NOTE
Only one edge (rising or falling edge) can be specified in the pattern. If one edge item is
currently defined and then another edge item is defined in another channel in the pattern,
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
93
background
then a prompt message "Invalid input" is displayed. Then, the latter defined edge item will be
replaced by X.
All Bits:
Press
All Bits to set the patterns of all trigger sources to the pattern settings selected
currently.
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
And: triggers when the pattern meets the logical AND condition.
Or: triggers when the pattern meets the logical OR condition.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Holdoff
" and "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.6 Duration Trigger
In duration trigger, the instrument identifies a trigger condition by searching for the
duration of a specified pattern. This pattern is a logical "AND" combination of the
channels. Each channel can be set to H (high), L (low), or X (don't care). The
instrument triggers when the duration (△T) of this pattern meets the preset time, as
shown in the figure below.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
94
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
∆T ∆T
Pattern:HLHL
Figure 8.7 Duration Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Duration". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information
is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger Wave.
Pattern Setting:
Press Code, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the pattern of the current
signal source. Press down the knob to select it. At this time, the corresponding
pattern is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The patterns of channels CH1-CH4
and D0-D15 are presented from left to right, as shown in the figure below. You can
also press
Code continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
95
background
H: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "H", i.g. the voltage level is higher
than the trigger level/threshold level of the channel.
L: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "L", i.g. the voltage level is lower
than the trigger level/threshold level of the channel.
X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.g. this channel is not used as
a part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "Don’t Care",
the oscilloscope will not trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the the desired trigger
condition, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
>: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the preset time.
Press Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is from
800 ps to 10 s.
<: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the preset time.
Press Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is
from 800 ps to 10 s.
<>: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the upper limit of
the preset time and greater than the lower limit of the preset time. Press Upper
to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is from 801 ps to
10 s. Press Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is
from 800 ps to 9.9 s.
> <: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the upper limit of
the preset time or smaller than the lower limit of the preset time. Press
Upper to
set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is from 800 ps to 10 s.
Press Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is from
800 ps to 9.9 s.
NOTE
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
96
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
All Bits:
Press
All Bits to set the patterns of all the trigger sources to the pattern settings
selected currently.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Holdoff
" and "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.7 Timeout Trigger
In Timeout trigger, the instrument triggers when the time interval (ΔT) (the time from
when the rising edge (or falling edge) of the input signal passes through the trigger
level to the time from when the neighboring falling edge (or rising edge) passes
through the trigger level) is greater than the preset timeout value, as shown in the
figure below.
Time Out
T
Time Out
<
T
Figure 8.8 Timeout Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Timeout". Press
down the knob to select the type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press
Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
97
background
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger Wave.
Edge Type:
Press
Slope, then rotate the multifunction knob to select input signal edge on
which the oscilloscope triggers. You can also press Slope continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it.
Rising: starts timing when the rising edge of the input signal passes through
the trigger level.
Falling: starts timing when the falling edge of the input signal passes through
the trigger level.
Either: starts timing when either edge of the input signal passes through the
trigger level.
Timeout Value:
Timeout value represents the maximum time that the signal remains idle before the
signal passes through the trigger level. Press Timeout, and then rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the timeout value.
The available range is from 16 ns to 10 s.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
98
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level or threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.8 Runt Trigger
This trigger mode is used to trigger pulses that pass through one trigger level but fail
to pass through another trigger level, as shown in the figure below.
Lower Limit of the
Trigger Level
Upper Limit of the
Trigger Level
Negative Runt Pulse
Positive Runt Pulse
Figure 8.9 Runt Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Runt". Press down
the knob to select it. Then, the current trigger setting information is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You can also press
Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-
right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger Wave.
Polarity:
Press
Polarity to select the polarity of the Runt trigger.
Positive: triggers on the positive runt pulse.
Negative: triggers on the negative runt pulse.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
99
background
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the the desired trigger
condition, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
None: indicates not setting the trigger condition of Runt trigger.
>: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit of pulse
width. Press Lower to set the minimum pulse width of Runt trigger.
<: triggers when the runt pulse width is smaller than the upper limit of pulse
width. Press Upper to set the maximum pulse width of Runt trigger.
<>: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit and
smaller than the upper limit of pulse width. Press
Upper to set the maximum
pulse width of Runt trigger. Press Lower to set the minimum pulse width of Runt
trigger.
NOTE
The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than the upper limit.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Press Level Select (when
"<>" is selected as the trigger condition, Level Select is a sub-menu under More),
then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired level type for adjustment,
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Level Select
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time, and
the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower limit of
the trigger level) remains unchanged.
NOTE
In Runt trigger, pressing the Trigger LEVEL knob can quickly switch the current level
adjustment type.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
100
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the corresponding trigger level. During
the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen, and they
move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time, the real-
time trigger level information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the screen (As
shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level, L indicates
the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level deviation). When
you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and the trigger level
information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about 2 s. The current
trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Holdoff
" and "
Noise Rejection
".
8.7.9 Window Trigger
Window trigger provides a high trigger level and a low trigger level. The instrument
triggers when the input signal passes through the high trigger level or the low trigger
level.
Trigger Type:
Press
Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Window". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information
is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-
right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
101
background
Edge Type:
Press Slope, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the input signal edge on
which the oscilloscope triggers. You can also press Slope continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it.
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
is higher than the preset high trigger level.
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
is lower than the preset low trigger level.
Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the
voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
Trigger Position:
After selecting the window type, press Position to select the trigger position so as to
further specify the time point of trigger. You can also press Position continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
Enter: triggers when the input signal enters the specified trigger level range.
Exit: triggers when the input signal exits the specified trigger level range.
Time: triggers when the accumulated hold time since the input signal entered
the specified trigger level range is equal to the window time. Press Time, and
then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set
the window time. The available range is from 8 ns to 10 s.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Press Level Select, then
rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired level type for adjustment, and
then press down the knob to select the type. You can also press Level Select
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
102
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
NOTE
In Window trigger, pressing Trigger LEVEL can quickly switch the current level adjustment
type.
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the corresponding trigger level. During
the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen, and they
move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time, the real-
time trigger level and slope information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the
screen (As shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level, L
indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Holdoff
" and "
Noise Rejection
".
8.7.10 Delay Trigger
In Delay trigger, you need to set Source A and Source B. The oscilloscope triggers
when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of Source A (Edge A) and
Source B (Edge B) meets the preset time limit, as shown in the figure below.
NOTE
Edge A and Edge B must be two neighboring edges.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
103
background
T
Source A
Source B
Edge A
Edge B
Figure 8.10 Delay Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Delay". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source A:
Press SourceA to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15 as the trigger source of Source A. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge A:
Press
EdgeA continuously to select the trigger edge type of Source A in Delay trigger.
It can be set to "Rising" or "Falling" .
Source B:
Press SourceB to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15 as the trigger source of Source B. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge B:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
104
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press EdgeB continuously to select the trigger edge type of Source B in Delay trigger.
It can be set to "Rising" or "Falling" .
Trigger Condition:
Press When to set the time limit condition of Delay trigger.
>: triggers when the time difference (ΔT) between the specified edges of Source
A and Source B is greater than the preset time lower limit. Press Lower to set the
delay time lower limit in Delay trigger.
<: triggers when the time difference (ΔT) between the specified edges of Source
A and Source B is smaller than the preset time upper limit. Press Upper to set
the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger.
< >: triggers when the time difference (ΔT) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is greater than the lower limit of the preset time and
smaller than the upper limit of the preset time. Press
Upper to set the delay time
upper limit in Delay trigger. Press Lower to set the delay time lower limit in
Delay trigger.
NOTE
The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
> <: triggers when the time difference (ΔT) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is smaller than the lower limit of the preset time or
greater than the upper limit of the preset time. Press
Upper to set the delay time
upper limit in Delay trigger. Press Lower to set the delay time lower limit in
Delay trigger.
NOTE
The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Holdoff
" and "
Noise Rejection
".
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
105
background
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.11 Setup/Hold Trigger
In setup&hold trigger, you need to set the clock source and data source. The setup
time starts when the data signal passes the trigger level and ends at the coming of
the specified clock edge; the hold time starts at the coming of the specified clock
edge and ends when the data signal crosses the trigger level again, as shown in the
figure below. The oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time is smaller
than the preset time.
T1
T2
Data Source
Clock Source
T2 is the hold time
T1 is the setup time
Edage
The data type is H
Figure 8.11 Setup/Hold Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Setup/Hold". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information
is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press
Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Clock Source:
Press SCL to set the signal source of the clock line. It can be set to CH1-CH4 or D0-
D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current clock source
(trigger source) is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the clock source, can we
obtain a stable trigger.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
106
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Edge Type:
Press
Slope to select the desired clock edge type. It can be set to "Rising" or
"Falling"
.
Data Source:
Press SDA to set the signal source of the data line. It can be set to CH1-CH4 or D0-
D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current data source
(trigger source) is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Data Type:
Press Data Type to set the effective pattern of the data signal. It can be set to H (high
level) or L (low level).
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the of Setup/Hold
trigger condition, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Setup: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time is smaller than the
specified setup time. After selecting this type, press Setup, and then rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the setup time.
Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the hold time is smaller than the specified
hold time. After selecting this type, press Hold, and then rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the hold time.
Setup/Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time smaller
than the specified time value. After selecting this type, press Setup and Hold
respectively, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the setup and hold time.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
107
background
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.12 Nth Edge Trigger
Triggers on the Nth edge that appears after the specified idle time. For example, in
the waveform shown in the figure below, the instrument should trigger on the second
rising edge after the specified idle time (the time between two neighboring rising
edges), and the idle time should be within the range between P and M (P< Idle
Time<M). Wherein, M is the time between the first rising edge and its previous rising
edge; P is the maximum time between the rising edges that participate in counting.
P
M
Edge Type=
Edge Num=2
P<Idle Time<M
Figure 8.12 Nth Edge Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press
Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Nth Edge". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information
is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
108
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope to select the input signal edge on which the oscilloscope triggers.
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
Idle Time:
Press
Idle Time, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the idle time before the
edge counting in Nth edge trigger. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-
up numeric keypad to set the idle time.
Edge Count:
Press Edges to set the value of "N" in Nth edge trigger. Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the edge count. The available range is
from 1 to 65,535.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
109
background
8.7.13 RS232 Trigger (Option)
RS232 bus is a serial communication mode used in data transmission between PCs or
between a PC and a terminal. In RS232 serial protocol, a character is transmitted as a
frame of data. The frame consists of 1 start bit, 5-8 data bits, 1 check bit, and 1-2 stop
bits. Its format is as shown in the figure below. This series oscilloscope triggers when
the start frame, error frame, check error, or the specified data of the RS232 signal is
detected.
Stop BitCheck BitData BitStart Bit
1 bit 5~8 bits 1 bit 1~2 bits
Figure 8.13 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Protocol
Trigger Type:
Press
Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "RS232". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press
When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the the desired trigger
condition. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press When continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
Start: triggers on the start frame position.
Error: triggers when an error frame is detected.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
110
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Check Error: triggers when a check error is detected.
Data: triggers on the last bit of the preset data bits. Press Data, then rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the data of
RS232 trigger.
Data Bits:
Indicate the number of bits per frame. Press More > Data Bits, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select the desired data bits, and then press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Data Bits continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. The available data bits include "5 Bits", "6 Bits", "7 Bits", and "8 Bits".
Stop Bit:
Indicates when to stop outputting data. Press More > Stop Bit, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select the desired stop bit, and then press down the knob to
select it. You can also press Stop Bit continuously or enable the touch screen to select
it. The available stop bits include 1 Bit, 1.5 Bits, and 2 Bits.
Parity:
Used to verify whether data are properly transmitted. Press More > Parity, and rotate
the multifunction knob to select the desired parity mode. Then press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Parity continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. The available parity modes include "None", "Even", and "Odd".
Polarity
Press Polarity continuously to select the polarity of data transmission. It can be set to
"Pos" or "Neg" .
Baud Rate:
Sets the baud rate of data transmission (i.g. specifies a clock frequency). Three setting
methods are available for baud rate:
Press Baud Rate, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad.
Press Baud Rate, then select the preset baud rate from the drop-down list. The
available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150 bps, 300 bps,
and etc.
Press Baud Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud rate
at a small step of 1 bps.
Trigger Mode:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
111
background
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.14 I2C Trigger (Option)
I2C is a 2-wire serial bus used to connect the microcontroller and its peripheral
device. It is a bus standard widely used in the microelectronic communication control
field.
The I2C serial bus consists of SCL and SDA. Its transmission rate is determined by SCL,
and its transmission data is determined by SDA, as shown in the figure below. This
series oscilloscope triggers on the start condition, restart, stop, missing
acknowledgment, specific device address, or data value. Besides, it can also trigger on
the specific device address and data values at the same time.
Figure 8.14 Schematic Diagram of I2C Protocol
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "I2C". Press down the
knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press
Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
112
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press SCL and SDA to specify the sources of SCL and SDA respectively. They can be
set to CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The
current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the the desired trigger
condition. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press When continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
Start: triggers when SDA data transitions from high level to low level while SCL is
high level.
Stop: triggers when SDA data transitions from low level to high level while SCL is
high level.
Restart: triggers when another start condition occurs before a stop condition.
MissedAck: triggers when the SDA data is high level during any
acknowledgment of SCL clock position.
Address: the trigger searches for the specified address value. When this event
occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the read/write bit. After this trigger
condition is selected:
- Press AddrBits, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
address bits, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
AddrBits continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".
- Press Address, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the address of I2C trigger.
- Press More > Direction to select "Read", "Write" or "R/W".
NOTE
This setting is not available when
AddrBits is set to "8 Bits".
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
113
background
Data: the trigger searches for the specified data value on the data line (SDA).
When this event occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the clock line (SCL)
transition edge of the last bit of data. After this trigger condition is selected:
- Press Bit X, and set the current bit with the following two methods.
Method 1: First rotate the multifunction knob to switch to the data bit
that needs to be operated on. Then press down the knob continuously to
set the current bit. As shown in the figure below, the left is its binary
format, and the right is its corresponding Hex format.
Method 2: Press Bit X or enable the touch screen to select the data bit.
Then set it with the pop-up virtual keypad. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Pattern Trigger
". If you modify the binary data bit, a virtual
keypad as shown in
Figure 8.15
is displayed. If you modify the hex data bit,
a virtual keypad as shown in
Figure 8.16
is displayed.
Figure 8.15 Virtual Keypad for Binary Data Bit
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
114
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 8.16 Virtual Keypad for Hex Data Bit
- Press Bytes, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 5.
- Press More > Addr Bits, then rotate the multifunction knob to select
the desired address bits, and then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Addr Bits continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".
A&D: the oscilloscope searches for the specified address and data at the same
time, then triggers when both the address and data meet the conditions. After
this condition is selected, you need to set the sub-menu items such as Bit X,
Bytes, Addr Bits, Address, and Direction. For the setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Address" and "Data" conditions.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
115
background
8.7.15 SPI Trigger (Option)
In SPI trigger, after the CS or timeout condition is satisfied, the oscilloscope triggers
when the specified data is found. When using SPI trigger, you need to specify the CLK
clock sources and MISO data sources.
Below is the sequential chart of SPI bus.
SDA
SCL
CS
D7
D6 D5
D4 D3
D2 D1 D0
Figure 8.17 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "SPI". Press down the
knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press
CLK and MISO to specify the sources of CLK and MISO respectively. They can be
set to CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The
current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope continuously to select the desired clock edge type. Press down the knob
to select it.
Rising: samples the MISO data on the rising edge of the clock.
Falling: samples the MISO data on the falling edge of the clock.
Trigger Condition:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
116
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press When continuously to select the desired trigger condition.
Timeout: the oscilloscope starts to search for the data (MISO) on which to
trigger after the clock signal (CLK) stays in the idle state for a specified period of
time. After selecting this condition, you can press Timeout, then rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the idle time.
The range is from 8 ns to 10 s.
With CS: if the CS signal is valid, the oscilloscope will trigger when the data
(SDA) satisfying the trigger conditions is found.
- After selecting this condition, you can press CS select the chip selection
signal line. The available channels are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15. For details,
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
- Press More > CS Mode to set the current CS mode to "Pos " (high
level is valid) or "Neg " (low level is valid).
Current Bit:
Press More > Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
Data Bits:
Press More > DataBits, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the number of bits in the serial data string. The number of bits
in the string can be set to any integer ranging from 4 to 32.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
117
background
8.7.16 CAN Trigger (Option)
This oscilloscope can trigger on the start of a frame, end of a frame, frame of the
specified type (e.g. Remote, Overload, Data, etc.), or error frame of the specified type
(e.g. Answer Error, Check Error, Format Error, etc.) of the CAN signal.
The data frame format of the CAN bus is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 8.18 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "CAN". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press
When to select the desired trigger condition.
SOF: triggers at the start of a frame.
EOF: triggers at the end of a frame.
Remote ID: triggers on the specified ID of Remote frame. Set the following
parameters:
- Press Extend ID to enable or disable the extended ID.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
118
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Press Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
Overload: triggers on the overload frames.
Frame ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID. Set the following
parameters:
- Press Extend ID to enable or disable the extended ID.
- Press Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
Frame Data: triggers on the data frames with the specified Data. Set the
following parameters:
- Press Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
- Press Bytes, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
Data & ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID and data. Set the
following parameters:
- Press Define to select "Data" or "ID".
- When you select "Data", set Bit X and Bytes. For detailed settings, refer to
parameter settings for "Frame Data".
- When you select "ID", set Extended ID and Bit X. For detailed settings, refer
to parameter settings for "Frame ID".
Frame Error: triggers on the error frame.
Bit Fill: triggers on the error frame with the bit fill.
Answer Error: triggers on the answer error frame.
Check Error: triggers on the check error frame.
Format Error: triggers on the format error frame.
Random Error: triggers on the random error frame, such as the format error
frame, answer error frame, etc.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
119
background
Signal Type:
Press More > Signal Type to select the desired signal type.
CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.
CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.
TX/RX: indicates the Transmit signal and Receive signal from the CAN bus
transceiver.
DIFF: indicates the CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog channel
by using a differential probe. Connect the differential probe's positive lead to the
CAN_H bus signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus signal.
Baud Rate:
Press More > Baud to set the baud rate. Three methods are available for setting the
baud rate:
Press Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad.
Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the preset baud rate
from the available options. The available baud rates include 10 kb/s, 20 kb/s,
33.3 kb/s, 50 kb/s, 62.5 kb/s, 83.3 kb/s, and etc.
Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud rate at a
small step. The step size is different for adjusting different baud rates.
Sample Position
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level
at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from
the start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure
below.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Figure 8.19 Sample Position
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
120
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press More > Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10% to
90%.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.17 FlexRay Trigger (Option)
This series oscilloscope can trigger on the specified frame, symbol, error, or position
of the FlexRay bus.
FlexRay is a type of differential serial bus configured with three consecutive segments
(i.g. packet header, payload, and packet trailer). Its data transmission rate is up to 10
Mb/s. Each frame contains a static segment and a dynamic segment, and ends with
the bus idle time.
Its format is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 8.20 Frame Format of FlexRay Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "FlexRay". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
121
background
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Baud Rate:
Press
Baud, and rotate the multifunction knob to select a FlexRay baud rate that
matches the actual FlexRay bus signal. Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Baud continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available baud
rates are 2.5 Mb/s, 5 Mb/s, and 10 Mb/s.
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
Post: triggers on the specified position of the FlexRay bus. Press Post to select
"TSS End", "FSS_BSS End", "FES End", or "DTS End".
Frame: triggers on the frame of FlexRay bus.
- Press Frame to select the frame type. The types of frames include null, Sync,
Start, and All.
- Press More > Define to select "ID" or "Cyc Count".
When you select "ID", set the following parameters: ID Comp and ID Min.
Press More > ID Comp to select the comparison conditions. The available
choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>. Press More > ID Max or press More >
ID Min, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the frame ID.
When you select "Cyc Count", set the following parameters: Cyc Comp and
Count Min. Press More > Cyc Comp to select the comparison conditions.
The available choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>. Press More > Count Max
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
122
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
or press More >Count Min, then rotate the multifunction knob or use
the pop-up numeric keypad to set the cycle count.
Symbol: triggers on the CAS/MTS (Collision Avoidance Symbol/Media Access
Test Symbol) and WUP (Wakeup Pattern) of FlexRay bus.
- Press Symbol to select the symbol type. The symbol type includes CAS/MTS
and WUS.
- Press More > ID Comp to select the comparison conditions. The available
choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>. Press More > ID Max or press More >
ID Min, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the frame ID.
Error: triggers when an error occurs to the FlexRay bus. Press Error to select the
error type. It includes Head CRC Err, Tail CRC Err, Decode Err, and Random Err.
NOTE
As the occurrence possibility of specified FlaxRay frame is very low, it is recommended that you
set the oscilloscope to "Normal" trigger mode when the trigger condition is set to "Frame", so
as to prevent the instrument from triggering automatically while waiting for the specified
frame. The same goes for "Error" trigger condition. In addition, when multiple FlexRay errors
occur at the same time, you need to adjust the trigger holdoff so as to view the specific error.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.18 LIN Trigger (Option)
This oscilloscope can trigger on the sync field of LIN signal, and can also trigger on
the specified identifier, data, or frame.
The data frame format of the LIN bus is as shown in the figure below.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
123
background
Figure 8.21 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "LIN". Press down the
knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press
When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select it.
You can also press When continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Sync: triggers on the last bit of the sync field.
ID: triggers when the frames with the specified ID are found. Press ID, then
rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set ID.
Data: triggers when the data that meet the preset conditions are found.
- Press Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
- Press Bytes, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
124
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Data&ID: triggers when the frames with the specified ID and data that meet the
preset conditions are both found.
- Press Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
- Press Bytes, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
- Press ID, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set ID.
Sleep: triggers when the sleep frame is found.
Wakeup: triggers when the wakeup frame is found.
Error: triggers on the specified type of error frame. Press Error Type to select the
error type: Sync, Even Odd, or Check Sum.
Protocol Version:
Press More > Version, select the protocol version that matches the signal under test.
The available versions include 1.X, 2.X and Both.
Baud Rate:
Press More > Baud to set the baud rate. Three methods are available for setting the
rate:
Press Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad.
Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the preset baud rate
from the available options. The available baud rates include 1.2 kbps, 2.4 kbps,
4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, and etc.
Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud rate at a
small step.
Sample Position
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level
at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from
the start of the bit to the sample point" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure
below.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
125
background
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Figure 8.22 Sample Position
Press More > Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10% to
90%.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.19 I2S Trigger (Option)
In I2S trigger, the oscilloscope searches for the specified data value and take it as the
condition for identifying the trigger. You need to specify the serial clock line (SCLK, 1
pulse is found on the clock line once 1 bit of digital audio data is sent), frame clock
line (WS, used for switch the audio channel data), and serial data line (SDA, used for
transmit audio data represented in binary (2's complement)).
Below is the sequential chart of I2S bus.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
126
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 8.23 Sequential Chart of I2S Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "I2S". Press down the
knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Source Selection:
Press SCLK, WS, and SDA to specify the sources for SCLK, WS, and SDA. The available
choices are CH1-CH4, EXT, or D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger
Source
". The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press
SCLK Edge, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired clock
edge type. Press down the knob to select it.
Rising: samples the SDA data on the rising edge of the clock.
Falling: samples the SDA data on the falling edge of the clock.
Audio:
Press
Audio continuously or rotate the multifunction knob to select the audio
channel. The available choices include "Left", "Right", and "Either".
Trigger Condition:
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
127
background
Press More > When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger
condition, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
=: triggers when the channel's data value equals the set data value. Press Data
to set the data bit. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger
(Option)
".
≠: triggers when the channel's data value does not equal the set data value.
Press Data to set the data bit. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C
Trigger (Option)
".
<: triggers when the channel's data value is smaller than the set data value. Press
Data Max to set the upper limit of the data bit. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
>: triggers when the channel's data value is greater than the set data value. Press
Data Min to set the lower limit of the data bit. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
><: triggers when the channel's data value is smaller than the upper limit of the
data value and greater than the lower limit of the data value. Press Data Max
and Data Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data bit respectively.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
<>: triggers when the channel's data value is greater than the upper limit of the
data value and smaller than the lower limit of the data value. Press Data Max
and Data Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data bit respectively.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
Width:
Press More > Width, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the width. Its range is from 4 to 32.
User Width:
Press More > User Width, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the user width. Its range is from 4 to 32.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
128
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
NOTE
The user width is smaller than or equal to the width.
Alignment:
Press More > Alignment, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
alignment way for data signal. You can also press Alignment continuously or enable
the touch screen to select it.
I2S: MSB (Most Significant Bit) of data for each sample is sent first, and LSB (Least
Significant Bit) is sent last. The MSB appears on the SDA line one bit clock after the
edge of the WS transition.
LJ: data transmission (MSB first) begins at the edge of the WS transition.
RJ: data transmission (MSB first) is right-justified to the WS transition.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/ threshold level. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
". The current trigger level/
threshold level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
8.7.20 MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option)
1553B is the abbreviation for the MIL-STD-1553 bus. This oscilloscope can trigger on
the sync field of 1553B bus, and can also trigger on the specified data word,
command word, status word, or error type.
The command word, data word, and status word format of the 1553B bus is as shown
in the figure below.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
129
background
Bit
Times
Bit
Times
Data
Word
Bit
Times
Status
Word
Sync Remote Terminal Address
5 5 5
T/R
Subaddress / Mode
Word Count /Mode Code
P
P
16
Sync
16-bit Data
Sync
Remote Terminal Address
5 3
Message Error
Service Request
Instrumentation
Broadcast CMD Received
Busy
Subsystem Flag
Dynamic Bus Acceptance
Terminal Flag
Odd Parity
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Command
Word
Reserved
Figure 8.24 Formats of the Command Word, Data Word, and Status Word of the
1553B Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "MIL-STD-1553".
Press down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Trigger Source
". The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-
right corner of the screen.
NOTE
Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger source, can
we obtain a stable trigger.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
130
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select it.
You can also press When continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Sync: triggers on the specified sync type. After this trigger condition is selected,
press Sync to select the desired sync type: Data Sync, Cmd/Status Sync, or All
Sync.
Data: triggers on the specified data word. After this trigger condition is selected,
press Comp to select the comparison conditions. The available choices include
=, ≠, >, <, ><, and <>.
- =: triggers when the channel's data word equals the set data word. Press
Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
- ≠: triggers when the channel's data word does not equal the set data word.
Press Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
- <: triggers when the channel's data word is smaller than the set data word.
Press Max to set the upper limit of the data word. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
- >: triggers when the channel's data word is greater than the set data word.
Press Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
- < >: triggers when the channel's data word is smaller than the upper limit
of the data word and greater than the lower limit of the data word. Press
Max and Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data word
respectively. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger
(Option)
".
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
131
background
- > <: triggers when the channel's data word is greater than the upper limit
of the data word and smaller than the lower limit of the data word. Press
Max and Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data word
respectively. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger
(Option)
".
RTA: triggers on the specified remote terminal address. After this trigger
condition is selected, press RTA to set the remote terminal address. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
RTA+11Bit: triggers on the RTA and the remaining 11 bits. After this trigger
condition is selected:
- Press RTA to set the remote terminal address. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
".
- Press Bit time to set the bit time position value to 0 (low), 1 (high), or X
(don't care). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger
(Option)
".
Error: triggers on the specified error type. After this trigger condition is selected,
press Err Type to select the error type.
- Sync Error: triggers when an invalid sync pulse is found.
- Check Error: triggers when the parity bit is incorrect for the data in the
word.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Press Level Select (when
"Data" is selected for the trigger condition, press More > Level Select), then rotate
the multifunction knob to select the desired level type for adjustment, and then
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Level Select continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
132
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
NOTE
In MIL-STD-1553 trigger, pressing the Trigger LEVEL knob can quickly switch the current
level adjustment type.
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the corresponding trigger level. During
the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen, and they
move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time, the real-
time trigger level and slope information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the
screen (As shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level, L
indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Polarity:
Press More > Polarity continuously to select the desired polarity. The polarities
available are positive polarity ( ) and negative polarity ( ).
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press
to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Trigger Mode
".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Noise Rejection
".
8.8 Zone Trigger
This series oscilloscope supports the zone trigger and provides two rectangle areas:
Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B. You can set the trigger conditions to "Intersect" or
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
133
background
"Not intersect". Refer to "
Rectangle Drawing
" to select "Trigger zone A" or "Trigger
zone B" to open the zone trigger setting menu. You can also press > Analyze >
Zone trigger to enter the zone trigger setting menu.
Enable or Disable Trigger zone A or Trigger zone B:
Press Zone A enable or Zone B enable continuously to enable or disable Trigger
zone A or Trigger zone B. You can also refer to "
Rectangle Drawing
" to select "Trigger
zone A" or "Trigger zone B" to enable Trigger zone A or Trigger zone B. If both Trigger
zone A and Trigger zone B are disabled, then the zone trigger function is disabled. At
this time, you must enable either of them to re-enable the zone trigger.
NOTE
If "
XY Mode
" or "
ROLL Mode
" is enabled, the zone trigger function is disabled.
Select Source A or Source B:
Press
Source A or Source B, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Source
A or Source B continuously to select the trigger source; or enable the touch screen to
tap the desired trigger source and select it. The available sources include CH1-CH4.
The zone name color and the zone color are the same as the color of the selected
source channel.
Set the Conditions for Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B:
Press
Zone A or Zone B, then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Intersect" or
"Not intersect", then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Zone A or
Zone B continuously to select the condition; or enable the touch screen to tap the
desired condition and select it.
If you enable Zone A, select CH1 as Source A and select "Intersect" as the condition,
as shown in the figure below.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
134
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
If you enable Zone A, select CH1 as Source A and select "Intersect" as the condition,
the following figure is displayed.
TIP
If you enable both Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B, then perform the "A&&B" operation,
and it will become the final trigger condition.
8.9 Trigger Output Connector
The trigger output connector ([TRIG OUT]) on the rear panel of this oscilloscope
series can output trigger signals determined by the current setting.
Trigger Output Connector
Figure 8.25 Trigger Output Connector
Press > System > AUX Out to select "TrigOut”. A signal which reflects the
current capture rate of the oscilloscope can be output from the [TRIG OUT]
connector each time a trigger is generated by the oscilloscope. If this signal is
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
135
background
connected to a waveform display device to measure the frequency, the measurement
result is the same as the current capture rate.
NOTE
If you press > System > AUX Out to select "PassFail", then in the pass/fail test, when a
pass/fail event is detected, the oscilloscope outputs a pulse from the rear-panel [TRIG OUT]
connector.
To Trigger the Oscilloscope
136
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
9
Operations and Measurements
MSO8000A can perform math operations, auto measurements, and cursor
measurements on sampled and displayed data.
9.1 Math Operation
Press in the waveform control area (Wave) on the front panel to open the math
operation menu. You can also tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left
corner of the screen to open the function navigation. This oscilloscope provides 4
math operations: Math1, Math2, Math3, and Math4. The following section takes
Math1 as an example to introduce math operation.
Press > Math1 > Operator to select the desired math function. Press
Operation continuously to enable or disable the operation. When enabled, the results
of math operation are displayed with purple waveforms on the screen, and the math
operation formula, vertical scale, and other parameters (the displayed data
parameters are different for different math operations) are displayed at the bottom of
the screen. The results of the math operation also allow further measurement. This
oscilloscope supports enabling four math operations at the same time, as shown in
the figure below.
This series of oscilloscope can realize multiple math operations between waveforms
of different channels, including
arithmetic operations (A+B, A-B, A×B, A/B, and Avg)
FFT operation
logic operation: A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A
function operation: Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg, Ln, Exp, Abs, and AX+B (linear function)
math filter: low-pass filter, high-pass filter, band-pass filter, and band-stop filter
NOTE
When you select the source, only the enabled channel is available.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
137
background
9.1.1 Addition
Add the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point and display
the results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "A+B":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the addition operation
function.
Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for SourceA and SourceB. Then press down the knob to
select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
SourceA and SourceB are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for
better observation.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Expand to expand or compress the math operation waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
Operations and Measurements
138
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to the descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.2 Subtraction
Subtract the waveform voltage values of signal source B from that of source A point
by point and display the results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "A-B":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the subtraction operation
function.
Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for SourceA and SourceB. Then press down the knob to
select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
SourceA and SourceB are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
139
background
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for
better observation.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Expand to expand or compress the math operation waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.3 Multiplication
Multiply the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point and
display the results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "A×B":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the multiplication operation
function.
Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for SourceA and SourceB. Then press down the knob to
select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
SourceA and SourceB are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Operations and Measurements
140
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press
Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for
better observation.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Expand to expand or compress the measurement waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.4 Division
Divide the waveform voltage values of signal source A by that of source B point by
point and display the results. It can be used to analyze the multiple relationships of
waveforms of two channels. Note: When the voltage of signal source B is 0 V, the
division result is treated as 0.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
141
background
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "A÷B":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the division operation
function.
Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for SourceA and SourceB. Then press down the knob to
select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
SourceA and SourceB are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for
better observation.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Expand to expand or compress the measurement waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Operations and Measurements
142
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.5 FFT
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is used to transform time-domain signals to frequency-
domain components (frequency spectrum). This series of oscilloscope provide FFT
operation function which enables you to observe the time-domain waveform and
spectrum of the signal at the same time. FFT operation can facilitate the following
works:
Measure harmonic components and distortion in the system;
Display the characteristics of the noise in DC power;
Analyze vibration.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "FFT":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the FFT operation function.
When enabled, the operation results are displayed as purple waveforms on the
screen. At the same time, the parameters such as vertical scale, center frequency,
and resolution are displayed at the bottom of the screen, as shown in the
following figure. Of which, FFT resolution is the quotient of the sample rate and
the number of FFT points. If the number of FFT points is a fixed value (65535 at
most), then the lower the sample rate, the higher the resolution.
Vertical Scale
Span
ResolutionCenter FrequencySample Rate
Press
Source, rotate the multifunction knob , and then press the knob to
select the channel. You can also press Source continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the channel. The available channels are CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
143
background
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen and use the "Pinch &
Stretch" gesture to adjust the vertical scale. If the source channel unit is set to
"V", then the unit of the vertical scale is displayed as dBV. If you select other
source channel unit, then the unit of the vertical scale is displayed as dB.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > Unit to select the vertical unit. The vertical unit can be set to
dB/dBm or Vrms. The vertical amplitude can be expressed both in log form and
linear form, with dBm/dBV and Vrms as the unit respectively. If you need to
display the FFT spectrum within a larger dynamic range, dBm/dBV is
recommended.
Press More > X to select "Span-Center" (frequency range to center frequency) or
"Start-End" (start frequency to stop frequency).
- "Span-Center" (frequency range to center frequency): the frequency range
refers to the screen width, and you can divide the frequency range by 10 to
obtain the frequency per division. Press Span to set the frequency range of
the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "
Parameter Setting Method
". Press Center to set the frequency of the
frequency-domain waveform relative to the horizontal center of the screen.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- "Start-End" (start frequency to stop frequency): start frequency refers to the
frequency at the left side of the screen. Press
Start to set the start
Operations and Measurements
144
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
frequency of the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". Stop frequency refers to the
frequency at the right side of the screen. Press End to set the stop
frequency of the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Press More > Peak Search to enter the peak search menu.
Press Peak Search continuously to enable or disable the Peak search function.
When enabled, the peak search results are displayed on the screen, as shown in
the figure below. Enable the touch screen and tap the "Math" label at the top of
the peak search results to switch among Math1-Math4.
- Press Peak Number, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-
up numeric keypad to set the number of peaks. Its range is from 1 to 15. By
default, it is is 5.
- Press
Threshold, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold of the peak.
- Press Excursion, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the excursion of the peak.
- Press Table Order, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
sorting mode of the peak, and then press down the knob to select the
mode. You can also press Source continuously or enable the touch screen
to select the mode. The available sorting mode is "Amp Order" and "Freq
Order". By default, it is "Amp Order".
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
145
background
- Press Export, and the save setting menu is displayed. You can export the
peak search results to the internal memory or the external USB storage
device in CSV format. For detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in
"
Store and Load
".
Press More > Window to select the desired window function.
Spectral leakage can be considerably decreased when a window function is used.
This series of oscilloscope provides 6 FFT window functions (as shown in
Table
9.1 Window Function
) which have different characteristics and are applicable to
measure different waveforms. You need to select the window function according
to the characteristics of the waveform to be measured.
Table 9.1 Window Function
Window
Function
Characteristics
Waveforms Applicable to the Window
Function
Rectangular
Best frequency
resolution
Poorest amplitude
resolution
Similar to the situation
when no window is
applied.
Transient or short pulse, the signal levels
before and after the multiplication are
basically the same.
Sine waveforms with the same amplitudes
and rather similar frequencies.
Wide band random noise with relatively
slow change of waveform spectrum.
Blackman-
Harris
Best amplitude
resolution
Poorest frequency
resolution
Single frequency signal, searching for higher
order harmonics
Hanning
Better frequency
resolution and poorer
amplitude resolution
compared with
Rectangular
Sine, periodic, and narrow band random
noise
Hamming
A little bit better
frequency resolution
than Hanning
Transient or short pulse, the signal levels
before and after the multiplication are
rather different
Operations and Measurements
146
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Window
Function
Characteristics
Waveforms Applicable to the Window
Function
Flattop
Measure the signals
accurately
Measure the signal that has no accurate
reference and requires an accurate
measurement
Triangle
Better frequency
resolution
Measure the narrow band signal and that
has strong noise interference
For FFT math operation setting label, refer to descriptions in "
Math Operation
Label
".
Press More > More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display
of the FFT operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the
screen to indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and
then display the color grade again.
TIP
FFT shortcut operation: Enable the touch screen, and then tap the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "FFT" icon
to open the FFT menu. This oscilloscope supports 4 FFTs: FFT1, FFT2, FFT3, and FFT4. For
details, refer to the descriptions in this section.
9.1.6 "AND" Operation
Performs logic "AND" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic AND operation of
two binary bits are shown in
Table 9.2 Logic "AND" Operation
.
Table 9.2 Logic "AND" Operation
A B A&&B
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
147
background
A B A&&B
1 1 1
Press > Math1 > Operator to "A&&B":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "AND" function.
Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for SourceA and SourceB. Then press down the knob to
select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
SourceA and SourceB are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
NOTE
Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, press More > Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, press More > Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, press More > Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, press More > Thre.CH4 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
TIP
The thresholds of the digital channels (D0-D15) are respectively set in the LA
module.
Press Offset, then rotate the multifunction knob to set the vertical offset of
the operation results. You can also directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or
enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical offset.
Press Size, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform size,
and press down the knob to select the size. You can also press Size continuously
or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available sizes include
Operations and Measurements
148
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
"Small", "Medium", and "Large". In addition, you can also rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE to adjust the waveform size.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for
better observation.
Press More > Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to the descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
9.1.7 "OR" Operation
Performs logic "OR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic OR operation of
two binary bits are shown in
Table 9.3 Logic "OR" Operation
.
Table 9.3 Logic "OR" Operation
A B A||B
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "A||B":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "A||B" operation function.
Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for SourceA and SourceB. Then press down the knob to
select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
SourceA and SourceB are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
149
background
NOTE
Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, press More > Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, press More > Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, press More > Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, press More > Thre.CH4 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Press Offset, then rotate the multifunction knob to set the vertical offset of
the operation results. You can also directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or
enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical offset.
Press Size, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform size.
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously or enable
the touch screen to select the channel. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large". In addition, you can also rotate Wave Vertical SCALE
to adjust the waveform size.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for
better observation.
Press More > Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Operations and Measurements
150
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
9.1.8 "XOR" Operation
Performs logic "XOR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic OR operation of
two binary bits are shown in
Table 9.4 Logic "XOR" Operation
.
Table 9.4 Logic "XOR" Operation
A B A^B
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "A^B":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "A^B" operation function.
Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for SourceA and SourceB. Then press down the knob to
select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
SourceA and SourceB are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
NOTE
Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, press More > Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, press More > Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, press
More > Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, press More > Thre.CH4 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
151
background
Press Offset, then rotate the multifunction knob to set the vertical offset of
the operation results. You can also directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or
enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical offset.
Press Size, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform size.
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously or enable
the touch screen to select the channel. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large". In addition, you can also rotate Wave Vertical SCALE
to adjust the waveform size.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for
better observation.
Press More > Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to the descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
9.1.9 "NOT" Operation
Performs logic "NOT" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic "NOT" operation of
two binary bits are as shown in
Table 9.5 Logic "NOT" Operation
.
Table 9.5 Logic "NOT" Operation
A !A
0 1
1 0
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "!A":
Operations and Measurements
152
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "NOT" function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
NOTE
Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
- If Source A selects CH1, press More > Thre.CH1 to set the threshold of
Source A in logic operation. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in
"
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A selects CH2, press More > Thre.CH2 to set the threshold of
Source A in logic operation. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in
"
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A selects CH3, press More > Thre.CH3 to set the threshold of
Source A in logic operation. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in
"
Parameter Setting Method
".
- If Source A selects CH4, press More > Thre.CH4 to set the threshold of
Source A in logic operation. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in
"
Parameter Setting Method
".
Press Offset, then rotate the multifunction knob to set the vertical offset of
the operation results. You can also directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or
enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical offset.
Press Size, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform size.
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously or enable
the touch screen to select the channel. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large". In addition, you can also rotate Wave Vertical SCALE
to adjust the waveform size.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
153
background
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to the descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
9.1.10 Intg
Calculates the integral of the selected source. For example, you can use integral to
measure the area under a waveform or the pulse energy.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "Intg":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Intg" operation function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > Bias to set the DC offset correction factor for the input signal.
Note that this parameter can only be set by using the numeric keypad.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Operations and Measurements
154
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to the descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.11 Diff
Calculates the discrete time derivative of the selected source. For example, you can
use differentiate to measure the instantaneous slope of a waveform.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "Diff":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Diff" operation function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
155
background
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press
More > Smooth to set the number of smoothing times in differential
operation. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
Parameter Setting
Method
".
NOTE
As the high-frequency component of waveform data has a great impact on the
differential operation, you need to adjust the parameter "Smooth" to a larger value, so as
to restore the low-frequency component.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
TIP
Because differentiation is very sensitive to noise, it is helpful to set acquisition mode to
"Average".
9.1.12 Sqrt
Calculates the square roots of the selected source point by point and displays the
results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "Sqrt":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Sqrt" operation function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
Operations and Measurements
156
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.13 Lg (Base 10 Exponential)
Calculates the base 10 exponential of the selected source point by point and displays
the results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "Lg":
Press
Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Lg" operation function.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
157
background
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.14 Ln
Calculates the natural logarithm (Ln) of the selected source point by point and
displays the results.
Operations and Measurements
158
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press > Math1 > Operator to "Ln":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Ln" operation function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
159
background
9.1.15 Exp
Calculates the exponential of the selected source point by point and displays the
results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "Exp":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Exp" operation function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Operations and Measurements
160
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.16 Abs
Calculates the absolute value of the selected source and displays the results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "Abs":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Abs" function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
161
background
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to the descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.17 Low Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current upper limit
frequency to pass.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "LowPass":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "LowPass" operation
function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Operations and Measurements
162
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press
ωc to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
NOTE
The settable range of the Upper limit frequency is related to the Math sample rate
(displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is enabled). The sample
rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory depth can affect the Math
sample rate.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as
to better observe.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.18 High Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current lower limit
frequency to pass.
Press > Math1 > Operator to select "HighPass":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "HighPass" operation
function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
163
background
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press
Offset set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust the
vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press
ωc to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
NOTE
The settable range of the lower limit frequency is related to the Math sample rate
(displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is enabled). The sample
rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory depth can affect the Math
sample rate.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as
to better observe.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display on the of
the operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen
to indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Color Grade to clear the color grade display and display the color
grade again.
Operations and Measurements
164
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
9.1.19 Band Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current lower limit
frequency and lower than the current upper limit frequency to pass.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "BandPass":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "BandPass" operation
function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > ωc1 to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Press More > ωc2 to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
NOTE
The settable ranges of the upper and lower limit frequencies are related to the Math
sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is enabled).
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
165
background
The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory depth can affect
the Math sample rate.
Press
More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.20 Band Stop
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current lower limit
frequency and higher than the current upper limit frequency to pass.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "BandStop":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "BandStop" operation
function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Operations and Measurements
166
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > ωc1 to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
Press
More > ωc2 to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
".
NOTE
The settable ranges of the Lower and Upper limit frequencies are related to the Math
sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is enabled).
The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory depth can affect
the Math sample rate.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to the descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.21 AX+B
Applies a linear function to the selected source, and displays the results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "AX+B":
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
167
background
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "AX+B" operation
function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
Press More > A to set the value of A. Note that this parameter can only be set
by using the numeric keypad.
Press More > B to set the value of B. Note that this parameter can only be set by
using the numeric keypad.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to the descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Operations and Measurements
168
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.22 Avg
Averages the waveforms of the specified channel for several times and displays the
results.
Press > Math1 > Operator to "Avg":
Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Avg" operation function.
Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
SourceA. You can also press SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel. The available channels for SourceA are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-
Ref10.
NOTE
The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source of Math3 can be
CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-
Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that have been enabled currently can
be selected.
Press Averages to input the average time in the displayed numeric keypad.
When the average count value is not in N power-of-2 increments, a prompt
message "Truncation average error" is displayed. At this time, a value that is
smaller than the one you input and the closest to N power-of-2 increments will
be input automatically. For example, if you input 9 with the numeric keypad, the
average count will be input 8 automatically.
The number of averages can be set to 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024,
2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768, or 65536. By default, it is 2.
Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical offset.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
169
background
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". You can also directly
rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical
Scale.
Press More > AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as
to better observe.
Press More > Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
Press More > Expand to expand or compress waveform around the "Center" or
"GND".
Press More > Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Math Operation Label
".
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Press More > Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display the
color grade again.
9.1.23 Math Operation Label
Press Label to enter the label setting menu.
Press Display continuously to enable or disable the label display of the
waveform. If it is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the
waveform.
Press Library to select the preset waveform label, including ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV,
FFT, AND, OR, XOR, NOT, Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg, Ln, Exp, Abs, LPas, HPas, BPas, Bstop,
and AX+B.
Press Label, and the label editing interface is automatically displayed. You can
input the label manually. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Channel Label
".
Operations and Measurements
170
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
9.2 Auto Measurement
This series oscilloscope provides auto measurements for 41 waveform parameters,
enabling users to make statistics and analysis of the measurement results.
9.2.1 Quick Measurement after AUTO
When the oscilloscope is correctly connected and has detected a valid input signal,
press to enable the waveform auto setting function and open the auto setting
function menu.
: Press this key, and then the single period of the signal is displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements for
the "Period" and "frequency" of the currently displayed waveforms in a of single
period. The measurement results are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
: Press this key, and then multiple periods of the signal are displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements for
the "Period" and "frequency" of the currently displayed waveforms in multiple
periods. The measurement results are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
: Press this key, and then one rising edge of the signal is displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements for
the "rise time" of the currently displayed rising edge. The measurement results
are displayed at the bottom of the screen. By default, it is intended for the fast
edge signal.
: Press this key, and then one falling edge of the signal is displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements for
the "fall time" of the currently displayed falling edge. The measurement results
are displayed at the bottom of the screen. By default, it is intended for the fast
edge signal.
: Press this key, and the system returns to the last set menu.
Press
Option to enter the auto setting function menu.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
171
background
- Press Lock to lock the AUTO function. To unlock the AUTO function, use the
following two methods:
Method 1: Send the remote command :SYSTem:AUTOscale ON to unlock
the AUTO function.
Method 2: Press Lock again, then a password input dialog box is displayed.
Input the password. By default, there is no password, and press OK to
unlock the function.
NOTE
If you lock the Auto function and then exit the auto setting function menu, you can
press > More > Auto Config to enter the auto setting function menu again
to unlock the Auto function.
- Press
Peak to Peak to enable or disable the peak-peak priority setting. This
function is intended for the shifted signal. If there is a large deviation, you
can view the signal waveform in priority when you enable the function.
- Press CH to select "All" or "Open".
If you select "All", press and the system will test the 4 analog
channels (CH1-CH4) in sequence. If no signal is found on the channel, then
the channel is disabled; if a signal is found on the channel, adjust the
channel to an optimal scale to display the signal. If you select "Open", press
and the system will only test the enabled channels.
- Press Overlay to enable or disable the waveform overlay display function. If
enabled, waveforms of different channels will be displayed in the same
position of the screen; if disabled, waveforms of different channels will be
displayed on the screen from top to bottom in sequence.
- Press Coupling to enable or disable the coupling hold function. If enabled,
after you press , the settings for the channel coupling remain
unchanged; if disabled, then the channel coupling is, by default, set to "DC".
- Press Password, and then the password reset dialog box is displayed, as
shown in the figure below. You can reset the password. The initial password
Operations and Measurements
172
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
is empty. You do not need to input the old password when you reset the
password for the first time.
: Press this key to cancel the auto setting and recovers to the parameter
settings prior to pressing the key.
NOTE
The waveform auto setting function requires that the frequency of the signal should be greater
than or equal to 35 Hz, the amplitude greater than or equal to 5 mV. Otherwise, the waveform
auto setting function may be invalid.
9.2.2 Measurement Parameter
Press on the front panel to enter the measurement setting menu. You can set
the measurement source, enable or disable the all measurement function, the
statistical analysis function, and etc. You can also quickly make measurements for 41
waveform parameters. The measurement results will be displayed on the screen. The
measurement results on the screen are always marked in the same color as the
current measurement channel. You can also enable the touch screen and tap the auto
measurement label "MEASURE" at the top of the screen to enter the measurement
setting menu.
NOTE
If there is no signal input for the current source or the measurement result is not within the
valid range (too large or too small), then the measurement results are invalid, and "*****" is
displayed on the screen. Please re-input the signal or set the signal.
Time Parameters
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
173
background
Threshold
Middle Value
Threshold
Upper Limit
Rise Time Fall Time
+Width
- Width
Period
Threshold
Lower Limit
Figure 9.1 Time Parameters
1. Period: defined as the time between the middle threshold points of two
consecutive, like-polarity edges.
2. Frequency: defined as the reciprocal of period.
3. Rise Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold
lower limit to the threshold upper limit.
4. Fall Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold
upper limit to the threshold lower limit.
5. +Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a rising edge to
the threshold middle value of the next falling edge.
6. -Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a falling edge to
the threshold middle value of the next rising edge.
7. +Duty: indicates the ratio of the positive pulse width to the period.
8. -Duty: indicates the ratio of the negative pulse width to the period.
9. Tvmax: indicates the time that corresponds to the maximum value of the
waveform (Vmax).
10. Tvmin: indicates the time that corresponds to the minimum value of the waveform
(Vmin).
Operations and Measurements
174
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
NOTE
The default values for threshold upper limit, threshold middle value, and threshold low limit
are 90%, 50%, and 10%, respectively. You can press > Setting to enter the sub-menu to
set the parameters.
Count Values
1. Positive Pulse Count: The number of positive pulses that rise from under the
threshold lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.
Positive Pulse Count = n
1 n2
Threshold
Upper Limit
Threshold
Lower Limit
2. Negative Pulse Count: The number of negative pulses that fall from above the
threshold upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.
1 n2
Negative Pulse Count = n
Threshold
Upper Limit
Threshold
Lower Limit
3. Rising Edge Count: The number of rising edges that rise from under the threshold
lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
175
background
1 n2
Rising Edge Count = n
Threshold
Upper Limit
Threshold
Lower Limit
4. Falling Edge Count: The number of falling edges that fall from above the
threshold upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.
1 n2
Falling Edge Count = n
Threshold
Upper Limit
Threshold
Lower Limit
NOTE
The above measurement items are only available for the analog channels.
The default values for threshold upper limit and threshold low limit are 90% and 10%,
respectively. You can press > Setting to enter the sub-menu to set the parameters.
Delay and Phase Parameters
Source A
Source B
Period
Delay
Operations and Measurements
176
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
1. Delay A →B : indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values
on the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay indicates that
the rising edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.
2. Delay A →B : indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values
on the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay indicates that
the falling edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.
3. Delay A →B : indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values
on the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B. Negative delay
indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after the falling edge of Source
B.
4. Delay A →B : indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values
on the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. Negative delay
indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after the rising edge of Source
B.
5. Phase A →B : indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values on the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. The phase formula is as
follows:
°360×=
sourceA
RR
RR
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
RR
BPhaseA
represents Phase A →B ,
RR
BDelayA
represents Delay A
→B , and
represents period of Source A.
6. Phase A →B : indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values on the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. The phase formula is
as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
FF
FF
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
FF
BPhaseA
represents Phase A →B ,
FF
BDelayA
represents Delay A
→B , and
represents period of Source A.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
177
background
7. Phase A →B : indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values on the rising edge of Source A and falling edge of Source B. The phase
formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
FR
FR
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
FR
BPhaseA
represents Phase A →B ,
FR
BDelayA
represents Delay A
→B , and
represents period of Source A.
8. Phase A →B : indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values on the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. The phase
formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
RF
RF
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
RF
BPhaseA
represents Phase A →B ,
RF
BDelayA
represents Delay A
→B , and
represents period of Source A.
NOTE
Source A and Source B can be any channel among CH1-CH4, Math1-Math4, and D0-D15.
You can press > Add to enter the sub-menu to set the parameters.
The default threshold middle value is 50%. You can press
> Setting to enter the
sub-menu to set the parameters.
Voltage Parameters
Operations and Measurements
178
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Vpp
Vtop
Vbase
Overshoot
Vmax
Vmin
Vupper
Vmid
Vlower
Preshoot
Vamp
Figure 9.2 Voltage Parameters
1. Vmax: indicates the voltage value from the highest point of the waveform to the
GND.
2. Vmin: indicates the voltage value from the lowest point of the waveform to the
GND.
3. Vpp: the voltage value from the highest point to the lowest point of the waveform.
4. Vtop: indicates the voltage value from the flat top of the waveform to the GND.
5. Vbase: indicates the voltage value from the flat base of the waveform to the GND.
6. Vamp: indicates the voltage value from the top of the waveform to the base of the
waveform.
7. Vupper: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold
maximum value.
8. Vmid: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold middle
value.
9. Vlower: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold
minimum value.
10. Vavg: indicates the arithmetic average value on the whole waveform or in the
gating area. The formula is shown as follows:
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
179
background
n
x
Average
n
i
i
1=
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the measurement result of the
i
th point, and
n
is the number of
points being measured.
11. RMS: indicates the root mean square value on the whole waveform or in the
gating area. The formula is as follows.
n
x
RMS
n
i
i
1
2
=
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the measurement result of the
i
th point, and
n
is the number of
points being measured.
12. Per.VRMS: indicates the root mean square value within a period. The formula is as
shown above.
13. Overshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the maximum value and
the top value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
14. Preshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the minimum value and
the base value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
15. Std. Dev: indicates the root-mean-square value of the waveforms, with the DC
component removed. The formula is shown as follows:
n
Averagex
DevS
n
i
i
1
2
)(
.td
=
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the amplitude of the
i
th point,
Average
is the waveform average value,
and
n
is the number of the points being measured.
Other Parameters
1. +SlewRate: On the rising edge, first calculate the difference between the high
value and the low value, then use the difference to divide the corresponding time
value to obtain the positive slew rate.
2. -SlewRate: On the falling edge, first calculate the difference between the low value
and the high value, then use the difference to divide the corresponding time value
to obtain the negative slew rate.
Operations and Measurements
180
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
3. Area: indicates the area of the whole waveform within the screen. The unit is V*s.
The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the vertical offset) is
positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero reference is negative. The
area measured is the algebraic sum of the area of the whole waveform within the
screen.
4. Period Area: indicates the area of the first period of waveform on the screen. The
unit is V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the vertical
offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero reference is
negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the whole period area.
9.2.3 Measurement Settings
1. Measure Category
Press > Add > Category to select "Horizontal", "Vertical", or "Other".
Meanwhile, the specific measurement parameters are displayed on the screen, as
shown in the figure below. You can also rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Horizontal", "Vertical", or "Other". Then press down the knob to select it.
- "Horizontal" measurement parameters: Period, Frequency, Rise Time, Fall Time,
+Width, -Width, +Duty, -Duty, Positive Pulse Count, Negative Pulse Count,
Rising Edge Count, Falling Edge Count, Tvmax, Tvmin, +Slew Rate, and -Slew
Rate.
- "Vertical" measurement parameters: Vmax, Vmin, Vpp, Vtop, Vbase, Vamp,
Vupper, Vmid, Vlower, Vavg, VRMS, Per. VRMS, Overshoot, Preshoot, Area,
Period Area, and Std Dev.
- "Other" measurement parameters: Delay A →B , Delay A →B , Delay A →B
, Delay A →B , Phase A →B , Phase A →B , Phase A →B , and Phase A
→B .
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
181
background
Measurement Category Area
Measurement Parameter Area
In the measurement parameter interface, rotate the multifunction knob to
select a measurement item and then press down the knob to select it. Then the
measurement results of the item are displayed at the bottom of the screen
(measurement results of up to 10 items can be displayed at most). When you add a
new measurement item, its measurement result will be displayed as the first, with
the original items moving right in sequence. When you add a new measurement
item after ten items have been added, the last item at the bottom of the screen will
be closed. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the specified measurement
category and measurement item.
TIP
- When you rotate the multifunction knob to switch between the measurement parameter
area and the measurement category, you need to press down the knob to select the
desired measurement category.
- In the measurement category area, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Analyze".
The following figure is displayed. Select "Counter", "DVM", "Histogram", "Power"
(required to install the option MSO8000-PWR), "Eye", or "Jitter" (required to install the
option MSO8000-JITTER when "Eye" or "Jitter" is selected) to open the specified menu.
For description about these functions, refer to relevant chapters.
2. Source Selection
For different measurement categories, the selection methods for measurement
sources are different.
- Horizontal and vertical parameter measurement
Press > Add > Source A, then rotate the multifunction knob to select
the desired channel for measurement and press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Source A continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available channels include CH1-CH4, Math1-Math4, and D0-D15.
Operations and Measurements
182
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Other (Delay and Phase) parameter measurement
Press > Add > Source A (Source B) to set the two source channels for
the current measurement category. The available channels include CH1-CH4,
Math1-Math4, and D0-D15.
3.
Edge Setting
Press
> Add > EdgeSet to set the EdgeA Event, EdgeB Event, EdgeA
Number, and EdgeB Number. You can rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Auto", "First", "Last", or "Any Edge" for the EdgeA Event or EdgeB Event. Then
press down the knob to select it. When EdgeA Event or EdgeB Event selects "Any
Edge", you can set the EdgeA Number and EdgeB Number. The range is from 1 to
1,000.
- First: selects the first edge searched across the screen range to measure.
- Last: selects the last edge searched across the screen range to measure.
- Auto: selects the nearest edge to measure according to the principle of
proximity. By default, "Auto" is selected.
- Any Edge: selects any edge searched across the screen range to measure.
NOTE
Only in "Other" measurement category, can you set these parameters. To select "Other"
measurement category, press > Add > Category to set the measurement category
to "Other".
4. Indicator
Press
Indicatorcontinuously to enable or disable the indicator. You can also press
> Remove > Indicator to enable or disable the indicator. For details, refer to
descriptions in
Measure Mode
.
5. Measurement Settings
Press Settings to enter the sub-menu of measurement.
Press Mode to select the measurement mode to "Normal" or "Precision".
- Normal: executes measurement of up to 1 Mpts.
- Precision: executes measurement of up to 200 Mpts, improving the
resolution of measurement results. In this mode, the refresh rate of the
waveforms may be reduced.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
183
background
Press Type to select "Threshold", "Range", or "Amp Method".
- Select "Threshold", and then make the following settings:
--Press Source to select the desired channel for measurement (CH1-CH4 or
Math1-Math4).
--Press Upper to select "Upper(%)" or "Upper(Abs)" first, and then press the
key to set the upper limit of the measurement. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". When the upper limit is set to
be smaller than or equal to the current middle value, a prompt message
"Set at lower limit" is displayed. Then, the oscilloscope will automatically
adjust the upper limit and make it greater than the middle value. By default,
it is 90%.
--Press Mid to select "Mid(%)" or "Mid(Abs)" first, and then press the key to
set the middle value of the measurement. For details, refer to descriptions
in "
Parameter Setting Method
". The middle value is limited by the settings
of the upper limit and lower limit. By default, it is 50%.
--Press Lower to select "Lower(%)" or "Lower(Abs)" first, and then press the
key to set the lower limit of the measurement. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
Parameter Setting Method
". When the lower limit is set to
be greater than or equal to the current middle value, a prompt message
"Set at upper limit" is displayed. Then, the oscilloscope will automatically
adjust the lower limit and make it smaller than the middle value. By default,
it is 10%.
--Press Default, and then the upper value, middle value, and lower value
will be restored to the defaults.
- Select "Range", and then press Region to select "Main", "Zoom", or
"Cursor".
--Main: indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base
region.
--Zoom: indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time
base region.
NOTE
Only when you enable the delayed sweep function first, can "Zoom" be enabled.
--Cursor: when you select it, two cursors will be displayed on the screen. At
this time, press CursorA and CursorB respectively and then rotate the
multifunction knob to adjust the positions of the two cursors to
determine the measurement range. Also, you can press CursorAB and then
rotate the multifunction knob
to adjust the positions of the two cursors
simultaneously.
Operations and Measurements
184
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Select "Amp Method", and then press Amp Method to select "Auto" or
"Manual". This method affects the measurement method for the top and
base values. If you select "Manual", you need to set the following
parameters:
--Press Top to select "Histogram" or "Max-Min".
--Press Base to select "Histogram" or "Max-Min".
NOTE
Modifying the threshold will affect the measurement results of time, delay and phase
parameters.
If you select "Manual" for the amplitude method, the measurement results of other
parameters may be affected.
"Histogram" and "Max-Min" are the internal measurement algorithm for the oscilloscope.
The "Histogram" method here is different from the Histogram function of the
oscilloscope.
9.2.4 Remove the Measurement Result
This oscilloscope allows you to remove the measurement results of the parameters.
Press > Remove to enter the "Remove" sub-menu.
Press Remove to remove the last added measurement item. Note that pressing
this key one time can only remove one measurement item. When you remove a
measurement item, the measurement result of the last added item at the bottom
of the screen will be removed. You can rotate the multifunction knob to
switch the measurement item, then press down the knob or press Remove to
remove the item. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the desired
measurement item, and then press Remove to remove the item.
Press Remove All to remove all the displayed measurement items.
Press Indicator to enable or disable the indicator.
Besides, you can also press > Add > Remove to enter the "Remove" sub-menu.
TIP
If the "Remove" sub-menu is not displayed in the current menu, when you select a certain
measurement item, the system will automatically enter the "Remove" sub-menu.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
185
background
9.2.5 Statistical Function
Performs statistics and displays the measurement results (Cur, Avg, Max, Min, Dev,
and Cnt) of at most 10 items, as shown in the figure below.
Press > Statistic to enter the sub-menu of "Statistic".
Press Statistic to enable or disable the statistical function.
Press Reset Stat. to clear the history statistics data and makes parameters
statistics again.
Press Count, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the count value. Its range is from 2 to 100000. Its default value is
1000.
9.2.6 All Measurement
All measurement could measure the time parameter, count value, voltage parameters,
and other parameters of the current measurement source and display the results on
the screen. Press
> All Measure to select "OFF" (disabling the all measurement
function) or select the desired channel for measurement (CH1-CH4). If you select
"CH1", data of all measurement parameters of CH1 are displayed on the screen.
NOTE
The removal operation will not clear the measurement results of the all-measurement function.
9.3 Cursor Measurement
Cursor measurement can measure the X axis values (e.g Time) and Y axis values (e.g.
Voltage) of the selected waveform. Before making cursor measurement, connect the
signal to the oscilloscope to acquire stable display. All the parameters supported by
Operations and Measurements
186
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
the "
Auto Measurement
" function can be measured with cursor measurement. The
cursor measurement function provides the following two cursors.
X Cursor (Cursor A)
X Cursor (Cursor A)
X Cursor (Cursor B)
X Cursor (Cursor B)
Y Cursor
(Cursor A)
Y Cursor
(Cursor A)
Y Cursor
(Cursor B)
Y Cursor
(Cursor B)
X Cursor
X cursor is a vertical solid/dotted line that is used to make horizontal
adjustments. It can be used to measure time (s), frequency (Hz), phase (°), and
ratio (%).
- Cursor A is a vertical solid line (
is displayed at the bottom of the screen),
and Cursor B is a vertical dotted line ( is displayed at the bottom of the
screen).
- In the X-Y cursor mode, X cursor is used to measure the waveform
amplitude of CH1.
Y Cursor
Y cursor is a horizontal solid/dotted line that is used to make vertical
adjustment. It can be used to measure amplitude (the unit is the same as that of
the source channel amplitude) and ratio (%).
- Cursor A is a horizontal solid line ( is displayed at the bottom of the
screen), and Cursor B is a horizontal dotted line ( is displayed at the
bottom of the screen).
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
187
background
- In the X-Y cursor mode, Y cursor is used to measure the waveform
amplitude of CH2.
Press on the front panel to open the cursor measurement menu, or enable the
touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of
the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Cursor" icon to open the
cursor measurement menu.
In the cursor measurement menu, press Mode and then rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the desired cursor mode (the default is "OFF"). Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Mode continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. The available modes are "Manual", "Track", "XY", and "Measure". When you
select "OFF", the cursor measurement function is disabled.
NOTE
When the Time Base Mode is set to "XY", the XY cursor measurement mode is valid.
No cursor will be displayed if no cursor measurement parameter is selected or the
measurement source has no input.
When the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally, the cursor will change
accordingly.
9.3.1 Manual Mode
In this mode, you can adjust the cursor manually to measure the value of the
waveforms of the specified source at the current cursor. The measurement results are
displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen. When you change the cursor
position, the measurement results will be changed accordingly.
Press Mode to select "Manual" to enable the manual cursor measurement function. If
the settings for the parameter such as the cursor type, measurement source,
horizontal measurement unit, and vertical measurement unit are different, the
measurement results will be different for cursor measurement. The measurement
results are displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as shown in the figure
below.
AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
Operations and Measurements
188
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
∆X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
∆Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
1/∆X: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
Cursor B.
1. Select the Cursor Type
Press Select continuously to select the cursor type.
- X-X: It is a pair of vertical solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for
measuring time parameters. The measurement results include AX, BX, ∆X, and
1/ΔX (displayed only when "s" or "Hz" is selected under Hori. Unit).
- Y-Y: It is a pair of horizontal solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for
measuring voltage parameters. The measurement results include AY, BY, and ∆Y.
- XY-X: when this mode is selected, X cursors and Y cursors are both displayed.
However, you can only set the AX and BX values. The measurement results of X
cursors are the same as what you set in X-X mode.
- XY-Y: when this mode is selected, X cursors and Y cursors are both displayed.
However, you can only set the AY and BY values. The measurement results of Y
cursors are the same as what you set in Y-Y mode.
2.
Select the Measurement Source
Press
Source, rotate the multifunction knob to select the measurement
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available source channels
are NONE, CH1-CH4, LA, and Math1-Math4.
NOTE
- Only channels currently enabled can be selected.
- When "LA" is selected as the channel source,
Select is grayed out and disabled. By
default, "X" is selected under Select.
3.
Adjust the Cursor Position
a. When "X-X" is selected, you can adjust the position of X cursors.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
189
background
- Press AX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the horizontal
position (X-axis) of Cursor A (X cursor). Its adjustable range is limited within
the screen.
Enable the touch screen and tap AX to set the horizontal position of Cursor
A (X cursor) with the pop-up numeric keypad. The horizontal axis indicates
time, and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the horizontal
unit.
- Press BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the horizontal
position (X-axis) of Cursor B (X cursor). Its adjustable range is limited within
the screen.
Enable the touch screen and tap BX to set the horizontal position of Cursor B
(X cursor) with the pop-up numeric keypad. The horizontal axis indicates
time, and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the horizontal
unit.
- Press AX BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the horizontal
positions (X-axis) of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors). Its adjustable range is
limited within the screen. The horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.
b. When "Y-Y" is selected for the mode, you can adjust the position of Y cursors.
- Press AY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
position (Y-axis) of Cursor A (Y cursor).
Enable the touch screen and tap AY to set the vertical position of Cursor A (Y
cursor) with the pop-up numeric keypad. The vertical axis indicates voltage,
and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the vertical unit.
- Press BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
position (Y-axis) of Cursor B (Y cursor).
Enable the touch screen and tap BY to set the vertical position of Cursor B (Y
cursor) with the pop-up numeric keypad. The vertical axis indicates voltage,
and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the vertical unit.
- Press AY BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
positions (Y-axis) of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors). The vertical spacing
between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) remains unchanged.
Operations and Measurements
190
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
NOTE
If one of the three menu items (
AX, BX, and AX BX) is selected; or one of the three menu
items (
AY, BY, and AY BY) is selected; you can press down the multifunction knob
continuously to switch among the three items.
4. Set the Horizontal/Vertical Measurement Unit
- When "X-X" is selected, you can set the horizontal measurement unit. When the
source is set to Math1-Math4, this menu is grayed out and disabled.
Press
More > Hori. Unit, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
horizontal measurement unit, and then press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Hori. Unit continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available units include "s", "Hz", "Degree(°)", and "Percent(%)".
- s: measures the time value at X Cursor (taking the trigger position as
reference). The measurement results include AX, BX, ∆X, and 1/∆X. Wherein,
AX, BX, and ∆X all indicate time, and 1/∆X indicates frequency.
- Hz: measures the frequency value at X Cursor (taking the trigger position as
reference). The measurement results include AX, BX, ∆X, and 1/∆X. Wherein,
AX, BX, and ∆X all indicate frequency, and 1/∆X indicates time.
- Degree(°): measures the phase value at X Cursor. The measurement results
include AX, BX, and ∆X, and they are all expressed in degree.
This oscilloscope allows you to set the phase reference position according to
your needs. After adjusting X Cursor to a desired position, press Set
Reference to take the current cursor position as the reference. The current
positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are respectively defined as "0°" and
"360°". Meanwhile, two vertical cursors (in blue) that cannot be moved are
displayed on the screen as the phase reference position (the phase position
at "0°" and "360°" are respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line).
Before you set manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default phase reference
position.
- Percent(%): measures ratio at X Cursor. The measurement results include AX,
BX, and ∆X, and they are all expressed in percentage.
This oscilloscope allows you to set the ratio reference position according to
your needs. After adjusting X Cursor to a desired position, press
Set
Reference to take the current cursor position as the reference. The current
positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are respectively defined as "0%" and
"100%". Meanwhile, two cursors (in blue) that cannot be moved are
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
191
background
displayed on the screen as the ratio reference position (the ratio position at
"0%" and "100%" are respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line).
Before you set manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default ratio reference
position.
- When "Y-Y" is selected, you can set the vertical measurement unit. When the
source is set to Math1-Math4, this menu is grayed out and disabled.
Press More > Vert. Unit, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
vertical measurement unit, and then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Vert. Unit continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available units include "Source" and "Percent(%)".
- Source: measures the amplitude at Y Cursor (taking the channel ground
point as the reference). The measurement results include AY, BY, and ∆Y (its
unit is consistent with that of the current source).
- Percent(%): measures ratio at Y Cursor. The measurement results include AY,
BY, and ∆Y, and they are all expressed in percentage.
This oscilloscope allows you to set the ratio reference position according to
your needs. After adjusting Y Cursor to a desired position, press Set
Reference to take the current cursor position as the reference. The current
positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are respectively defined as "0%" and
"100%". Meanwhile, two cursors (in blue) that cannot be moved are
displayed on the screen as the ratio reference position (the ratio position at
"0%" and "100%" are respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line).
Before you set manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default ratio reference
position.
5. Set LA Type
When the measurement source is set to "LA", you need to set the LA display type.
Press More, and then press La Type continuously to select "HEX" or "BIN".
6. Measurement Example
Measure the period of a sine wave by using the manual cursor measurement and
Auto measurement respectively. The measurement results are both 1 ms, as shown
in
Figure 9.3
.
Operations and Measurements
192
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Auto Measurement
Cursor Measurement
Figure 9.3 Manual Cursor Measurement Example
9.3.2 Track Mode
In this mode, you can adjust the two pairs of cursors (Cursor A and Cursor B) to
measure the X and Y values on two different sources respectively. The points being
measured on Cursor A and Cursor B are marked by and respectively. When
the cursors are moved horizontally/vertically, the markers will position on the
waveform automatically. When the waveform is expanded or compressed
horizontally/vertically, the markers will track the points being marked at the last
adjustment of the cursors.
NOTE
When the delayed sweep function is enabled, the track cursor is within the expanded area.
Press
Mode to select "Track" to enable the cursor track function. The measurement
results will be displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as shown in the
following figure. When you modify the Track measurement parameter, the
measurement results will be changed accordingly.
AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
193
background
BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
ΔX: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
ΔY: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
1/ΔX: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
Cursor B.
1.
Select the Measurement Source
- Press
AX Source, rotate the multifunction knob to select the measurement
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press AX
Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
source channels include NONE, CH1-CH4, and Math1-Math4.
- Press
BX Source, rotate the multifunction knob to select the measurement
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press BX
Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
source channels include NONE, CH1-CH4, and Math1-Math4.
NOTE
Only channels currently enabled can be selected.
2. Select the Track Cursor
Press
Track to select "X" or "Y" as the current track cursor. By default, it is "X".
- X: tracks X Cursor and measures the value at X Cursor.
- Y: tracks Y Cursor and measures the time of the first point at the left side of the
screen.
3.
Adjust the Cursor Position
a. When "X" is selected for the track mode, you can adjust the position of X cursor.
- Press
AX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the horizontal
position (X-axis) of Cursor A (X cursor). Its adjustable range is limited within
the screen.
Operations and Measurements
194
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Press BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the horizontal
position (X-axis) of Cursor B (X cursor). Its adjustable range is limited within
the screen.
- Press AX BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the horizontal
positions (X-axis) of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors). Its adjustable range is
limited within the screen. The horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.
b. When "Y" is selected for the track mode, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.
- Press AY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
position (Y-axis) of Cursor A (Y cursor).
- Press BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
position (Y-axis) of Cursor B (Y cursor).
- Press AY BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
positions (Y-axis) of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors). The vertical spacing
between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) remains unchanged.
NOTE
- If one of the three menu items (
AX, BX, and AX BX) is selected; or one of the three
menu items (AY, BY, and AY BY) is selected; you can press down the multifunction knob
continuously to switch among the three items.
- In track mode, the horizontal cursor (or vertical cursor) will track the marked point in a
timely manner (i.g, the cursor will move up and down with the transient change of the
waveform). Thus, the X value (or Y value) might change even though you do not adjust
the cursor.
4. Measurement Example
Measure the waveforms of CH1 and CH2 with Cursor A and Cursor B, respectively.
Then, expand the waveforms horizontally, and you will find that the cursor will
track the point that has been marked, as shown in the following figure.
Track Measurement (before Horizontal Expansion):
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
195
background
Track Measurement (after Horizontal Expansion):
9.3.3 XY Mode
XY mode is only available when the horizontal time base mode is "XY" (refer to
"
Timebase Mode
"). In this mode, two pairs of cursors will appear. You can adjust the
cursor positions to measure the X and Y values at the crossing points of the two pairs
of cursors.
Press Mode to select "XY" to enable the XY cursor measurement function. The
measurement results will be displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as
shown in the following figure.
Operations and Measurements
196
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
ΔX: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
ΔY: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
1.
Adjust the Cursor Position
- Press
AX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the X value at Cursor
A.
- Press BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the X value at Cursor
B.
- Press AY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the Y value at Cursor
A.
- Press BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the Y value at Cursor
B
- Press More > ABX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the X values
at Cursor A and Cursor B simultaneously.
- Press More > ABY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the Y values
at at Cursor A and Cursor B simultaneously.
During the adjustment, the measurement results will change accordingly. The
adjustable range is limited within the screen.
NOTE
If you select either of the items (
ABX and ABY), you can press down the multifunction knob
continuously to switch between them.
Operations and Measurements
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
197
background
2. Display Lissajous Legend
This oscilloscope provides the Lissajous schematic diagram under different
frequencies and phase deviations, as shown in
Figure 9.4
. Press More > Lissajous,
then the Lissajous schematic diagram is displayed.
Phase deviation
between two signals
Frequency ratio
between two signals
Figure 9.4 Lissajous Schematic Diagram
9.3.4 Measure Mode
Press Mode to select "Measure". In this mode, the cursor position for measurement is
displayed.
Press Indicator continuously to enable or disable the Indicator. If it is enabled, one or
multiple cursors are displayed on the screen. Before enabling the indicator, you need
to enable at least one parameter for auto measurement. The number of cursors will
change along with the enabled measurement parameters.
Operations and Measurements
198
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
10
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency
Counter
This series oscilloscope provides a built-in digital voltmeter (DVM) and frequency
counter, which enable you to perform an accurate measurement, improving user
experience in counter and frequency measurement.
10.1 Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
The built-in DVM of this oscilloscope provides 3-digit voltage measurements on any
analog channel. DVM measurements are asynchronous from the oscilloscope's
acquisition system and are always acquiring.
Press > Analyze > DVM to open the DVM setting menu, or enable the touch
screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the
screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "DVM" icon to open the DVM
setting menu. You can also press > Add, then in the displayed measurement
category area, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Analyze", and then select
"DVM" to open the DVM setting menu.
10.1.1 To Enable or Disable DVM Measurement
In the "DVM" setting menu, press the DVM continuously to enable or disable DVM
measurement. When enabled, the following figure is displayed. The DVM display also
has a scale that is determined by the channel's vertical scale and vertical offset. The
scale range is the range of the screen. The scale's yellow triangle pointer shows the
most recent measurement result. The specific value above the pointer shows the
measurement extrema over the last 3 seconds.
Pointer
Scale
Source Mode
Voltage Value
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
199
background
NOTE
DVM measurement and the oscilloscope share the same probe, so the unit for the DVM
measurement is consistent with that of the channel.
10.1.2 To Select the Measurement Source
Press Source in the "DVM" setting menu, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select the desired source. You can also press Source continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the
measurement source.
NOTE
Even if the analog channel (CH1-CH4) is not enabled, you can still perform the DVM
measurement.
10.1.3 To Select Measurement Mode
Press Mode, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired Mode, and
then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Mode continuously to select
the mode or enable the touch screen to tap the desired mode and select it. The DVM
measurement modes include AC RMS, DC, and AC+DC RMS.
AC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data, with the DC
component removed.
DC: displays the average value of the acquired data.
AC+ DC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data.
10.1.4 To Set the Limits
Press Limits to enter the sub-menu of Limits. Then set the following parameters.
Beeper
Press Beeper continuously to enable or disable the Beeper.
Limits Condition Setting
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select desired limit setting
condition. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The limits conditions include
"In Limits" and "Out Limits".
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
200
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- In Limits: when the voltage value is within the limits, you can enable or
disable the beeper to sound an alarm.
- Out Limits: when the voltage value is outside of the limits, you can enable
or disable the beeper to sound an alarm.
Upper/Lower Limit Setting
Press Upper, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the upper limit of the voltage.
Press Lower, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the lower limit of the voltage.
10.2 Frequency Counter
The frequency counter analysis function provides frequency, period, or edge event
counter measurements on any analog channel.
Press > Analyze > Counter to open the Frequency Counter setting menu, or
enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-
left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Counter" icon
to open the frequency counter setting menu. You can also directly press >
Counter on the front panel to enter the frequency counter setting menu. In addition,
You can also press > Add, then in the displayed measurement category area,
rotate the multifunction knob to select "Analyze", and then select "Counter" to
open the frequency counter setting menu.
10.2.1 To Enable or Disable the Frequency Counter
In the "Counter" setting menu, press Counter continuously to enable or disable the
frequency counter measurement. When enabled, the following figure is displayed.
Source Measurement Item
Value
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
201
background
10.2.2 To Select the Measurement Source
Press Source, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired source, and
then press down the knob to select the source. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. Analog channels (CH1-CH4),
digital channels (D0-D15), and EXT can all be selected as the source of the frequency
counter.
10.2.3 To Select the Measurement Item
The measurement items supported by the frequency counter of this oscilloscope
include Frequency, Period, and Totalize measurements. Wherein, Totalize indicates the
count of edge events on the signal.
Press Measure in the "Counter" menu, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select the desired measurement item, and then press down the knob to select the
item. You can also press Measure continuously or enable the touch screen to tap the
desired measurement item and select it.
10.2.4 To Set the Resolution
For Period and Frequency measurements, you need to set the readout resolution.
Press Resolution, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the resolution. The range of resolution is from 3 bits to 6 bits. By
default, it is 5 bits.
NOTE
The greater the resolution, the longer the gate time. In this way, the measurement time will be
longer.
10.2.5 To Clear Count
When "Totalize" is selected under Measure, the oscilloscope measures the count of
edge events on the signal. At this time, press Clear Count to clear the measurement
results.
10.2.6 To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function
For Period and Frequency measurements, you can enable the frequency counter
statistical function. Press Statistic continuously to enable or disable the statistical
function. When enabled, the maximum value and minimum value will be displayed in
the frequency counter data, as shown in the following figure.
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
202
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Statistics
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
203
background
11
Power Analysis (Option)
The oscilloscope provides an optional power analysis function, which can help you
easily analyze the efficiency and reliability of the switch-mode power supplies. With
the power analysis function, you can analyze the power quality and output ripple
noise of the input power.
11.1 Power Quality
By analyzing the power quality, you can test the quality of AC input lines. The specific
measurement parameters for power quality analysis include V_RMS, I_RMS, real
power, apparent power, reactive power, power factor, reference frequency, phase
angle, impedance, voltage crest factor, and current crest factor.
Press > Analyze > Power Analyzer to open the power analysis setting menu,
or enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-
left corner of the touch screen to enable the function navigation. Then, tap the
"Power" icon to open the power analysis setting menu. You can also press >
Add, then in the displayed parameter measurement category area, rotate the
multifunction knob to select the "Analyze" tab, then select "UPA" to open the
power analysis setting menu.
Select the Analysis Type
In the power analysis setting menu, press Analysis Type and rotate the
multifunction knob to select "Power Quality", and then press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Analysis Type continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the desired analysis type.
Set the Power Quality Analysis Source
In the power analysis setting menu, press Source to enter the source setting
menu.
- Press Voltage and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel
(CH1-CH4) for acquiring voltage. Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Voltage continuously or enable the touch screen to select the
channel.
- Press Current and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel
(CH1-CH4) for acquiring current. Press down the knob to select it. You can
Power Analysis (Option)
204
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
also press Current continuously or enable the touch screen to select the
channel.
- Press Freq. Ref continuously to select "Voltage" or "Current" as the
frequency reference.
Set the Reference Level
Press Ref Levels (level of the frequency reference channel) to enter the reference
level setting menu.
- Press Type, rotate the multifunction knob to set the reference level
display type to "Percent(%)" or "Absolute", and then press down the knob.
You can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select
the type.
- Press Upper, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the upper limit value. Reducing the upper limit to the
current middle value will automatically reduce the middle value and lower
limit to keep them lower than the upper limit.
- Press Mid, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the middle value. The middle value is limited by the settings
of the upper limit and lower limit.
- Press Lower, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the lower limit. Increasing the lower limit to the current
middle value will automatically increase the middle value and upper limit to
keep them higher than the lower limit.
- Press Default, and then the upper limit, middle value, and lower limit will
be restored to the defaults.
Set Count
Press Count, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad
to set the number of statistical times for power quality analysis. Its range is from
2 to 5000. By default, it is 1000.
Reset
Power Analysis (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
205
background
Press Reset Stat. to clear the current data and execute statistics on the
measurement results again.
Open or Close the Results Display Window
Press
Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the results. When
enabled, the statistical results will be displayed on the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the
right-upper corner of the statistical results window to close it.
NOTE
If you select "ON" under Display, the multiplication operation will be automatically
enabled in the Math operation.
View the Connection Diagram
Press Tips, and then the connection diagram of the power quality analysis is
displayed on the screen. Please connect the cables according to the connection
method as shown in
Figure 11.1
. Press Tips again or enable the touch screen to
tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the connection diagram window to
close it.
Figure 11.1 Connection Diagram of Power Quality Analysis
Power Analysis (Option)
206
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
11.2 Ripple
Power ripple is an important parameter for evaluating DC power supply, which
indicates the ripple quantity of the output DC voltage. The ripple analysis can
measure the current value, average value, minimum value, maximum value, standard
deviation, and count value of the ripples on the power output terminal.
NOTE
The 1X probe is recommended for the ripple measurement. For example, PVP2150 or PVP2350.
Select the Analysis Type
In the power analysis setting menu, press
Analysis Type and rotate the
multifunction knob to select "Ripple", and then press down the knob to select
it. You can also press Analysis Type continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the desired analysis type.
Set the Ripple Analysis Source
Press Source, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the ripple analysis
source (CH1-CH4), then press down the knob to select the source. You can also
press
Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Set Count
Press Count, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad
to set the number of statistical times for ripple analysis. Its range is from 2 to
5000. By default, it is 1000.
Reset
Press Reset Stat. to clear the current data and execute statistics on the
measurement results again.
Open or Close the Results Display Window
Press Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the results. When
enabled, the statistical results will be displayed on the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the
right-upper corner of the statistical results window to close it.
View the Connection Diagram
Press
Tips, and then the connection diagram of the Ripple analysis is displayed
on the screen. Please connect the cables according the connection method as
Power Analysis (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
207
background
shown in
Figure 11.2
. Press Tips again or enable the touch screen to tap the
icon at the right-upper corner of the connection diagram window to close it.
Figure 11.2 Connection Diagram of Ripple Analysis
Power Analysis (Option)
208
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
12
Histogram Analysis
This series oscilloscope supports the standard histogram analysis function, enabling
you to judge the trend of waveforms, and quickly locate the potential problems of the
signal.
12.1 To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function
The histogram analysis function supported by this series is available to provide a
statistical view of waveforms or measurement results. It can be classified into
horizontal histogram, vertical histogram, and measurement histogram. With the on-
going acquisition and measurement of the waveforms, the height of the bar graph
will change within the set range of the histogram window to indicate the number of
times for data statistics.
You can go to the "Histogram" setting menu through the following four ways:
On the front panel, press > Analyze > Histogram to enter the histogram
setting menu.
Enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the
lower-left corner of the touch screen to enable the function navigation. Then tap
the "Histogram" icon, and the histogram setting menu is displayed at the right
section of the screen.
Enable the touch screen and tap the auto measurement label "MEASURE" at the
top of the screen to enter the measurement setting menu. In the measurement
category area, rotate the multifunction knob to select the "Analyze" option
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also tap the "Analyze" option
to select it. In the measurement parameter area, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the "Histogram" option and then press down the knob to select it.
You can also tap the "Histogram" option to select it and then enter the
"Histogram" setting menu.
Refer to descriptions in "
Rectangle Drawing
" to enter the "Histogram" setting
menu.
Histogram Analysis
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
209
background
In the "Histogram" setting menu, press Enable continuously to enable or disable the
histogram analysis function.
TIP
To record peaks or glitches in the histogram data, please always enable the histogram function.
12.2 To Select the Histogram Type
The histogram includes the following three types:
Horizontal: displays the number of times for statistics making in the forms of
columns in the histogram bar graph at the bottom of the graticule.
Vertical: displays the number of times for statistics making in the forms of rows
in the histogram bar graph at the left of the graticule.
Measure: displays the number of times for statistics of the measurement results
in the forms of columns in the histogram bar graph at the bottom of the
graticule.
Press Type, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired histogram
type, and then press down the knob to select the type. You can also press Type
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the type.
12.3 To Select the Histogram Source
If "Horizontal" or "Vertical" is selected under Type, you need to set the source (CH1-
CH4). Press Source, then use the multifunction knob to select the desired source,
and then press down the knob to select the source. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
12.4 To Set the Measurement Items
When you select "Measure" as the histogram type, press Measure > Add on the front
panel or tap the auto measurement label "MEASURE" at the top of the screen to enter
the measurement setting menu, and then add one or multiple measurement items. At
this time, the added measurement item(s) can be served as the measurement
histogram source(s) and displayed in the Item menu.
Histogram Analysis
210
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
12.5 To Set the Histogram Height
The histogram height indicates the number of grids the histogram bar graph should
use on the screen. Press Height, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the height. The available range of height is from 1 to 4.
By default, it is 2.
12.6 To Set the Histogram Range
When "Horizontal" or "Vertical" is selected under Type, you need to set the window
range. Set "Left Limit", "Right Limit", "Top Limit", and "Bottom Limit" respectively to
adjust the size and position of the histogram window. Press Range to enter the sub-
menu of histogram range. Then press the corresponding softkey and rotate the
multifunction knob to set their values.
NOTE
The adjustment for the horizontal time base and vertical scale will not affect the time base of
the histogram range, but only shows variation with the scale.
12.7 To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function
Press Statistic to enable or disable statistical function. When the statistical function is
enabled, the statistical results of the histogram data will be displayed, as shown in the
following figure. Note: when you select "Measure" under "Type", the statistical data
results also include the parameter XScale.
Sum: indicates the sum of all bins (buckets) in the histogram.
Peaks: indicates the maximum number of hits in any single bin.
Max: indicates the value that corresponds to the maximum bin that has any hits.
Min: indicates the value that corresponds to the minimum bin that has any hits.
Histogram Analysis
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
211
background
Pk_Pk: indicates the Delta between the max. value and the min. value.
Mean: indicates the average value of the histogram.
Median: indicates the median value of the histogram.
Mode: indicates the mode value of the histogram.
Bin width: indicates the width of each bin (bucket) in the histogram.
Sigma: indicates the standard deviation of the histogram.
XScale: indicates the horizontal scale of the histogram. It is 100 times the value
of Bin width.
12.8 To Reset
Press Reset to reset the statistical data and restart to make statistics.
Histogram Analysis
212
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
13
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
This series oscilloscope provides the real-time eye diagram and measurement with
the clock recovery function. The flexible and convenient jitter measurement and
analysis enable the users to instinctively understand the strong and weak Inter-
Symbol Interference in the system, so as to accurately and quickly make deterministic
jitter measurement for the high-speed serial signal.
If you have purchased and activated the MSO8000-JITTER option, the oscilloscope
also supports real-time eye diagram and jitter analysis functions.
13.1 Real-time Eye Analysis
An eye diagram is a view of a signal. A real- time eye accomplishes this by acquiring
data, performing clock recovery, then superimposing (folding) successive unit
intervals within a single plot. This is a statistical view in the form of a color grade. The
eye analysis function is usually used to observe the waveforms of the Receive signal
to analyze the impact of inter-symbol interference (ISI) and noise on the system
performance.
NOTE
The eye diagram can only be obtained when the horizontal time base is less than or equal to 1
µs/div.
You can go to the "Eye" setting menu through the following three ways:
On the front panel, press > Analyze > Eye to enter the eye setting menu.
You can also enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then,
tap the "Eye" icon to open the "Eye" setting menu.
Enable the touch screen and tap the auto measurement label "MEASURE" at the
top of the screen to enter the measurement setting menu. In the measurement
category area, rotate the multifunction knob to select the "Analyze" tab and
then press down the knob to select it. You can also tap the "Analyze" tab to
select it. In the measurement parameter area, rotate the multifunction knob
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
213
background
to select "Eye" and then press down the knob to select it. You can also tap to
select "Eye" to enter the "Eye" setting menu.
13.1.1 To Enable or Disable the Eye Analysis Function
In the "Eye" setting menu, press Eye continuously to enable or disable the eye
diagram analysis function.
13.1.2 To Select the Source of the Eye Diagram
Press Source in the "Eye" setting menu, then use the multifunction knob to select
the desired eye source, and then press down the knob to select the source. You can
also press Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog
channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the eye source.
13.1.3 Threshold Settings
In the "Eye" setting menu, press Threshold to enter the threshold setting menu.
Set the High Threshold
Press
HighThres, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the high threshold.
NOTE
If you reduce the high threshold to a value below the set middle threshold, the
oscilloscope will adjust the high threshold automatically to make it greater than the
middle threshold.
Set the Middle Threshold
Press
MidThres, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the middle threshold.
NOTE
The middle threshold is limited by the set low threshold and high threshold.
Set the Low Threshold
Press
LowThres, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the low threshold.
NOTE
If you increase the low threshold to a value above the set middle threshold, the
oscilloscope will decrease the low threshold automatically to make it smaller than the
middle threshold.
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
214
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
13.1.4 To Set Clock Recovery
The clock recovery provides an ideal clock for comparison to actual signal edges.
In the "Eye" setting menu, press Clock Recovery to enter the clock recovery menu.
This oscilloscope supports several clock recovery methods, including constant clock,
phase-locked loop (PLL), and external clock.
1. Set the Constant Clock Recovery
Press RecoveryType, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "Constant",
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press RecoveryType
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
- Set the data rate type
The data rate type for Constant includes Manual, Semi-Auto, and Auto.
- Manual: recovers the clock by the data rate input manually.
- Semi-Auto: recovers the clock by the manually preset data rate and the
signal edge.
- Auto: recovers the clock based on the narrowest pulse of the signal.
Press Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired data rate
type, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
- Set the data rate
Press Data Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the data rate.
NOTE
When the data rate type is set to Auto, the
Data Rate menu is grayed out and disabled,
and only the automatically recovered frequency of the ideal clock can be displayed
2. Set the Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) Recovery
Press
RecoveryType, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "PLL", and
then press down the knob to select it. You can also press RecoveryType
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
- Set the data rate
Press Data Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the data rate.
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
215
background
- Set the PLL order
This oscilloscope supports first-order PLL and second-order PLL. Press PLL
Order, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the order number and
then press down the knob to select it. You can also press PLL Order
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
- Set the loop BW
Press Loop BW, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the loop bandwidth.
- Set the damping factor
When PLL order is set to "2nd Order", you need to set the damping factor. It is
the damping factor of the transfer function. Press DampFactor, then rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the damping
factor.
The typical damping factor is 1.0 and 0.707. The former is critically damped, and
the latter is the ideal or optimal value.
3. Set the External Clock Recovery
Press RecoveryType, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "Explicit", and
then press down the knob to select it. You can also press RecoveryType
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Press Source, then use the multifunction knob to select the desired source, and
then press down the knob to select the source. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog channel (CH1-
CH4) can be selected to be the source of the external clock.
13.1.5 To Enable or Disable the Eye Measurement Result
In the "Eye" setting menu, press Result continuously to enable or disable the display
of the eye measurement result. When it is enabled, the statistical results of the eye
measurement data will be displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as shown
in the following figure. You can enable the touch screen, and drag the statistical
results to any place where you want to put it for view on the screen.
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
216
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Wherein,
One: indicates "1" level.
Zero: indicates "0" level.
Eye Width: indicates the width of an eye diagram.
Eye Height: indicates the height of an eye diagram.
Eye Amp: indicates the amplitude of an eye diagram.
Cross: indicates the crossing percentage of an eye diagram.
Q Factor: indicates the Q factor.
The parameters of the eye measurement are shown in
Figure 13.1
.
Figure 13.1 Diagram of Eye Measurement Parameters
13.1.6 To Reset Color
Press Reset Color to clear the color level counter.
13.2 Jitter Analysis
The jitter analysis function is mainly used to analyze the integrity of the high-speed
serial signal and measure the variance of a measurement over time. The measurement
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
217
background
item includes TIE, Cycle to Cycle, +Width to +Width, and –Width to -Width. Wherein,
TIE indicates time interval error. The TIE measurement compares the edges in a data
signal with the edges in an ideal data signal determined by the clock recovery feature
to generate error statistics.
You can go to the "Jitter" setting menu through the following three ways:
On the front panel, press > Analyze > Jitter to enter the jitter setting
menu.
You can also enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then,
tap the "Jitter" icon to open the "Jitter" setting menu.
Enable the touch screen and tap the auto measurement label "MEASURE" at the
top of the screen to enter the measurement setting menu. In the measurement
category area, rotate the multifunction knob to select the "Analyze" tab and
then press down the knob to select it. You can also tap the "Analyze" tab to
select it. In the measurement parameter area, rotate the multifunction knob
to select "Jitter" and then press down the knob to select it. You can also tap to
select "Jitter" to enter the "Jitter" setting menu.
13.2.1 To Enable or Disable the Jitter Function
In the jitter setting menu, press Enable continuously to enable or disable the jitter
analysis function. When the jitter analysis function and the jitter trend are enabled,
Math3 trend operation function is enabled by default and the trend graph is
displayed on the screen.
13.2.2 To Select the Jitter Source
Press Source in the "Jitter" setting menu, then use the multifunction knob to
select the desired jitter source, and then press down the knob to select the source.
You can also press Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the jitter source.
13.2.3 Threshold Settings
For setting methods of the jitter threshold, refer to descriptions in "
Threshold
Settings
" in the "
Real-time Eye Analysis
" section.
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
218
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
13.2.4 To Set Clock Recovery
For setting methods of the clock recovery in the jitter, refer to descriptions in "
To Set
Clock Recovery
" in the "
Real-time Eye Analysis
" section.
NOTE
When the measurement item is "TIE", you need to set the clock recovery. For other
measurement items, you do not need to set the clock recovery.
13.2.5 To Set the Jitter Measurement
Press Measure to enter the jitter measurement menu. You can set the jitter
measurement item and the graph display mode of the jitter measurement results.
Set the Jitter Measurement Item
The jitter measurement items supported by this oscilloscope include TIE, Cycle to
Cycle, +Width to +Width, and –Width to -Width.
Press Item, then rotate the multifunction knob to select desired
measurement item, and then press down the knob to select the item. You can
also press Item continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
TIE
Compares edges in a signal under test with the edges in an ideal signal
determined by the clock recovery feature. Then, all the signal intervals are
measured based on the ideal data rate to generate the error statistics.
Cycle to Cycle
Measures the first cycle and then subtracts the first cycle from the second cycle.
The measurement is made according to this rule.
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
219
background
+Width to +Width
The +Width to +Width jitter measurement subtracts the first cycle's positive
pulse width from the second cycle's positive pulse width for the first
measurement result. The +Width to +Width jitter measurement subtracts the
second cycle's positive pulse width from the third cycle's positive pulse width for
the second measurement result, and so on, until all of the cycles of the
waveforms have been measured.
-Width to -Width
The -Width to -Width jitter measurement subtracts the first cycle's negative
pulse width from the second cycle's negative pulse width for the first
measurement result. The -Width to -Width jitter measurement subtracts the
second cycle's negative pulse width from the third cycle's negative pulse width
for the second measurement result, and so on, until all of the cycles of the
waveforms have been measured.
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
220
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Jitter Edge
When the measurement item is "TIE" or "Cycle to Cycle", you need to set the
edge of the measurement signal. The edges include Rising, Falling, and Either.
Press Slope, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired edge,
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Slope continuously
or enable the touch screen to select it.
Jitter Trend Graph
The trend graph can display the trend of the jitter measurement results. The data
obtained from the waveforms of the same frame are generated to form a curve,
which enables users to find out the cause for jitter.
Press
Trend continuously to enable or disable the display of the trend graph.
NOTE
When the clock recovery method is set to "PLL", the PLL system cannot reach the
expected ideal clock frequency until it reaches the specified lock time. During the lock
time, the TIE jitter measurement results based on the ideal recovery clock are incorrect.
The data produced during this time will be discarded in data processing. Therefore, in the
TIE jitter trend graph based on the PLL recovery, part of trend graph at the left section of
the screen will be lost. When a message "Invalid settings" is displayed below the trend
graph, please modify the loop bandwidth, the horizontal timebase, or other related
settings to make valid measurements.
Jitter Histogram
The histogram shows the distribution of the jitter measurement results. Gaussian
distributions indicates random jitter, and non-Gaussian distributions indicate the
deterministic jitter.
Press
Histogram continuously to enable or disable the display of the histogram.
NOTE
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
221
background
When you select the specified measurement item and enable the display of the
histogram, the selected item will be displayed under the Item menu of the Histogram
setting menu simultaneously. Meanwhile, the jitter analysis function in the histogram
setting menu will also be enabled. The histogram type will be switched to Jitter. At this
time, the statistical count and distribution of the jitter measurement results will be
displayed in columns in the bar histogram at the bottom of the screen.
Auto Setting
Used to configure the scale of the trend graph automatically.
Press
Auto Setting, and then the vertical scale and offset of the trend graph will
be automatically adjusted to optimal values based on the current configurations,
so that users can get a better observation of the results.
13.2.6 To Enable or Disable the Jitter Measurement Result
In the jitter setting menu, press Result continuously to enable or disable the display
of the jitter measurement result. When enabled, the jitter measurement data results
will be displayed on the screen, as shown in the following figure. You can enable the
touch screen to drag the jitter measurement data results to any place for view.
13.2.7 To Reset Statistics
In the jitter setting menu, press Reset to reset the statistics of the jitter measurement
result.
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis
(Option)
222
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
14
Digital Channel
This series oscilloscope provides the standard the logic analyzer (LA) function, and it
has 16 digital channels. The default channel label is D15-D0. The oscilloscope
compares the voltages acquired in each sample with the preset logic threshold. If the
voltage of the sample point is greater than the threshold, it will be stored as logic 1;
otherwise, it will be stored as logic 0. The oscilloscope displays logic levels ("1" and
"0") in the form of a graph for you to easily detect and analyze the errors in circuit
design (hardware design and software design).
Before using the digital channels, connect the oscilloscope and the device under test
using RPL2316 logic probe provided in the accessories. To apply to different
application scenarios, RPL2316 provides three connection methods to connect the
signal under test. For details, refer to RPL2316 Logic Probe User Guide.
NOTE
The digital channel input terminal does not support hot plugging. Please do not insert or pull
out the logic probe when the instrument is in power-on state.
14.1 To Select the Digital Channel
Press on the front panel or enable the touch screen to tap the LA status label at
the bottom of the screen to enter LA setting menu. Press Select to open the channel
menu, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel. You can also press
Select continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Select any of the digital channels (D0-D15). The channel label and waveform of
the selected channel are displayed in red.
Select the user-defined group: selects any group of the channels from the four
user-defined groups. The labels and the waveforms of all the channels in the
selected channel group will be indicated in red.
NOTE
Only the enabled digital channel can be selected, and only the user-defined channel group
that has been grouped can be available.
For how to enable the digital channel/group, refer to descriptions in "
To Enable/
Disable the Digital Channel
".
For how to define the user-defined group, refer to refer to descriptions in "
Group
Setting
".
Digital Channel
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
223
background
14.2 To Enable/Disable the Digital Channel
Press On/Off to enter the on/off sub-menu of the digital channel.
Enable/disable the channels (D7-D0) simultaneously
Press D7-D0 continuously to enable or disable the channels (D7-D0). You can
also enable the touch screen and tap the LA status area. Then the channel and
threshold setting interface is displayed, as shown in the figure below. Tap "D7-
D0" to enable or disable D7-D0 channels. Tap the close icon at the upper-
right corner of the interface to close the interface; or tap the LA status label at
the bottom of the screen to close the interface.
Enable/disable the channels (D15-D8) simultaneously
Press D15-D8 continuously to enable or disable the channels (D15-D8). You can
also enable the touch screen and tap the LA status area. Then the channel and
threshold setting interface is displayed. Tap "D15-D8" to enable or disable D15-
D8 channels.
Enable/disable a single digital channel
Press
Dx On/Off to open the channel selection list. Rotate the multi-function
knob
to select a channel, and then press down the knob to enable or
disable it. You can also press Dx On/Off continuously to switch to select any
channel, and press down the multifunction knob to enable or disable the
channel. You can also enable the touch screen to enable or disable the selected
channel. In addition, You can also enable the touch screen and tap the LA status
area. Then the channel and threshold setting interface is displayed. Tap a single
digital channel to enable or disable it.
NOTE
After pressing
D7-D0 to enable or disable D7-D0, you can still disable or enable any
channel among D7-D0 through the Dx On/Off key. After pressing D7-D0 to enable D7-
D0 channels, the D0-D7 channels under Dx On/Off are enabled automatically. The same
is true for D15-D8 channels.
Digital Channel
224
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Enable or Disable User-defined Channel GroupPress
Group On/Off, then
rotate the multifunction knob to select the specified channel group. Press
down the knob to enable or disable all the channels in this channel group.
You can also enable the touch screen to tap the specified group and select it.
The enabled channel groups are marked with , and the disabled channel
groups are marked with .
NOTE
This function is only valid when the channels have been grouped by users. For how to
carry out group settings, refer to descriptions in "
Group Setting
".
14.3 To Set the Threshold
The threshold levels of channels D7-D0 and channels D15-D8 can be set separately
according to your needs. Press Threshold to enter the threshold setting menu. When
the voltage of the input signal is greater than the currently set threshold, it is treated
as logic 1; otherwise, it is treated as logic 0.
Press D7-D0 or D15-D8 respectively to open the threshold selection list and select
the preset threshold. The available preset values include TTL(1.4 V), CMOS5.0(2.5 V),
CMOS3.3(1.65 V), CMOS2.5(1.25 V), CMOS1.8(0.9 V), ECL(-1.3 V), PECL(3.7 V),
LVDS(1.2 V), and 0.00 V. You can also press D7-D0 or D15-D8 respectively, then rotate
the multifunction knob with a small step value or use the numeric keypad to set
the desired threshold.
Besides, you can also enable the touch screen and tap the LA status area. Then the
channel and threshold setting interface is displayed. You can select the channel and
set the threshold in this pop-up interface. Tap the drop-down button ( ) of
Threshold to select the preset threshold from the drop-down list. Also you can tap the
input field of Threshold to input the value with the pop-up numeric keypad.
14.4 Auto Arrangement Setting
Press Arrange to select the waveform order mode of the currently selected channels
on the screen. You can select "D0-D15" or "D15-D0", By default, it is "D15-D0".
D0-D15: the waveforms on the screen are D0-D15 in sequence from top to
bottom.
D15-D0: the waveforms on the screen are D15-D0 in sequence from top to
bottom.
Digital Channel
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
225
background
14.5 To Set the Waveform Display Size
Press Size, then use the multifunction knob to select the desired waveform display
size, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously
or enable the touch screen to select it. The available display sizes are Small, Medium,
and Large.
NOTE
"Large" is only available when the number of currently enabled channels is less than or equal
to 8.
14.6 To Set the Label
By default, the instrument takes D0-D15 as the channel label of the 16 digital
channels. You can set a user-defined label for each digital channel to easily
differentiate the digital channels. You can use the preset label or input a label
manually. Press Label to enter the label setting menu.
Enable or disable the label display
Press Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the channel label.
If it is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the waveform.
Select a specified digital channel
Press Select and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired digital
channel that needs a label. You can also press Select continuously or enable the
touch screen to select the channel. Select any channel from D0-D15.
Use preset labels
Press Library to select a preset label. The available preset labels include ACK,
ADO, ADDR, BIT, CAS, CLK, CS, DATA, HALT, INT, LOAD, NMI, OUT, PAS, PIN, RDY,
RST, RX, TX, WR, MISO, and D0-D15.
Input a label manually
Press Label to open the label input interface. You can input the label manually.
For details, refer to descriptions in "
Channel Label
".
14.7 Group Setting
Press On/Off > Group to enter the user-defined group setting menu. You can
randomly grouping or ungrouping any of the 16 digital channels. You can also directly
press More to enter the menu to group or ungroup channels according to your
needs.
Digital Channel
226
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Group:
For grouping, the operations for the four user-defined groups (Group1, Group2,
Group3, and Group4) are the same. Here take Group1 as an example.
Press Group1 to open the D0-D15 channel selection list (the status icon is
located at the left side of each channel). Rotate the multifunction knob
or
press Group1 continuously to select the channel(s) to be added to Group1.
Then, press down the multifunction knob
to add the selected channel(s) to
Group1. The channel(s) that has/have been added to Group1 is/are marked with
the status icon , and the channel(s) that has/have not been added to Group1
is/are marked with the status icon .
Use the same method to group the other channels. Each channel can only be
added to one single group, and the channels that have been add to other group
cannot be selected. You can perform group operation on 16 digital channels
(D0-D15).
Ungroup:
Press
UnGroup to open the list. Rotate the multifunction knob or press
UnGroup continuously to select any channel group, then press down the knob
to ungroup the channels.
NOTE
- You can only ungroup the digital channels.
- If no group is set, the
UnGroup menu and the Group On/Off menu are grayed out
and disabled.
14.8 Waveform Color of the Digital Channel
When the digital channel is enabled, its corresponding waveforms and label are
displayed on the screen. This oscilloscope supports setting the display color of the
high logic level, low logic level, and edges.
Press More > Color to enter the waveform color setting menu.
Press High, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the display color of the
high logic level. Press down the knob to select the color. You can also press High
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Press Edge, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the edge color. Press
down the knob to select it. You can also press Edge continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it.
Digital Channel
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
227
background
Press Low, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the display color of the
low logic level. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Low
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Digital Channel
228
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
15
Protocol Decoding
You can use the protocol analysis to discover errors, debug hardware, and accelerate
development easily, ensuring you to accomplish the projects with high speed and
good quality. Protocol decoding is the basis of protocol analysis. Only protocol
analyses with correct protocol decoding are acceptable, and only correct protocol
decoding can identify more error information. This series oscilloscope provides four
bus decoding modules (Decode 1, Decode 2, Decode 3, and Decode 4) to make
common protocol decoding (including Parallel (standard), RS232 (option), I2C
(option), SPI (option), LIN (option), CAN (option), FlexRay (option), I2S (option), and
1553B (option)) for the input signals of the analog channels (CH1-CH4) and the digital
channels (D0-D15). As the decoding functions and setting methods of Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4 are the same, this chapter takes Decode1 as an
example for illustration.
Press on the front panel to open the decode setting menu, or enable the touch
screen to tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Decode" icon to open the decode
setting menu.
To get the decoding option information, refer to descriptions in "
Appendix A: Options
and Accessories
".
If you have purchased the decoding option, activate it according the descriptions in
"
To View the Option Information and the Option Installation
".
15.1 Parallel Decoding
Parallel bus consists of clock line and data line. As shown in the figure below, CLK is
the clock line, whereas Bit0 and Bit1 are the 0 bit and 1st bit on the data line
respectively. The oscilloscope will sample the channel data on the rising edge, falling
edge, or the rising/falling edge of the clock and judge each data point (logic "1" or
logic "0") according to the preset threshold level.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
229
background
Figure 15.1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "Parallel". Press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the Bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Set the Clock Line (CLK)
Press Clock to enter the clock line setting menu.
- Set the clock channel
Press Clock, then rotate the multifunction knob to select any clock channel.
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Clock continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) and digital
channel (D0-D15) can all be selected as the clock source. If "OFF" is selected, no
clock channel is set, and sampling is performed when a hop occurs to the data
of the data channel during decoding.
- Set the clock edge type
Press CLK Edge, then rotate the multifunction knob to select clock edge
type. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press CLK Edge
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select to sample
the channel data on the rising edge ( ), falling edge ( ), or both edges
( ) of the clock signal.
Rising : samples the channel data on the rising edge of the clock.
Falling : samples the channel data on the falling edge of the clock.
Both
: samples the channel data on either the rising edge or the falling
edge of the clock.
Protocol Decoding
230
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Set the threshold
When the clock signal is an analog channel (CH1-CH4), you need to set a
threshold. Press Threshold, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold.
3. Set the Bus Parameters
Press Bus to enter the bus setting menu.
- Set the bus
Press BUS to select the digital bus for Parallel decoding, as shown in the
following table.
Bus Width Bit X
Chann
el
Remarks
CH1 1 0 CH1
Width, Bit X, and CH are set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
CH2 1 0 CH2
Width, Bit X, and CH are set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
CH3 1 0 CH3
Width, Bit X, and CH are set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
CH4 1 0 CH4
Width, Bit X, and CH are set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
D7-D0 8
0
(default)
D0
(defaul
t)
Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D7 to D0
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify it.
D15-D8 8
0
(default)
D8
(defaul
t)
Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D15 to D8
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify it.
D15-D0 16
0
(default)
D0
(defaul
t)
Bit0 to Bit15 are set to D15 to D0
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify it.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
231
background
Bus Width Bit X
Chann
el
Remarks
D0-D7 8
0
(default)
D7
(defaul
t)
Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D0 to D7
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify it.
D8-D15 8
0
(default)
D15
(defaul
t)
Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D8 to D15
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify it.
D0-D15 16
0
(default)
D15
(defaul
t)
Bit0 to Bit15 are set to D0 to D15
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify it.
User 1 to 20
0
(Default)
-
- Set the width
When BUS is set to "User", you can set the bus width. Press Width, then rotate
the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the width.
The available range is from 1 to 20.
- Specify a data channel for each bit
When BUS is set to any digital channel, you can specify a data channel for each
bit.
Press Bit X, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the bit of the channel. By default, 0 is selected. Its available range
is from 0 to (width - 1).
Press CH, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired channel
source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press CH
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog channel (CH1-
CH4) and digital channel (D0-D15) can all be selected as the channel source.
- Set the threshold level
To judge logic "1" and logic "0" of the buses, you need to set a threshold for
each analog channel (CH1-CH4). When the channel signal amplitude is greater
than the preset threshold, it is judged as logic "1"; otherwise logic "0". Press
Threshold, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the threshold.
Protocol Decoding
232
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Set the endian
Press Endian continuously to select "Normal" or "Invert" as the endian of the
bus.
- Set the polarity
Press Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as the polarity
for data decoding.
4. Set Display-related Parameters
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
- Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical POSITION to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the Parallel decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "Parallel" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press
Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded data, the corresponding
line number, and time information.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
233
background
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. When enabled, the following event
table as shown in
Figure 15.2
is displayed. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close
it.
Parallel Bus
Event Table
Line Number
Time
Decoded Data
Decode Name
Figure 15.2 Parallel Decoding Event Table
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then, press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Format continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. The available formats include Hex, Dec, Bin, and
ASC.
Protocol Decoding
234
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", time and decoded data are displayed in the event
table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the specified row will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of data, it indicates
that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the
details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified
column will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified
column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At
this time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode, then use the multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
5. Set the Noise Rejection
Press Settings > Noise Reject to enable or disable the noise rejection function.
Noise rejection can remove the data that last not enough time on the bus and
eliminate the burst glitch in the actual circuit. When the noise rejection is enabled,
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
235
background
press Reject Time, rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the desired rejection time. The available range is from 0 s to 1 s.
15.2 RS232 Decoding (Option)
RS232 serial bus consists of the transmitting data line (TX) and the receiving data line
(RX).
Figure 15.3 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus
The industry standard of RS232 uses "Negative Logic", i.g. high level is logic "0" and
low level is logic "1".
Figure 15.4 Schematic Diagram of Negative Logic
In RS232, baud rate is used to represent the transmission rate (namely bits per
second) of the data.
You need to set the start bit, data bits, check bit (optional), and stop bits for each
frame of data.
Protocol Decoding
236
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Start Bit: indicates when to output data.
Data Bit: indicates the number of data bits actually contained in each frame of data.
Check Bit: used to check whether the data are properly transmitted.
Stop Bit: indicates when to stop outputting data.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "RS232". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the Bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly Apply RS232 Trigger Settings to RS232 Decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the current RS232 trigger settings and apply them to
RS232 decoding function (set the corresponding RS232 decoding parameters
automatically). For source channels, copy the source channel of the trigger to the
Tx source channel of the decoding. For analog channels, the threshold level
settings will also be copied.
3. Set the Baud Rate
Three methods are available for setting the baud rate:
- Press Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad.
- Press Baud, then select the preset baud rate from the drop-down list. The
available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150 bps, 300 bps,
and etc.
- Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud rate at a
small step size. The step size is different for adjusting different baud rates.
4. Set the Source
Press Sources to enter the signal setting menu.
- Set the Tx source and the threshold
- Press Tx, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired channel,
and press down the knob to select it. You can also press Tx continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The available channels include OFF, CH1-
CH4, and D0-D15.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
237
background
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold, then
rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set
the threshold of the Tx source channel. When you modify the threshold of
the Tx source channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is
displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying
the threshold.
- Set the Rx source and the threshold
Use the same method to select the Rx source and set the threshold (available
only when the Rx source channel is set to an analog channel (CH1-CH4)).
NOTE
The source channels of Tx and Rx cannot be set to "OFF" at the same time.
- Set the polarity
Press Polarity continuously to set Positive or Negative as the
polarity for data decoding.
- Positive: Uses negative logic. High level is logic "0" and low level is logic "1".
- Negative: Uses positive logic. High level is logic "1” and low level is logic
"0".
5. Set the Data Package
Press Settings to enter the data package setting menu.
- Data
Press Data and rotate the multifunction knob to set the number of data bits
actually contained in each frame of data. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press Data continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available data bits are 5 bits, 6 bits, 7 bits, 8 bits, and 9 bits.
- Parity
Used to check whether the data are properly transmitted. Press Parity, and
rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired parity mode, then press
down the knob to select it. You can also press Parity continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it.
- None: indicates that no check bit appears during the transmission.
Protocol Decoding
238
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Even: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit is an
even number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "0" should be
added to the check bit.
- Odd: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit is an
odd number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "1" should be
added to the check bit.
- Stop Bit
Press Stop Bit, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the stop bits after
each frame of data. You can also press Stop Bit continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. It can be set to 1 bit, 1.5 bits, or 2 bits.
- Endian
Press Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "LSB".
LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest bit of
the data is transmitted first.
MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest bit of
the data is transmitted first.
LSB
MSB
- Package
Press Package to enable or disable the package display in data transmission.
When enabled, several data blocks will be combined based on the separator.
- Separator
Press Separator, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
package separator in data transmission, then press down the knob to select it.
You can also press Separator continuously or enable the touch screen to select
it. It can be set to 0A(LF), 0D(CR), 20(SP), or 0(NUL).
6. Set Display-related Parameters
Press
Display to enter the display setting menu.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
239
background
- Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical POSITION to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the RS232 decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "RS232-TX" and/or "RS232-RX" will be displayed at
the upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded data (Tx and/or Rx), the
corresponding line number, time, and error information (Tx and/or Rx).
NOTE
When the Tx and Rx source channels are set to "OFF", information of the data line is not
displayed in the data table.
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. You can also enable the touch screen
to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close it.
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of "Data" (Tx and/or Rx) in the event table. Then,
Protocol Decoding
240
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats include Hex, Dec,
Bin, and ASC.
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data (Tx and/or Rx), time, and error
information (Tx and/or Rx) are displayed in the event table. If you select
"Details", the detailed data in the specified row will be displayed in the event
table. If "…" appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are
not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of data, it
indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can
view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode, then use the multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press
Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
241
background
7. Error Expressions in Decoding
In RS232 decoding, parity error and/or EOF (end of frame) error may occur.
- Parity error
When a parity error is detected during the decoding, red error report
information will be displayed. For example, when "none" is chosen for the parity
on the transmitter and "odd" is chosen for the parity on the decoder, the
following parity error information (its display form is related to the value of
the horizontal time base) occurs, as shown in the figure below. Wherein, the
number of 1s in the 8-digit figure (01001111, LSB) is an odd number, and the
parity bit should be 0. However, the parity bit detected on the Tx is 1; thus a
parity error occurs.
- EOF error
This error is generated when the EOF condition is not met. For example, if the
Stop Bit is set to 1.5, but the actual stop bits is less than 1.5 bits, then the red
error report information (its display form is related to the value of the
horizontal time base) is displayed in the following figure.
Protocol Decoding
242
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Parity error and EOF error
When both the parity error and the EOF error are detected, the error report
information (its display form is related to the value of the horizontal time base),
as shown in the following figure, will be displayed.
15.3 I2C Decoding (Option)
I2C serial bus consists of the clock line (SCL) and the data line (SDA).
SCL: samples SDA on the of rising or falling edge of the clock.
SDA: indicates the data channel.
Figure 15.5 I2C Serial Bus
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
243
background
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "I2C". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the Bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly Apply I2C Trigger Settings to I2C Decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the current I2C trigger settings (SCL and SDA) and apply
them to I2C decoding function (SCL and SDA). For analog channels, the threshold
level settings will also be copied.
3. Set the Source
Press Sources to enter the signal setting menu.
- Set the clock channel source and the threshold
- Press SCL, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired source of
the clock channel, and then press down the knob it. You can also press SCL
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select CH1-CH4
or D0-D15.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press SCL Thre, then rotate
the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
threshold of the clock channel. When you modify the threshold of the clock
channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on
the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
- Set the data channel source and the threshold
Use the same method to select the source of the data channel and set the
threshold (only when the source of the data channel is set to an analog channel
(CH1-CH4)).
- Exchange sources
Press Exchange continuously to select "SCL/SDA" or "SDA/SCL" to exchange
the sources of the current clock channel and data channel.
4. Specify whether to include/exclude the "R/W" bit in/from the address
information
Protocol Decoding
244
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
For I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information. The address
information includes the read address and the write address. Press R/W
continuously to select whether to include the "R/W" bit in the address information.
When "With" is selected, the "R/W" bit will be included in the address information
and located at the lowest bit; when "Without" is selected, the "R/W" bit will not be
included in the address information.
5. Set Display-related Parameters
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
- Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical POSITIONto
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the I2C decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "I2C" will be displayed at the upper-left side of the
bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded data, the corresponding
line number, time, R/W bit, address information, and acknowledgement
information.
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. When enabled, the following event
table as shown in
Figure 15.6
is displayed. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close
it.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
245
background
I2C Bus
Event Table
Line Number
Time
Acknowledgement
Decode Data R/W Bit Address
Figure 15.6 I2C Decoding Event Table
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then, press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Format continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. The available formats include Hex, Dec, Bin, and
ASC.
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information are
displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the
specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of
Protocol Decoding
246
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data
in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in
the specified column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully
displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode, then use the multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
6. Address Information in Decoding
For I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information (read address
and write address). In the address information, "Read" indicates the read address
( ) and "Write" indicates the write address ( ). You can decide
whether to include or exclude the "R/W" bit for the address information.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
247
background
Address Information (Read Address)
7. Error Expressions in Decoding
In I2C decoding, when ACK (acknowledgment) is 1, ACK error occurs. When the
detected ACK is 1, red error report information (the display form is related to
the value of the horizontal time base) is displayed.
The detected ACK is 1
15.4 SPI Decoding (Option)
SPI bus is based on the master— slave configuration and usually consists of chip
select line (CS), clock line (CLK), and data line (SDA). Wherein, the data lines include
Protocol Decoding
248
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
the master input/slave output (MISO) data line and master output/slave input (MOSI)
data line. The oscilloscope samples the channel data on the rising or falling edge of
the clock signal (if the source is an analog channel, the oscilloscope will also judge
each data point (logic "1" or logic "0") according to the preset threshold level).
Figure 15.7 SPI Serial Bus
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "SPI". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the Bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly Apply SPI Trigger Settings to SPI Decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the SPI trigger settings and apply them to SPI decoding
function (set the corresponding SPI decoding parameters automatically). The
settings that can be copied include CS/timeout mode, CLK, CLK, MISO, MOSI,
Width, and etc. For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be
copied.
3. Set the ModePress Mode to enter the mode setting menu.
Press Mode continuously to select "Timeout" or "CS".
- Timeout:
you can perform frame synchronization according to the timeout, and the
timeout value must be greater than half of the clock cycle. Press Timeout, and
then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set
the timeout value. The adjustable range of the timeout value is from 8 ns to 10
s. By default, it is 1 μs.
- CS:
contains a chip select line (CS). You can perform frame synchronization
according to CS. When "CS" is selected,
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
249
background
- Press CS, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press CS
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog channel
(CH1-CH4) or digital channel (D0-D15) can all be selected as the CS channel.
- Press CS Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as
the polarity for CS channel.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4) as the CS channel, press
Threshold, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold.
4. Set the Source
Press Sources to enter the signal setting menu.
- Set the CLK
- Press CLK, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired source
of the clock channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press CLK continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog
channel (CH1-CH4) or digital channel (D0-D15) can all be selected.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold below CLK,
then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad to set the
threshold of the clock channel.
- Press Slope to set the instrument to sample MISO and MOSI on the rising
edge ( ) or the falling edge ( ) of CLK.
- Set MISO and MOSI
- Press MISO, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the MISO data
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press MISO
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available channels
include OFF, analog channels (CH1-CH4), and digital channels (D0-D15).
When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press
Threshold below
Protocol Decoding
250
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
MISO, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad to
set the threshold of the MISO data channel.
- Press MOSI, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the MOSI data
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press MOSI
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available channels
include OFF, analog channels (CH1-CH4), and digital channels (D0-D15).
When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold below
MOSI, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad to
set the threshold of the MOSI data channel.
NOTE
The source channels of MISO and MOSI cannot be set to "OFF" at the same time.
5. Set the Data Parameters
Press Settings to enter the data setting menu.
- Set the endian
Press Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is MSB
LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest bit of
the data is transmitted first.
MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest bit of
the data is transmitted first.
- Set the polarity
Press Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as the polarity
for data decoding.
- Set the width
Press Width, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the bits of each frame of data. The setting range is from 4 to 32.
By default, it is 8.
6. Set Display-related Parameters
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
- Set the display format
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
251
background
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical POSITION to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the RS232 decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "SPI-MISO" and/or "SPI-MOSI" will be displayed at
the upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded data (MISO and/or
MOSI), the corresponding line number, time, and error information (MISO
and/or MOSI).
NOTE
When the source channel of MISO or MOSI is set to "OFF", information of the data line
is not displayed in the data table.
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. When enabled, the following event
table as shown in
Figure 15.8
is displayed. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close
it.
Protocol Decoding
252
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
SPI Bus
Event Table
Line Number
Time
MISO ErrorMISO Decode Data MISO Decoding Data MISO Error
Figure 15.8 SPI Decoding Event Table
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of "Data" (MISO and/or MOSI) in the event table.
Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASC.
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data (MISO and/or MOSI), time, and
error information (MISO and/or MOSI) are displayed in the event table. If
you select "Details", the detailed data in the specified row will be displayed
in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of data, it indicates that the
decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
253
background
the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column
will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode, then use the multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
15.5 LIN Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the LIN signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1" or
logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The LIN decoding is required to
specify the LIN signal protocol version.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "LIN". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the Bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly Apply LIN Trigger Settings to LIN Decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the current LIN trigger settings and apply them to LIN
decoding function (set the corresponding LIN decoding parameters automatically).
For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be copied.
3. Set the Source and the Threshold
Protocol Decoding
254
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Press Source, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired source
channel, and then press down the knob it. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select CH1-CH4 or
D0-D15.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold, then rotate
the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
threshold of the source channel. When you modify the threshold of the clock
channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on the
screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Set the Signal
Press Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
- Set the baud rate
Three methods are available for setting the baud rate:
- Press Baud Rate, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed
numeric keypad.
- Press Baud Rate to select the preset baud rate. The available baud rates
include 2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, and etc.
- Press Baud Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob to baud rate at a
small step of 1 bps.
- Set the parity bit
Press Parity bit continuously to select whether the data contain the parity bit.
- Set the protocol version
Press Version, and rotate the multifunction knob to select a protocol version
that matches the LIN bus signal. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Version continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available versions include 1.X, 2.X, and Both.
5. Set Display-related Parameters
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
- Set the display format
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
255
background
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical POSITION to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the LIN decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "LIN" will be displayed at the upper-left side of the
bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded data, the corresponding
line number, time, frame ID, cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and error
information.
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. When enabled, the following event
table as shown in
Figure 15.9
is displayed. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close
it.
Protocol Decoding
256
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
LIN Bus
Event Table
Line Number
Time
ErrorCRC Frame ID Decoded Data
Figure 15.9 LIN Decoding Event Table
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then, press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Format continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. The available formats include Hex, Dec, Bin, and
ASC.
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information are
displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the
specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
257
background
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data
in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in
the specified column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully
displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode, then use the multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
6. Interpret the Decoded LIN Data
- Break (Sync Break): expressed in Hex, displayed as a pink patch.
- SYNC (Sync): expressed in Hex, displayed as a dark green patch.
- ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, displayed as a blue-green patch.
- Data (Data): Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin,
or ASCII), displayed as a black patch.
- CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed in light yellow-
green. When errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
Break
Sync ID
Data CRC
- Wakeup (wake up symbol): displayed as a tangerine patch.
Protocol Decoding
258
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
7. Error Expressions in Decoding
In LIN decoding, the parity error, checksum error, or sync error may occur.
- Parity error
If the parity error is detected, frame ID and parity bit (when the signal is set to
include the parity bit) will be displayed in red, as shown in the figure below.
Parity Error
- Checksum error
If the checksum error is detected, CRC is displayed in red, as shown in the figure
below.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
259
background
Checksum Error
- Sync error
If the sync error is detected, SYNC is displayed in red, as shown in the figure
below.
Sync Error
Protocol Decoding
260
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
15.6 CAN Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the CAN signal at the specified sample position, and judges
each data point to be logic "1" or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level.
You need to specify the CAN signal type and sample position for CAN decoding.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "CAN". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the BusPress Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the
decoding function.
2. Quickly Apply CAN Trigger Settings to CAN Decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the current CAN trigger settings and apply them to CAN
decoding function (set the corresponding CAN decoding parameters
automatically). For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be copied.
3. Set the Source and the Threshold
- Press Source, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired source
channel, and then press down the knob it. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select CH1-CH4 or
D0-D15.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold, then rotate
the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
threshold of the source channel. When you modify the threshold of the clock
channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on the
screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Set the Signal
Press Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
- Set the signal type
Press Signal and rotate the multifunction knob to select a signal type that
matches the CAN bus signal. Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Signal continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
signal types include CAN_H, CAN_L, Rx, Tx, and Diff.
- CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
261
background
- CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.
- Rx: indicates the Receive signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
- Tx: indicates the Transmit signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
- DIFF: indicates the CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog
channel by using a differential probe. Connect the differential probe's
positive lead to the CAN_H bus signal and connect the negative lead to the
CAN_L bus signal.
- Specify the standard signal rate
Three methods are available for setting the baud rate:
- Press Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad.
- Press Baud to select the preset baud rate. The available baud rates include
10 kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps, 50 kbps, and etc.
- Press
Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud rate at
a small step.
- Sample position
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit
level at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the
time from the start of the bit to the sample point" to the "bit time", as shown in
the figure below.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Figure 15.10 Sample Position
Press
Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-
up numeric keypad to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10%
to 90%.
Protocol Decoding
262
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- CAN-FD baud
Three methods are available for setting the CAN-FD baud rate:
- Press CAN-FD Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed
numeric keypad.
- Press CAN-FD Baud to select the preset CAN-FD baud rate. The available
baud rates it 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 3 Mbps, 4 Mbps, and etc.
- Press CAN-FD Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
CAN-FD baud rate at a small step.
- FD sample position
FD sample position is a dedicated parameter configured for the CAN-FD
decoding.Press FD Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the FD sample position. The settable
range is from 10% to 90%.
5. Set Display-related Parameters
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
- Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical POSITION to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the CAN decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "CAN" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press
Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded data, the corresponding
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
263
background
line number, time, frame ID, data length code (DLC), cyclic redundancy check
(CRC), and Acknowledgement (ACK) information.
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. When enabled, the following event
table as shown in
Figure 15.11
is displayed. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close
it.
CAN Bus
Event Table
Line Number
Time
ACKCRC Frame ID DLC
Decoded Data
Figure 15.11 CAN Decoding Event Table
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press
Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then, press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Format continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. The available formats include Hex, Dec, Bin, and
ASC.
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
Protocol Decoding
264
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information are
displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the
specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data
in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in
the specified column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully
displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode, then use the multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
6. Interpret the Decoded CAN Data
- Frame ID: expressed in Hex, displayed as a dark yellow-green patch.
- DLC (Data Length Code): expressed in Hex, displayed as a blue-green patch.
- Data: Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or
ASCII), displayed as a green patch.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
265
background
- CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed in yellow-green.
When errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
- ACK (Acknowledgement): when effective, displayed as a light yellow-green
patch; when errors (ACK is detected to be 1) occur, displayed as a red patch.
Frame ID
DLC ACK
Data CRC
- R (remote frame): displayed as a tangerine patch.
- Stuff (Bit filling error): displayed as a red patch.
15.7 FlexRay Decoding (Option)
FlexRay is a type of differential serial bus configured with three consecutive segments
(i.g. packet header, payload, and packet trailer). The oscilloscope samples the FlexRay
signal at the specified sample position and judges each data point as logic "1" or
logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The FlexRay decoding is required to
specify the signal type and baud rate.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "FlexRay". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press
Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the Bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly Apply FlexRay Trigger Settings to FlexRay Decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the current FlexRay trigger settings and apply them to
FlexRay decoding function (set the corresponding FlexRay decoding parameters
automatically). For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be copied.
3. Set the Source and the Threshold
- Press Source, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired source
channel, and then press down the knob it. You can also press
Source
Protocol Decoding
266
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select CH1-CH4 or
D0-D15.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold, then rotate
the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
threshold of the source channel. When you modify the threshold of the clock
channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on the
screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Set the Signal
Press Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
- Select the channel
Press Channel to select a channel ("A" or "B") that matches the actual FlexRay
bus signal.
- Specify the signal rate
Press Baud to open the baud rate list (2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, and 10 Mbps), and
select a preset baud rate that matches the actual FlexRay bus signal. You can
also press Baud continuously, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
numeric keypad to set the desired baud rate.
- Set the signal type
Press Signal and rotate the multifunction knob to select a signal type that
matches the actual FlexRay bus signal. Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Signal continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available signal types include BP, BM, and RX/TX.
- Sample position
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit
level at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the
time from the start of the bit to the sample point" to the "bit time", as shown in
the figure below.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
267
background
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Figure 15.12 Sample Position
Press
Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-
up numeric keypad to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10%
to 90%.
5. Set Display-related Parameters
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
- Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the FlexRay decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "Flexray" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded data, the corresponding
line number, time, frame ID, and Payload Length (PL).
Protocol Decoding
268
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. When enabled, the following event
table as shown in
Figure 15.13
is displayed. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close
it.
FlexRay Bus
Event Table
Line Number
Time
Frame CRCCycleFrame ID PL
Decoded Data
Header CRC
Figure 15.13 FlexRay Decoding Event Table
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press
Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then, press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Format continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. The available formats include Hex, Dec, Bin, and
ASC.
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
269
background
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information are
displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the
specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data
in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in
the specified column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully
displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode, then use the multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
6. Interpret the decoded FlexRay frame data
- TSS: transmission start sequence, displayed as a pink patch.
- Sync Frame: displayed as a deep pink patch.
- ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, displayed as a blue-green patch.
- PL (Payload Length): expressed in Hex, displayed as a dark blue patch.
- HCRC (Header Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed in yellow-
green. When CRC errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
- CYC (Cycle Number): expressed in Hex, displayed as a light blue patch.
Protocol Decoding
270
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Data: Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or
ASCII), displayed as a green patch.
- TCRC (Tail Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed as a yellow-
green patch. When CRC errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
TSS
Frame ID TCRC
HCRC Data
Sync Frame PL
CRC
15.8 I2S Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the I2S signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1" or
logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. I2S decoding is required to specify
the serial clock, channel signal, and the data's source channel. You need to set
Alignment, WS Low, and other parameters.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "I2S". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the Bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly Apply I2S Trigger Settings to I2S Decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the current I2S trigger settings and apply them to I2S
decoding function (set the corresponding I2S decoding parameters automatically).
For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be copied.
3. Set the Source
Press Sources to enter the signal setting menu.
- Set the serial clock channel source, threshold, and clock edge
- Press SCLK, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired source
channel, and then press down the knob it. You can also press SCLK
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select CH1-CH4
or D0-D15.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press SCLK Thre below
SCLK, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
271
background
keypad to set the SCLK threshold. When you modify the threshold of the
clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is
displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying
the threshold.
- Press SCLK Edge continuously to select "Rising( )" or "Falling( )" as the
desired clock edge.
- Set the WS source and the threshold
- Press WS, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press WS
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select CH1-CH4
or D0-D15.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press WS Thre below WS,
then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to
set the threshold of the WS signal. When you modify the WS threshold, a
dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on the screen.
It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
- Set the data channel source and the threshold
- Press Data, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired data
channel source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Data continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select
CH1-CH4 or D0-D15.
- When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Data Thre below
Data, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the threshold of the data signal. When you modify the data
threshold, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on
the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Set the Bus Parameters
Press
Settings to enter the bus setting menu.
Protocol Decoding
272
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Set the word sizePress Word Size, then rotate the multifunction knob or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the word size.
Its range is from 4 to 32.
- Set the receiver word size
Press Receive, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the receiver word size. Its range is from 4 to 32.
- Set the alignment mode
Press Alignment, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the alignment
way for data signal. Then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Alignment continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
alignment ways include I2S, LJ, and RJ.
- Set the WS Low
Press WS Low continuously to select "Left" or "Right".
- Set the endian
Press Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "LSB".
- Set the polarity
Press Data Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as the
polarity for data decoding.
5. Set Display-related Parameters
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
- Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical POSITION to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
273
background
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the I2S decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "I2S" will be displayed at the upper-left side of the
bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded left channel data, right
channel data, the corresponding line number, and time.
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. When enabled, the following event
table as shown in
Figure 15.14
is displayed. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close
it.
I2S Bus
Event Table
Line Number
Time
Right Channel DataLeft Channel Data
Figure 15.14 I2S Decoding Event Table
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of the decoded data. Then, press down the knob
Protocol Decoding
274
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
to select it. You can also press Format continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available formats include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASC.
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information are
displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the
specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data
in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in
the specified column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully
displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode, then use the multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
275
background
15.9 1553B Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the 1553B signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1"
or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. 1553B decoding is required to
specify the data channel source and the threshold.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 > Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob to select "1553B". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or Disable the Bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly Apply 1553B Trigger Settings to 1553B Decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the current 1553B trigger settings and apply them to
1553B decoding function (set the corresponding 1553B decoding parameters
automatically).
3. Set the Data Channel Source and the Threshold
- Press Data, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired data
channel source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Data continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
channels include CH1-CH4.
- Press Threshold, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold of the source channel. When you modify
the threshold of the channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level
is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying
the threshold.
4. Set Display-related Parameters
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
- Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display format of
the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available formats
include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASCII.
- Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Protocol Decoding
276
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical POSITION to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
- Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the 1553B decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "1553B" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
- Set parameters for the event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding information in time
order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded
data. The decoding information includes the decoded data, word type, the
corresponding line number, time, and error information.
- Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to enable or
disable the display of the event table. When enabled, the following event
table as shown in
Figure 15.15
is displayed. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the icon at the right-upper corner of the event table to close
it.
1553B Bus
Event Table
Line Number
Time
ErrorDataWord Type
Figure 15.15 1553B Decoding Event Table
NOTE
- When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen
will also change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding
information in the event table will also be changed.
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
277
background
- The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the
horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the
detailed information.
- Set the event table format: Press
Format, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the display format of the decoded data. Then, press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Format continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available formats include Hex, Dec, Bin, and ASC.
- Set the view type: Press View, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
form of the event table to be viewed. Then, press down the knob to select it.
You can also press View continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and "Payload". You can
also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top of the event table to
select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information are
displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the
specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data
in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in
the specified column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully
displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
- Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Press Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packet to the internal memory or the
external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed
saving operation, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
- Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then, select
the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump to and the
specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the screen.
- Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4). Press
Decode, then use the multifunction knob
Protocol Decoding
278
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
to select a decode module, then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Decode continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
5. Interpret the Decoded 1553B Data
- C/S: command/status word. It is displayed as a blue-green patch.
- RTA: remote terminal address of the command/status word. It is displayed as a
tangerine patch.
- C/S data: the rest data value of the command/status word. Its display format is
the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or ASCII), displayed as a green
patch.
- Parity bit: displayed as a yellow-green patch; when errors occur, displayed as a
red patch.
- Data word data: data of the data word. Its display format is the same as that of
the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or ASCII), displayed as a green patch.
C/S Word
Parity Bit
Parity Bit
Data Word
RTA C/S Data
Protocol Decoding
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
279
background
16
Reference Waveform
This series oscilloscope provides 10 reference waveform positions (Ref1-Ref10). In the
actual test process, you can compare the signal waveform with the reference
waveform to locate the failure.
16.1 To Enable the Ref Function
Press on the front panel to enable the reference waveform function, or enable
the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner
of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Ref" icon to enable the
reference waveform function.
When the Ref function is enabled, you can select different color for each reference
waveform, set the source of each reference channel, adjust the vertical scale and
offset of the reference waveform, save the reference waveform to the internal or
external memory, and recall it when needed.
NOTE
When the horizontal time base is set to "XY", the reference waveform function is disabled.
16.2 To Select the Reference Channel
Press Current, rotate the multifunction knob to select the reference waveform
channel (Ref1-Ref10). You can also press Current continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the reference waveform channel. By default, Ref1 is enabled.
16.3 To Select the Ref Source
Press Source, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired reference
waveform source (CH1-CH4, D0-D15, or Math1-Math4). You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the reference waveform source.
NOTE
Only the currently enabled channel can be selected as the source channel of the reference
waveform.
Reference Waveform
280
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
16.4 To Adjust the Ref Waveform Display
After pressing SaveToRef, you can adjust the vertical scale and offset of the reference
waveform specified under Current.
Press VScale, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the vertical scale of the reference waveform. Press VOffset, then rotate
the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the vertical offset
of the reference waveform. In the Ref function, You can also directly rotate Wave
Vertical SCALE and Wave Vertical POSITION respectively to modify the vertical
scale and the vertical offset.
16.5 To Save to Internal Memory
Press SaveToRef to save the displayed waveform for the specified source to the
internal memory as the reference waveform.
NOTE
This operation only saves the reference waveform to the volatile memory, and the waveform
will be cleared at power-off or restoring to the default settings.
16.6 To Clear the Display of the Reference Waveform
Press Clear to clear the display of the current reference waveform on the screen.
Meanwhile, the VScale and VOffset menus for the reference waveform are grayed
out and disabled. You can also press on the front panel to clear the display of
the reference waveforms of all the reference channels.
NOTE
This operation only clears the display of the reference waveform on the screen, and the
reference waveform is still saved in the memory.
16.7 To View Details of the Reference Waveform
Press More > Details, and the detailed information about all the reference waveforms
will be displayed on the screen in the form of a list. Press Details again to close the
details list. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the right-upper
corner of the table to close it.
Reference Waveform
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
281
background
16.8 To Reset the Reference Waveform
Press More > Reset, and the reference waveform returns to the position where the
source channel waveform is located when the Save operation was executed.
16.9 To Set the Color of the Reference Waveform
This series oscilloscope provides five colors (gray, green, blue, red, and orange) to
mark the reference waveforms of different channels in order to distinguish them.
Press Color, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the color of the
reference waveform of the channel. You can also press Color continuously or enable
the touch screen to select it. The GND icon and the label at the left side of the
waveform of the currently selected channel will be filled with the specified color. For
example, and .
16.10 To Set the Label
Press More > Label to enter the label setting menu. You can use the built-in label in
the library or manually input a label. Three input methods are available for you to
input a label name, including Chinese, English, and Traditional Chinese.
Press Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the reference
waveform label. If it is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the
waveform. If the current channel is REFn (n=1,2, …10), then the default label of
the reference waveform is REFn (n=1, 2, …10).
Reference Waveform
282
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press Library, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the preset label,
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Library
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available preset labels
include Default, ACK, ADDR, BIT, CLK, and etc.
Press Label, and the label editing interface is automatically displayed. You can
input the label manually. For the label editing methods, refer to descriptions in
"
Channel Label
".
16.11 To Export to Internal or External Memory
You can save the current reference waveform to the internal memory or external USB
storage device. The file format of the reference waveform is "*.ref", "*.bin", or "*.csv".
Press More > Export to enter the reference waveform file saving interface. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
" to save the reference waveform to the
internal or external memory. Only when the reference waveform is saved, can this
export function be valid.
NOTE
This series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB storage device of FAT32 format.
For the "*.bin" format file, refer to "
Binary Data Format (.bin)
".
16.12 To Import from Internal or External Memory
You can import the stored reference waveform file from the internal memory or
external USB storage device to the internal instrument and display the file on the
screen.
Press More > Import to enter the reference waveform file loading interface. Please
refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
" to import the reference waveform to to the
instrument and display it on the screen.
NOTE
This series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB storage device of FAT32 format.
Reference Waveform
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
283
background
17
Pass/Fail Test
During the product design and manufacturing process, you usually need to monitor
the variations of the signal or judge whether the product is up to standard. The pass/
fail test function of this series oscilloscope can accomplish this task perfectly.
17.1 To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function
On the front panel, press > PassFail to open the pass/fail test setting menu, or
enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-
left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Pass/Fail"
icon to open the pass/fail test setting menu.
In the "Pass/Fail" setting menu, press Enable continuously to enable or disable the
pass/fail test function.
NOTE
The pass/fail test function cannot be enabled in the following conditions: when the time base
mode is "XY" or "ROLL"; when the delay sweep is enabled.
17.2 To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation
After the Pass/Fail test function is enabled, press Operate continuously to start or
stop the test operation.
During the test process, the oscilloscope will test the waveforms, display the test
information, and output the test information based on the current of settings. You
can set the test mask, the display status of the test information, and the output form
of a pass/ failed test based on the selected source channel for the test. Then save the
test mask range to the internal or external memory, and then recall it when needed.
For the details, please refer to the following section.
NOTE
Only when the pass/fail test function is enabled, can you start or stop the pass/fail test
operation, enable or disable the display of the test information, save and recall the test
mask range.
After starting the test operation, you can neither modify the source channel nor adjust
the test mask.
17.3 To Select the Source
Before selecting the source, connect the signal under test to the analog channel input
terminal of the oscilloscope. Press Source, and rotate the multifunction knob to
Pass/Fail Test
284
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
select the desired source channel, and then press down the knob it. You can also
press Source continuously or enable the touch screen Select to select it. The available
output channels include CH1-CH4.
NOTE
Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
17.4 To Create a Mask
Press Mask > Create to self-define the mask of the pass/fail test. Press Range, then
rotate the multifunction knob to select the range and then press down the knob
to select the range. You can also press Range continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. You can select "Screen" or "Cursor" as the mask region. The default is
"Screen".
If "Screen" is selected under Range, then the whole waveform display area is
considered to be the mask region. Press X Mask and Y Mask respectively, then
rotate the multifunction knob or use with the pop-up numeric keypad to set
the horizontal tolerance range and vertical tolerance range. During the
adjustment, you can see the outline of the current mask. Then press Create to
apply the currently created mask (the region not covered by blue within the
screen).
If "Cursor" is selected, two cursors (used to specify the current test mask range)
will be displayed on the screen. Cursor A is at the left and Cursor B is at the right.
Press CursorA and CursorB, and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
positions of both Cursor A and Cursor B, respectively. Also you can press
CursorAB and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the two cursors
synchronously (the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B remains
unchanged). Then refer to the above methods to adjust the horizontal and
vertical tolerance ranges, as well as create a mask (the region not covered by
blue within the cursor region).
Pass/Fail Test
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
285
background
17.5 To Save a Mask
When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can save the current test mask range
to the internal memory or external USB storage device (when detected) in "*.pf"
format.
Press Mask > Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"
Store and Load
" to save the test mask file to the internal or external memory.
17.6 To Load a Mask
When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can load the test mask files from the
internal memory or external USB storage device (when detected) and apply them to
the current pass/fail test function.
Press Mask > Load to enter the file loading interface. Please refer to descriptions in
Store and Load
to load the specified test mask files (in *.pf format) and apply them to
the current pass/fail test function.
17.7 To Set the Output Form of the Test Results
In the Option menu, you can set what the oscilloscope will execute when test results
are detected according to your needs.
Set the output event and Aux output
- Press Output Event, then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Fail"
or "Pass". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Output Event
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
- Press Aux Output continuously to enable or disable the Aux output. If Aux
Output is enabled, press > System, the AUX Out menu is
automatically set to "PassFail". When a successful or failed event test is
detected, a pulse will be output from the rear-panel [TRIG OUT] connector.
If Aux Output is disabled, press > System, the AUX Out menu is
automatically set to "TrigOut", and the output of the rear-panel [TRIG OUT]
connector is irrelevant with the pass/fail test.
Set the Output Polarity and Output Pulse Width
Pass/Fail Test
286
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press Polarity continuously to select "Positive" or "Negative", then press Pulse,
rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad to set the pulse
width. Its range is from 100 ns to 10 ms. By default, it is 1 μs.
Set the Error Action
Press Err Action, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the operation that
the oscilloscope will execute once a failed test is detected. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Err Action continuously and press down the
multifunction knob to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to
select it.
- Stop: indicates stopping test when a a pass/fail test event is found.
- Beeper: indicates that the beeper sounds an alarm when a pass/fail test
event is found (irrelevant with the on/off status of the beeper).
- Screenshot: performs the screenshot operation when a pass/fail test event
is found. If an external storage device is detected, the screenshot will be
saved to the external storage device directly. Otherwise, it will be saved to
the local disk.
NOTE
If "Screenshot" is selected, "Stop" action will be executed forcibly. The test will be
stopped automatically. After the Screenshot operation is completed, the test will
continue.
17.8 To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics of
the Test Results
Press Information continuously to enable or disable the display of the statistics of the
test results. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the right-upper
corner of the statistics window to close it.
The test results statistics include the number of failed frames, the number of
successful frames, and total number of frames, as shown in the figure below.
Pass/Fail Test
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
287
background
17.9 To Reset Statistics
Press Reset to clear the current test results and execute statistics on the test results
again.
Pass/Fail Test
288
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
18
Waveform Recording and Playing
Waveform recording/playing function can play the recorded waveforms of the analog
input channels (CH1-CH4) and the digital channels (D0-D15), enabling you to analyze
the waveforms better.
NOTE
The horizontal time base must be set to YT mode during waveform recording.
18.1 Common Settings
Press > Record to enter the waveform recording setting menu. You can also
enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-
left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Record" icon
to open the waveform recording setting menu.
1. Record
Press Record continuously to enable or disable the waveform recording function.
Before recording the waveform, you can refer to descriptions in "
Record Options
"
to set the waveform recording parameters. Press Record to start recording the
waveforms. Then the record icon turns from . During the recording, the
current real-time recording information is displayed on the screen, as shown in
Figure 18.1
. In the figure, the data at the left side of the slash is the current frame.
Its value changes constantly (the value under the Current menu is changing
constantly too). The data at the right of the slash indicate the number of frames for
recording. The time difference ΔT at the upper-right corner indicates the time
different between the current frame and the first frame. After the recording is
completed, the recording marker " " turns out to be " " and recording stops
automatically. During recording, you can also press Record again to suspend
recording manually.
Waveform Recording and Playing
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
289
background
Current Frame Recording Frames
Time Difference
Figure 18.1 Recording Process
2. Play
Press Playing to start playing the recorded waveforms. " " automatically turns
out to be "
". For details about playing, refer to descriptions in "
Play Options
".
During waveform playing, the current frame changes accordingly (the value of the
parameter
Current changes accordingly). After playing is completed, " "
automatically turns out to be "
" automatically. During playing, you can also press
Playing again to suspend playing manually.
3. Current Frame
Press Current, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the current frame. At this time, the waveform of the current frame is
displayed on the screen.
4. Set Transition
Press Jump To continuously to select to jump to the recorded end frame ( Last) or
the recorded start frame ( First). For settings of the start and end frames, refer to
descriptions in "
Play Options
".
18.2 Record Options
During the waveform recording, the oscilloscope records the waveforms of the
currently enabled channel at a specified interval until you manually stops the
recording operation or the number of recorded frames has reached the set value.
NOTE
Before starting the recording operation, turn on the desired channel and adjust the waveform
display to the desired state. When starting the recording operation, you can neither enable/
disable the channel output nor adjust the waveform display.
Waveform Recording and Playing
290
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Before recording the waveforms, you can press More > Setting to select "Record" to
set the following parameters.
1. Interval
The recording interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the
recording process.
Press Interval, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the time interval between frames. The available range is from 10 ns
to 10 s.
2. Frames
The recording frames refer to the number of frames that can be recorded actually.
After starting the recording operation, the oscilloscope stops the recording
operation automatically when the number of recorded frames reaches the set
value.
Press Frames, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad to
set the number of recorded frames. The available range is from 1 to the maximum
number of frames that can be recorded currently (available in the Max Frames
menu). Press Set to Max to set the number of recorded waveform frames to the
maximum number of frames automatically.
3. Max Frames
The menu shows the maximum number of frames that can be recorded currently.
As the capacity of the waveform memory is fixed, the more the number of points
each frame of waveform has, the less the number of waveform frames that can be
recorded. Therefore, the maximum number of recorded frames is related to the
currently selected "memory depth" (refer to "
Memory Depth
"). The current
memory depth refers to the number of waveform points per frame. Memory Depth
= Sample Rate x Horizontal Time Base x Number of Grids in the Horizontal
Direction. Therefore, the maximum number of frames of waveform recording is
also related to the "Sample Rate" and "Horizontal Time Base". This oscilloscope
supports up to 450,000 frames of real-time and ceaseless waveforms recording.
4. Beeper
Press Beeper continuously to set whether the beeper sounds when the recording
is completed.
On : the beeper sounds at the end of recording.
Off : the beeper does not sound at the end of recording.
Waveform Recording and Playing
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
291
background
18.3 Play Options
Waveform playing function can play back the waveforms currently recorded. Before
playing back the waveforms, you can press More > Setting to select "Play" to set the
following parameters.
1. Play Mode
Press Mode continuously to set the playback mode to cycle or single .
- : plays from the start frame to the end frame, then such playback
operation is repeated until you stop it manually.
- : plays from the start frame to the end frame, and then stops
automatically.
2. Playback Sequence
Press Sequence continuously to select the playback sequence to (playback
clockwise) or (playback counterclockwise).
- : plays from the start frame to the end frame.
- : plays from the end frame to the start frame.
3. Interval
The playback interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the
playing process.
Press Interval, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the time interval between frames. The available range is from 5 ms
to 10 s.
4. Start Frame
Press Start Frame, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the start frame for playing back the waveforms. The default is 1, and
the maximum value is the maximum number of recorded frames.
5. End Frame
Press End Frame, and then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the end frame of playback. The default is the number of
frames of the recorded waveforms.
Waveform Recording and Playing
292
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
19
Search and Navigation Function
The search function allows you to search for relevant events based on the search
condition that you set. The navigation function includes the recording&playing
navigation, time navigation, and event navigation.
19.1 Search Function
The search function enables you to search the Edge trigger, Pulse trigger, Runt trigger,
Slope trigger, RS232 trigger, I2C trigger, or SPI trigger. Press on the front panel
to enable the search setting menu. You can also enable the touch screen and then tap
the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to open the
function navigation. Then, tap the "Search" icon to open the search setting menu.
1. Enable or Disable the Search Function
Press Search continuously to enable or disable the search function.
2. Select the Search Type and Set the Parameters
Press Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired type (Edge,
Pulse, Runt, Slope, RS232, I2C, or Slope). You can also press Type continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
- Edge search: sets the search type to "Edge". For Edge Setup menu settings,
refer to descriptions in "
Edge Trigger
". Press Threshold to enter the threshold
setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the threshold.
- Pulse trigger search: sets the search type to "Pulse". For Pulse Setup menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "
Pulse Trigger
". Press Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold.
- Runt search: sets the search type to "Runt". For Runt Setup menu settings,
refer to descriptions in "
Runt Trigger
". Press Threshold to enter the threshold
setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set Threshold A and Threshold B.
Search and Navigation Function
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
293
background
- Slope trigger search: sets the search type to "Slope". For Slope Setup menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "
Slope Trigger
". Press Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set Threshold A and Threshold B.
- RS232 trigger search: sets the search type to "RS232". For RS232 Setup menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "
RS232 Trigger (Option)
". Press Threshold to
enter the threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold.
- I2C trigger search: sets the search type to "I2C". For I2C Setup menu settings,
refer to descriptions in "
I2C Trigger (Option)
". Press Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the SCL and SDA thresholds.
- SPI trigger search: sets the search type to "SPI". For SPI Setup menu settings,
refer to descriptions in "
SPI Trigger (Option)
". Press Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the CLK, MISO, and CS thresholds.
3. Copy Trigger
- Copy to Trigger
Press More > To Trigger to copy the selected search type settings to the same
trigger type. For example, if the current search type is "Edge", press To Trigger
to copy the edge search settings to the "
Edge Trigger
" settings.
- Copy from Trigger
Press More > From Trigger to copy the trigger settings of the selected search
type to the search settings. For example, if the current search type is "
Edge
Trigger
", press From Trigger to copy the Edge trigger settings to the "Edge"
search settings.
NOTE
If you select "From Trigger", you need to set the search type first, and then copy the
trigger type settings from the trigger menu.
4. Open or Close the Mark Table
Search and Navigation Function
294
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press MarkTable continuously to enable or disable the display of the mark table.
The mark table is shown as below. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the
icon at the right-upper corner of the table to close it.
5. Navigation
Press Navigation, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the event No. to navigate the event. You can also use the
navigation combination keys to make navigations at a step of 1. For details, refer
to descriptions in "
Navigation Function
".
6.
Save
You can save the event mark data to the internal memory or external USB storage
device in "*.csv" format.
Press
More > Save events to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to
descriptions in "
Store and Load
" to save the event mark data to the internal or
external memory.
NOTE
This series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB storage device of FAT32
format.
19.2 Navigation Function
The navigation function includes the recording&playing navigation, time navigation,
and event navigation. In the horizontal control area (Horizontal) on the front panel,
the navigation combination keys are shown as follow:
Search and Navigation Function
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
295
background
Recoding&Playing Navigation
When you enable the waveform recording function and complete the waveform
recording operation, press the navigation combination keys to play the recorded
waveforms. Press to play the recorded waveforms in reverse order; press
to play the recorded waveforms in normal order; press to stop playing.
Time Navigation
After the data acquisition stops, use the navigation combination keys to play the
captured data waveforms in a fast and continuous way. Press
to play the
previous recorded waveforms; press to play the next recorded waveforms;
press to stop playing. Besides, press or repeatedly can accelerate the
playing of the waveforms, so that you can quickly locate the acquired data
waveforms.
NOTE
The time navigation function is only available when the time base mode is "YT" and the
instrument stays in "STOP" status.
Event Navigation
When you enable the navigation function and complete the event search, you can use
the navigation combination keys to quickly navigate the specific event in the event
mark table. Press to navigate to the previous event (the serial number in the mark
table decreases); press to navigate to the next event (the serial number in the
mark table increases); the key is disabled in the event navigation.
Search and Navigation Function
296
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
20
Display Control
In the "display" setting menu, you can set the parameters such as the waveform
display type, persistence time, intensity, grid type, grid brightness, and etc.
20.1 To Select the Display Type
Press to enter the display control setting menu. Press Type continuously to set
the waveform display mode to "Vector" or "Dots".
Vector: the sample points are connected by lines and displayed. In most cases,
this mode can provide the most vivid waveform for you to view the steep edge
of the waveform (such as square waveform).
Dots: the sample points are displayed directly. You can directly view each sample
point and use the cursor to measure the X Value and Y values of the sample
point.
Vector Display
Dots Display
20.2 To Set the Persistence Time
Press Persis.Time, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the persistence time
for the oscilloscope and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Persis.Time continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available values
are Min, specific values (i.g. 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s), and Infinite.
In the following part, a frequency sweep signal of the sine waveform is used to show
the waveform effects in different persistence times.
1. Min
Enables you to view waveform changing in high refresh rate.
2. Specific Values
Display Control
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
297
background
Enables to view glitches that change relatively slowly or glitches with lower
occurrence probability. The persistence time can be set to 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms,
1 s, 2 s, 5 s, or 10 s.
3. Infinite
In this mode, the oscilloscope displays the waveform newly acquired without
clearing the waveforms acquired formerly. The waveforms acquired formerly will
be displayed in relatively low-brightness color and the newly acquired waveforms
will be displayed in normal brightness and color. Infinite persistence can be used
to measure noise and jitter and to capture incidental events.
20.3 To Set the Waveform Intensity
Press Intensity, then rotate the multifunction knob at a small step value or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the waveform intensity. Note that in the non-menu
operation mode, you can also rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
waveform intensity of the channel. The default is 50%, and the range available is from
1% to 100%.
20.4 To Set the Screen Grid
Press Grid, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the grid type and then press
down the knob to select it. You can also press Grid continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. You can select FULL, HALF, NONE, or IRE.
FULL: turns the background grid and coordinate on.
HALF: turns the background grid off.
NONE: turns the background grid and coordinate off.
IRE: only available for testing the video signal (i.g. the trigger type is set to
"Video" trigger, and the vertical scale is set to 140 mV).
When "IRE" is selected, the screen displays the vertical graticule in IRE and marks
it at the left side of the screen. Its range is from -40 IRE to +100 IRE. Meanwhile,
0.35 V and 0.7 V levels are displayed at the right side of the screen, as shown in
the following figure.
Display Control
298
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
20.5 To Set the Grid Brightness
Press Brightness, then rotate the multifunction knob at a small step value or the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the grid brightness. The default is 20%, and the range
available is from 1% to 100%.
20.6 Show Scale
Press Show Scale continuously to enable or disable the scale display on the screen.
By default, it is OFF.
NOTE
When the digital channel is enabled, the scale in the vertical direction is hidden automatically.
20.7 Color Grade
Press More > Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
waveforms on the screen. By default, it is OFF. When enabled, different colors are
displayed on the screen to indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition
probability.
20.8 Waveform Freeze
Press More > Waveform Freeze to enable or disable waveform freeze function.
When enabled, the oscilloscope displays the waveform after multiple sampling and
Display Control
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
299
background
superposition when sampling is stopped by pressing the front-panel key. If
disabled, the last triggered waveform is displayed.
Display Control
300
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
21
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator
(Option)
With an optional configuration of built-in dual-channel, 25 MHz Function/Arbitrary
Waveform Generator, this series integrates the Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator and the oscilloscope into one, thus providing great convenience for
engineers who need to use the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator and
oscilloscope at the same time. This chapter introduces how to use the built-in
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator option. As the functions and setting methods
of the two channels of the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator are the same, this
chapter takes GI as an example to illustrate.
21.1 To Output Basic Waveforms
Press on the front panel or enable the touch screen to tap the GI label at the
bottom of the screen to enable/disable the output of the [GI] connector on the front
panel. Then the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator setting menu is displayed.
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator can output a variety of basic
waveforms, including Sine, Square, Ramp, Pulse, DC, Noise, Sinc, Exp.Rise, Exp.Fall,
ECG, Gauss, Lorentz, Haversine, and Arb.
21.1.1 To Output Sine
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Sine" and then press down
the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the Sine
waveform.
Set the Frequency or Period
First press Frequency or Period, rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Frequency" or "Period". You can also press Frequency or Period continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the frequency or period of the current signal.
Different waveforms have different frequency or period (reciprocal of the
frequency) ranges.
Sine: 100 mHz to 25 MHz
Square: 100 mHz to 15 MHz
Ramp: 100 mHz to 100 kHz
Pulse: 100 mHz to 1 MHz
DC and Noise: no frequency parameter
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
301
background
Set the Amplitude or High Level
First press Amplitude or High Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Amplitude" or "High Level". You can also press Amplitude or High Level
continuously to select it. Enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the amplitude
or high level of the current signal. Note that if you select "Amplitude" for this
menu, then the menu below Amplitude is automatically turns out to be "Offset";
if you select "High Level" for this menu, then the menu below High Level is
automatically turns out to be "Low Level". When the impedance is set to HighZ,
its range is from 20 mVpp to 5 Vpp; when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, its range
is from 10 mVpp to 2.5 Vpp.
Set the Offset or Low Level
First press Offset or Low Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Offset" or "Low Level". You can also press Offset or Low Level continuously to
select it. Enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the multifunction knob or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the offset or low level of the current
signal. When the impedance is HighZ, its range is from (-2.5 V + the current
amplitude/2) to (2.5 V - the current amplitude/2); when the impedance is set to
50 Ω, its range is from (-1.25 V + the current amplitude/2) to 1.25 V - the current
amplitude/2).
Set the Start Phase
Press Start Phase, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the start phase of the current signal. Its available range is from 0°
to 360°.
Align Phase
Pressing Align Phase will re-configure the two channels to output according to
the preset frequency and phase. For two signals whose frequencies are the same
or in multiple relationship, this operation can align their phases. Use the
oscilloscope to acquire the waveforms of the two channels and stably display the
waveforms. After switching the channel status, the phase deviation between the
two waveforms is changed. At this time, press Align Phase, then the phase
deviation shown on the oscilloscope will restore to the current phase deviation
between the two waveforms automatically.
Set Other Parameters
Press Settings to enter the other parameter setting menu. You can set the
parameters such as modulation, sweep, burst, and impedance.
- Modulation, sweep, and burst
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
302
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
For details about modulation, sweep, and burst, refer to descriptions in
"
Modulation
", "
Sweep
", and "
Burst
".
NOTE
When "Pulse", "DC", or "Noise" is selected under
Wave, this menu is not available.
- Set the impedance
Press
Impedance continuously to set the output impedance of the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator. It you can be set to "HighZ" or
"50Ω".
21.1.2 To Output Square
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Square" and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Square waveform. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
To Output Sine
". The
duty cycle of the square waveform is a fixed value 50%.
21.1.3 To Output Ramp
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Ramp", and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the
ramp waveform. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
To Output Sine
". This
section only introduces "Symmetry".
SymmetrySymmetry is defined as the percentage that the rising period of ramp takes
up in the whole period (as shown in the figure below).
Figure 21.1 Symmetry Definition
Press Settings > Symmetry, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the symmetry of the ramp waveform. The settable range is
from 1% to 100%.
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
303
background
21.1.4 To Output Pulse
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Pulse" and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Pulse. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "
To Output Sine
". This section only
introduces "Duty Cycle".
Duty Cycle is defined as the percentage that the high level takes up in the whole
pulse period.
Figure 21.2 Duty Cycle Definition
Press Settings > Duty Cycle, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-
up numeric keypad to set the duty cycle of the current signal. Its settable range is
from 10% to 90%.
21.1.5 To Output DC
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "DC" and then press down
the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the offset and impedance of the DC
signal.
Set the Offset
Press Offset, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the offset of the current signal. When the current impedance is set
to HighZ, the settable range is from -2.5 V to +2.5 V; when the impedance is set
to 50 Ω, the settable range is from -1.25 V to +1.25 V.
Set the impedance
Press
Impedance continuously to set the output impedance of the Function/
Arbitrary Waveform Generator. It can be set to "HighZ" or "50Ω".
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
304
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
21.1.6 To Output Noise
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Noise" and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the Amplitude/High
Level, Offset/Low Level, and Impedance of the Noise signal.
1. Set the Amplitude or High Level
First press Amplitude or High Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Amplitude" or "High Level". You can also press Amplitude or High Level
continuously to select it. Enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the amplitude or
high level of the current signal. Note that if you select "Amplitude" for this menu,
then the menu below Amplitude is automatically turns out to be "Offset"; if you
select "High Level" for this menu, then the menu below High Level is automatically
turns out to be "Low Level".
2. Set the Offset or Low Level
First press Offset or Low Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Offset" or "Low Level". You can also press Offset or Low Level continuously to
select it. Enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the multifunction knob or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the offset or low level of the current signal.
3. Set the Impedance
Press Impedance continuously to set the output impedance of the Function/
Arbitrary Waveform Generator. It can be set to "HighZ" or "50Ω".
21.1.7 Sinc
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Sinc" and then press down
the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the Sinc
waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in
"
To Output Sine
".
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
305
background
Figure 21.3 Sinc
21.1.8 Exp.Rise
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Exp.Rise" and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Exp.Rise waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
To Output Sine
".
Figure 21.4 Exp.Rise
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
306
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
21.1.9 Exp.Fall
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Exp.Fall" and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Exp.Fall waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
To Output Sine
".
Figure 21.5 Exp.Fall
21.1.10 ECG
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "ECG" and then press down
the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the ECG
waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in
"
To Output Sine
".
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
307
background
Figure 21.6 ECG
21.1.11 Gauss
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Gauss" and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Gauss waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
To Output Sine
".
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
308
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 21.7 Gauss
21.1.12 Lorentz
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Lorentz", and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Lorentz waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
To Output Sine
".
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
309
background
Figure 21.8 Lorentz
21.1.13 Haversine
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Haversine" and then press
down the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Haversine waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "
To Output Sine
".
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
310
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 21.9 Haversine
21.2 To Output the Arbitrary Waveform
This series oscilloscope allows you to define the arbitrary waveform and save it to the
internal or external memory. The user-defined waveform can contain 2 to 16,384 data
points (i.g. 2 pts to 16 kpts).
Press Wave, then use the multifunction knob to select "Arb", and then press down
the knob to select the waveform. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the arbitrary
waveform.
21.2.1 To Load the Channel and Waveform
1. Load the Channel
Press Load from CH to enter the channel loading menu. You can set the channel
signal required to be loaded.
- Channel selection
Press Channel and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
channel (CH1-CH4), and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Channel continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
- Set the waveform range
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
311
background
Press Region continuously to select to load the waveforms in the "Cursor" or
"Screen" region. When "Cursor" is selected, press Cursor A or Cursor B and
rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the positions of the two cursors
respectively; or press Cursor AB and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust
the positions of cursors A at the same time to determine the waveform range.
- Load
Press Load to load the set channel signal.
2. Load the Waveform
Press Load Stored to enter the waveform loading interface. You can select the
stored waveforms from the internal memory or the external memory. The
waveform file is suffixed with "*.arb". Then, press Load to load the selected
waveform. For details, refer to descriptions in "
Store and Load
".
21.2.2 To Create the Waveforms
You can create arbitrary waveforms according to your needs. Press Create to enter
the waveform creation menu. Meanwhile, the waveform editor is displayed on the
screen.
Set the frequency or period
First press Frequency or Period, rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Frequency" or "Period". You can also press Frequency or Period continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the frequency or period of the current signal.
Set the amplitude or high level
First press Amplitude or High Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Amplitude" or "High Level". You can also press Amplitude or High Level
continuously to select it. Enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the amplitude
or high level of the current signal. Note that if you select "Amplitude" for this
menu, then the menu below Amplitude is automatically turns out to be "Offset";
if you select "High Level" for this menu, then the menu below High Level is
automatically turns out to be "Low Level".
Set the offset or low level
First press Offset or Low Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Offset" or "Low Level". You can also press Offset or Low Level continuously to
select it. Enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the multifunction knob or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the offset or low level of the current
signal.
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
312
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Set the initial points
The initial number of points indicates the number of editable points. By default,
the number of editable points of arbitrary waveforms created can be preset to 2.
Point 1 is fixed at 0 s and Point 2 is fixed at the middle of the period. Press Init
Points, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad to set
the number of editable points for the arbitrary waveform. The arbitrary
waveform can contain up to 16,384 (16 kpts) points.
Linear interpolation
Press Linear Interp continuously to enable or disable the linear interpolation
between the defined points of the waveform.
- ON: the waveform editor connects two points using a straight line.
- OFF: the waveform editor will keep a constant voltage level between two
points and create a ladder-like waveform.
Edit points
Press Edit Points to enter the point editing menu. You can specify a voltage
value for each waveform point to define the waveforms.
- Current Point
Press PointX, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to select the points to be edited. The available range is from 1 to
the number of initial points.
- Voltage
Press Voltage, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the voltage value of the current point. Its available range is
from -2.5 V to +2.5 V.
- Insert
Press Insert to insert a new editable point between the current point and
the next point. The number of initial points adds 1 automatically. You can
press Insert continuously to increase the editable points gradually.
- Delete
Press Delete to delete the current point from the waveform, and connect
the remaining points using the current interpolation mode.
NOTE
- Zoom
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
313
background
Press Zoom continuously to enable or disable the zoom function of
horizontal time base.
- Apply
Press Apply to apply the current settings for the currently edited arbitrary
waveforms and output the edited waveforms.
Save the arbitrary waveform
Press Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in "
Store
and Load
" to save the currently edited waveform file to the internal or external
memory in ".arb" format (you can overwrite the original file or save the currently
edited waveform).
21.2.3 To Edit the Waveforms
You can edit the waveforms in the current volatile memory. Press Edit to enter the
waveform editing menu.
Set the frequency or period
First press Frequency or Period, rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Frequency" or "Period". You can also press Frequency or Period continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the frequency or period of the current signal.
Set the amplitude or high level
First press Amplitude or High Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Amplitude" or "High Level". You can also press Amplitude or High Level
continuously to select it. Enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the amplitude
or high level of the current signal. Note that if you select "Amplitude" for this
menu, then the menu below Amplitude is automatically turns out to be "Offset";
if you select "High Level" for this menu, then the menu below High Level is
automatically turns out to be "Low Level".
Set the offset or low level
First press Offset or Low Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Offset" or "Low Level". You can also press Offset or Low Level continuously to
select it. Enable the touch screen to select it. Rotate the multifunction knob or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the offset or low level of the current
signal.
Linear interpolation
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
314
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press Linear Interp continuously to enable or disable the linear interpolation
between the defined points of the waveform.
- ON: the waveform editor connects two points using a straight line.
- OFF: disables the linear interpolation. The waveform editor will keep a
constant voltage level between two points and create a ladder-like
waveform.
Edit points
Press Edit Points to enter the point editing menu. You can specify a voltage
value for each waveform point to define the waveforms.
- Current Point
Press PointX, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to select the points to be edited. The available range is from 1 to
the number of initial points.
- Voltage
Press Voltage, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the voltage value of the current point. Its available range is
from -2.5 V to +2.5 V.
- Insert
Press Insert to insert a new editable point between the current point and
the next point. The number of initial points adds 1 automatically. You can
press Insert continuously to increase the editable points gradually.
- Delete
Press Delete to delete the current point from the waveform, and connect
the remaining points using the current interpolation mode.
NOTE
- Zoom
Press Zoom continuously to enable or disable the zoom function of
horizontal time base.
- Apply
Press Apply to apply the current settings for the currently edited arbitrary
waveforms and output the edited waveforms.
Save the arbitrary waveform
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
315
background
Press Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in "
Store
and Load
" to save the currently edited waveform file to the internal or external
memory in ".arb" format (you can overwrite the original file or save the currently
edited waveform).
21.3 Modulation
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator supports amplitude modulation
(AM), frequency modulation (FM), and frequency-shift keying modulation (FSK). A
modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform. The
carrier waveform is the waveform output from the Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator, and the modulating signal can be the built-in sine, square, triangle
waveform, or noise signal.
Press Settings > Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "Modulation"
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
Press Type, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired modulation type,
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The available modulation types include AM, FM,
and FSK.
21.3.1 AM
AM (Amplitude Modulation), namely the amplitude of the carrier waveform changes
with that of the modulating waveform, as shown in the figure below.
Modulating Signal
Carrier Signal
Modulated Waveform
Figure 21.10 AM
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
316
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
1. Select the Modulating Waveform
Press Waveform, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
modulating waveform, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Waveform continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
modulating waveforms include sine, square, triangle waveform, and noise.
2. Set the Modulation Frequency
Press Frequency, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available range
is from 1 Hz to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Modulation Depth
The modulation depth refers to the strength of the AM and is expressed in
percentage. Press AM Depth, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the modulation depth of the modulating waveform.
The available range is from 0% to 120%. When it is set to 0%, the output amplitude
is half of the carrier amplitude. When it is set to 100%, the output amplitude
equals the carrier amplitude. When it is set to a value greater than 100%, envelop
distortion will occur which must be avoided in actual circuit; at this point, the
output of the instrument will not exceed 2.5 Vpp (on the 50 Ω load).
21.3.2 FM
FM (Frequency Modulation), namely the frequency of the carrier waveform changes
with that of the modulating waveform, as shown in the figure below.
Modulating Signal
Carrier Signal
Modulated Waveform
Figure 21.11 FM
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
317
background
1. Select the Modulating Waveform
Press Waveform, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
modulating waveform, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Waveform continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
modulating waveforms include sine, square, triangle waveform, and noise.
2. Set the Modulation Frequency
Press Frequency, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available range
is from 1 Hz to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Frequency Deviation
Press Deviation, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric keypad
to set the frequency deviation of modulating waveform from the carrier frequency.
The settable frequency range is from 1 Hz to to the current frequency of the carrier
waveform.
21.3.3 FSK
FSK (Frequency-shift Keying) is a modulation method that uses the digital signal to
control the carrier frequency changes. It is one of the methods that have been early
used in information transmission. Its advantages lie in good performance in anti-
noise and anti-attenuation, and it has been widely used in in low and medium rate of
data transmission.
1. Set the Modulation Polarity
Press Polarity continuously to select "Positive" or "Negative" of the modulating
waveform to control the frequency output.
2. Set the Modulating Rate
Press FSK Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available range is from 1
Hz to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Hopping Frequency
Hopping frequency indicates the frequency of the modulating waveform. The
range of the hopping frequency is from 100 mHz to the maximum frequency of
the carrier waveform. By default, it is 10 kHz. Press Hop Freq, then rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the hopping
frequency.
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
318
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
21.4 Sweep
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator supports the sweep function. In
the sweep mode, the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs from the start
frequency to the end frequency at a specified sweep time. It supports three sweep
modes: Linear, Log, and Step. You are allowed to set the the parameters such as Start
Keep, End Keep, and Return Time. Internal and Manual trigger sources are supported.
The sweep output is available for Sine, Square, Ramp, and Arb waveforms (DC
excluded).
Press Settings > Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "Sweep" and
then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type continuously or enable
the touch screen to select it.
1. Sets the Sweep Type
Press Sweep Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
sweep type, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Sweep
Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available sweep
types include Linear, Log, and Step.
- Linear: the frequency of the signal changes linearly.
- Log: the frequency of the signal changes in log form.
- Step: the frequency of the signal changes with ladder-like step.
2. Sweep Settings
Press Settings to enter the sweep setting menu.
- Set start frequency and end frequency
Start frequency and end frequency indicate the upper and lower limits of the
sweep frequency. Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator always sweeps from
the start frequency to the end frequency, and then returns back to the start
frequency.
- When start frequency is smaller than the end frequency, the Function/
Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from low frequency to high frequency.
- When start frequency is greater than the end frequency, the Function/
Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from high frequency to low frequency.
- When start frequency is equal to the end frequency, the Function/Arbitrary
Waveform Generator outputs at a fixed frequency.
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
319
background
Press Start Freq, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the start frequency. Press End Freq, then rotate the
multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the end
frequency. By default, the start frequency is 100 Hz, and the end frequency is
1 kHz. The ranges of start frequency and end frequency for different sweep
waveforms are different. The generator will restart to sweep and output from
the specified "Start Frequency" after "Start Frequency" or "End Freq" is
modified.
- Start Keep
Start keep indicates the time that the output signal keeps outputting at the
"Start Freq" after the sweep starts. After the start keep time expires, the
generator will continue outputting with varied frequencies according to the
current sweep type.
Press Start Keep, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the start keep time. The default is 0 s, and the range is
from 0 s to 500 s.
- End Keep
End Keep indicates the time that the output signal continues outputting at the
"End Freq" after the generator sweeps from "Start Freq" to "End Freq".
Press End Keep, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the end keep time. The default is 0 s, and the range is
from 0 s to 500 s.
- Set the step
When the sweep type is set to "Step", this menu is enabled and can be settable.
Press Step number, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the step value. By default, it is 2. Its available range is from 2 to
1,000.
- Set the trigger source
The trigger sources of the sweep can be Internal or Manual. The generator will
generate a sweep output when a trigger signal is received, and then it waits for
the next trigger signal.
Press
Trig Source and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
trigger source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Trig Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
trigger sources include Internal or Manual.
- Internal: The Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs continuous
sweep waveform.
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
320
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- Manual: when you press Manual Trig one time, one sweep is immediately
launched for the corresponding channel.
3. Set the Sweep Time
Press Sweep Time, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the sweep time. By default, it is 1 s. Its available range is
from 1 ms to 500 s. The generator will restart to sweep and output from the
specified "Start Frequency" after the sweep time is modified.
4. Set the Return Time
Return time indicates the time that the output signal restores from "End Freq" to
"Start Freq" after the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from "Start
Freq" to "End Freq" and till the "End Keep" time expires.
Press Return Time, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the return time. By default, it is 0 s. Its available range is
from 0 s to 500 s.
21.5 Burst
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of this series oscilloscope
supports outputting the burst waveforms with a specified number of cycles. It
supports using internal and manual trigger sources to control the output of the burst
waveforms. Two burst types are supported: N Cycle and Infinite.
Press Settings > Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "Burst", and
then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type continuously or enable
the touch screen to select it.
1. Set the Burst Type
Press Burst Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired burst
type, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Burst Type
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available burst types
include N Cycle and Infinite.
- N Cycle: outputs the burst waveforms with a specified number of cycles once
receiving the trigger signal.
- Infinite: sets the number of cycles to Infinite. It outputs continuous waveforms
once receiving the trigger signal.
2. Set the Number of Cycles
When the burst type is set to "N Cycle", you need to set the number of cycles.
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
321
background
Press Cycles, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the cycle count. For the Infinite burst type, the Cycles menu is
disabled and grayed out.
3. Set the Burst Delay
Burst delay indicates the time from when receiving the trigger signal to starting to
output N Cycle of bursts or Infinite burst.
Press Delay, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the burst delay. The setting range of the delay time is related to the
burst cycle count.
4. Burst Setting
Press Settings to enter the burst setting menu.
- Set the trigger source
The trigger sources of the burst can be Internal or Manual. The generator will
generate a burst output when a trigger signal is received, and then it waits for
the next trigger signal.
Press Trig Source and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
trigger source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Trig Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
trigger sources include Internal and Manual. For the Infinite burst type, the Trig
Source menu is disabled and grayed out. You can only perform the manual
trigger.
- Internal: The Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs continuous N
cycle.
- Manual: when you press Manual Trig one time, one burst output is
immediately launched for the corresponding channel. For the Infinite burst
type, the Cycles menu is disabled and grayed out.
- Set the burst period
It is defined as the time from the beginning of one burst to that of another
burst.
Press Burst Period, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the burst period. The setting range is from 2 ms to 500 s.
By default, it is 10 ms.
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
322
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
22
Store and Load
You can save the current setups, waveforms, screen image, and parameters of the
oscilloscope to the internal memory or external USB storage device (such as USB
storage device) in various formats and load the stored setups or waveforms when
needed.
You can also copy, delete, or rename the specified type of file from the internal
memory or external USB storage device via the disk management menu.
NOTE
This series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB storage device of FAT32 format.
22.1 Storage System
Press on the front panel to enter the store and load setting interface. This
oscilloscope provides three USB HOST interfaces on the front panel and one USB
HOST interface on the rear panel, which can all be connected to the USB storage
device for external storage. The USB storage devices connected are marked as
"Removable USB Disk (D)", "Removable USB Disk (E)", "Removable USB Disk (F)",
"Removable USB Disk (G)", and etc.
22.2 Storage Type
The file types for storage include image, waveform, and setups. The storage
descriptions of each type are as follows.
1. Image
Press Save Image > Format, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select
the image type. You can also press Format continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. Save the screen image to the internal or external memory in
".png", ".bmp", ".jpg", or ".tif" format.
After selecting this type:
- Press File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input, refer to
descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
". Press > More > Auto Name to select
"ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If the filename that you
input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt message will be displayed,
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
323
background
reminding you that the existing file will be overwritten and asking you whether
to continue or not.
- Press Invert to enable or disable the invert function.
- Press Color to select the desired storage color. It can be set to "Gray" or
"Color".
- Press NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions , in "
To Create a Folder
".
- Press Window to enable or disable the display of the disk management
interface.
- Press Save to save the set image file. Press > More > Header to select
"ON" or "OFF". If you select "ON", the instrument model, firmware version
number, serial number, and the image creation date will be displayed in the
header of the image when you save the image file.
TIP
After a USB storage device (FAT32, Flash type) is connected, press on the front panel
to save the file to the internal or external USB storage device. By default, it is saved to
the external storage device.
2. WavePress
Save Wave to enter the waveform storage setting interface. Save the
main setting information (e.g. "On/Off" state of the channel, vertical scale, and
horizontal time base) and waveform data of all enabled channels (analog channel
and digital channel) to the internal or external memory.
After selecting this type:
- Press Data Source to select "Screen" or "Memory".
- Press Format to select waveform storage, such as "*.bin", "*.cvs", and "*.wfm"
(when "Memory" is selected under Data Source).
- Press File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input, refer to
descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
". Press > More > Auto Name to select
Store and Load
324
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
"ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If the filename that you
input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt message will be displayed,
reminding you that the existing file will be overwritten and asking you whether
to continue or not.
- Press Channel, then the available storage channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-
D15. Only when you select "Memory" under Data Source and the format is
"*.bin" or "*.cvs", can you set the storage channel.
- Press NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions , in "
To Create a Folder
".
- Press Save to save the set waveform file.
- Press More > Window to enable or disable the display of the disk management
interface.
- Press More > Time information to enable or disable the display of the time
information in the waveform data. If enabled, the time information for the
waveform data will be displayed. If disabled, the time information for the
waveform data will not be displayed.
3. SetupPress Save Setup to enter the setup setting interface.
Save the settings of the oscilloscope to the internal or external memory in "*.stp"
format. When loading, the stored settings can be recalled.
After selecting this type:
- Press File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input, refer to
descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
". Press > More > Auto Name to select
"ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If the filename that you
input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt message will be displayed,
reminding you that the existing file will be overwritten and asking you whether
to continue or not.
- Press NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions , in "
To Create a Folder
".
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
325
background
- Press Window to enable or disable the display of the disk management
interface.
- Press Save to save the set setup file.
22.2.1 Binary Data Format (.bin)
Binary data format stores waveform data in binary format and provides data headers
that describe these data. As data are displayed in binary format, its file size is much
more smaller than that in ASCII format. If several channels are enabled, then all the
displayed channels will be saved (save the first channel then save the second, and
then it goes on like this until all the displayed channels are saved).
In BIN file format, the data are displayed as follows:
CH1 Data
CH2 Data
CH3 Data
CH4 Data
Digital Channel Data
Math Waveform Data
Binary Header Format
1. File Header
There is only one file header in a binary file. The file header contains the following
information.
Cookie
Two-byte characters, RG, indicating that the file is the RIGOL
binary data file format.
Version Two-byte, indicating the file version.
File Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the file. It
includes the header.
Number of
Waveforms
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveforms that are
stored in the file.
2. Waveform Header
It is possible to store several waveforms in the file. Each stored waveform has a
waveform header. When several channels are stored, each channel can be
Store and Load
326
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
considered as a separate waveform. The waveform header contains the
information about the type of waveform data that are stored following the
waveform data header.
Header Size A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the header.
Waveform
Type
A 4-byte integer, indicating the type of the waveform stored in the
file.
0 = Unknown
1 = Normal
2 = Peak Detection
3 = Average
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Logic
Number of
Waveform
Buffers
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform buffers
required to read the data.
Number of
Points
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform points in the
data.
Count
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of hits at each time interval
during waveform recording when using a certain sample mode (e.g.
Average) to create the waveforms. For example, when averaging, a
count of 4 indicates that each waveform data point in the
waveform recording has been averaged at least 4 times. The
default value is 0.
X Display
Range
A 4-byte float, indicating the X-axis duration of the waveform that
is displayed. For time-domain waveforms,
it indicates the duration of time across the display. If the value is
zero, then no data has been acquired.
X Display
Origin
An 8-byte double, indicating the X-axis value at the left edge of the
screen. For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the time at the
start of the display. The value is treated as a double precision 64-bit
float point number. If the value is zero, then no data has been
acquired.
X Increment
An 8-byte double, indicating the duration between data points on
the X axis.
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
327
background
Header Size A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the header.
For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the time between points.
If the value is zero, then no data has been acquired.
X Origin
An 8-byte double, indicating the X-axis value of the first data point
in the data recording. For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the
time of the first point. The value is treated as a double precision 64-
bit float point number. If the value is zero, then no data has been
acquired.
X Units
A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for X values in
the acquired data.
0 = Unknown
1 = Volts (V)
2 = Seconds (s)
3 = Constant
4 = Amps (A)
5 = dB
6 = Hz
Y Units
A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for Y values in
the acquired data. The possible values are listed above under X
Units.
Date A 16-byte character array, not used
Time A 16-byte character array, not used
Frame
A 24-byte character array, indicating the model number and serial
number of the oscilloscope in the format:
MODEL#:SERIAL#.
Waveform
Label
A 16-byte character array that contains the label assigned to the
waveform.
3. Waveform Data Header
A waveform may have multiple data sets. Each waveform data set has a waveform
data header. The waveform data header consists of information about the
waveform data set. The header is stored before the data set.
Store and Load
328
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Header Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the
waveform data header.
Buffer Type
A 2-byte integer, indicating the type of the waveform data
stored in the file.
0 = Unknown
1 = Normal 32-bit float data
2 = Maximum float data
3 = Minimum float data
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Digital unsigned 8-bit character data (for digital
channels)
Bytes Per Point
A 2-byte short integer, indicating the number of bytes per
data point.
Buffer Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the size of the buffer required
to hold the data points.
22.3 Load Type
This oscilloscope provides two load types: waveform load and setup load. The
descriptions of each load type are as follows.
1. Waveform Load
Press Load Wave to load the waveforms from the internal memory or the external
USB disk. The default file type is "*.wfm" and no other options are available. Select
the file to be loaded from the memory, then press Load to load the selected file.
2. Load Setup
Press Load Setup to load the setups from the internal memory or the external USB
disk. The default file type is "*.stp", and no other options are available. Select the file
to be loaded from the memory, then press Load to load the selected file.
22.4 Internal Storage and Load
The internal memory supports the storage and load of the image file, waveform file,
setup file, reference waveform file, and pass/fail test mask file.
1.
Save the Specified Oscilloscope Setting to the Internal Memory (Take Save
Setup as an Example)
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
329
background
a. Connect a signal to the oscilloscope and obtain stable display of waveforms.
b. Press > Save Setup to enter the setup storage interface. The disk
management interface is displayed automatically. By default, "Local Disk(C)" is
selected.
c. Rotate the multifunction knob or enable the touch screen to open the
internal memory storage interface.
d. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired storage location, and
then press down the knob to open it. You can also enable the touch screen to
select the storage location. Rotate the multifunction knob and select ,
press down the knob or enable the touch screen to tap to go to the
previous location. Besides, you can also press NewFolder to create a new
storage folder. For details, refer to descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
".
e. Press File Name to name the setup file for storage. For details, refer to
descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
". Press > More > Auto Name to select
"ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If the filename that you
input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt message will be displayed,
reminding you that the existing file will be overwritten and asking you whether
to continue or not.
f. Press Save to save the setup file to the selected folder in "*stp" format.
TIP
- After saving the reference waveform, press > More > Export to enter the disk
management interface of reference waveform file storage.
- Press
> PassFail to enable the pass/fail test function. Then press Mask > Save to
enter the disk management interface of pass/fail test mask file storage.
2.
Load the Setup File from the Internal Memory (Take Load Setup as an
Example)
Store and Load
330
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
a. Press > Load Setup to enter the setup load interface. The disk
management interface is displayed automatically. By default, "Local Disk(C)" is
selected.
b. Rotate the multifunction knob or enable the touch screen to open the
internal memory storage interface.
c. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired load location, and then
press down the knob to open it. You can also enable the touch screen to select
the location. Rotate the multifunction knob and select , press down the
knob or enable the touch screen to tap to go to the previous location.
d. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the file to be loaded (the default file
type is in "*stp" format), then the Load menu is enabled. Press Load to load the
selected file. You can also enable the touch screen to operate.
TIP
- Press > More > Import to enter the disk management interface of reference
waveform file load.
- Press
> PassFail to enable the pass/fail test function. Then press Mask > Load to
enter the disk management interface of pass/fail test mask file load.
22.5 External Storage and Load
Before external storage and load, ensure that the USB disk is properly connected. The
external memory supports image save, waveform saving, setup saving, waveform
loading, and setup loading.
1. Save the Specified Type of File in the External USB Storage Device (Take
Waveform Saving as an Example)
a. Connect a signal to the oscilloscope and obtain stable display of waveforms.
b. Press > Save Wave to enter the waveform storage interface. The disk
management interface is displayed automatically.
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
331
background
c. Rotate the multifunction knob to select "Removable USB Disk (D/E/F/G...)",
press down the knob to open the external disk storage interface. You can also
enable the touch screen to select the storage location. Rotate the multifunction
knob and select , press down the knob or enable the touch screen to
tap to go to the previous location. Besides, you can also press NewFolder
to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to descriptions in "
To Create a
Folder
".
d. To set the waveform saving, refer to descriptions of "Wave" in "
Storage Type
".
e. Press Save to save the waveform file to the selected folder in the specified save
format.
2. Load the Specified Type of File from the External USB Storage Device (Take
Waveform Loading as an Example)
a. Press > Load Wave to enter the waveform loading interface. The disk
management interface is displayed automatically.
b. Rotate the multifunction knob to select "Removable USB Disk (D/E/F/G...)",
press down the knob to open the external disk storage interface. You can also
enable the touch screen to select the load location. Rotate the multifunction
knob and select , press down the knob or enable the touch screen to
tap to go to the previous location.
c. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the file to be loaded, then the Load
menu is enabled. Press Load to load the selected file. You can also enable the
touch screen to operate.
22.6 Disk Management
Press > Disk to turn on the disk management interface as shown in
Figure
22.1
. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired disk. The disk currently
Store and Load
332
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
selected is displayed in red shading. Press down the knob to open the selected
disk. You can also enable the touch screen to select the disk.
Figure 22.1 Disk Management Interface
22.6.1 To Select the File Type
Except the image storage, waveform storage, and setup storage, the oscilloscope can
also display files for advanced applications,
Press > Disk > File Type, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
file type. The default is "*.*". Under the current path, only the file whose suffix of its
file name matches that of the file type selected will be displayed in the current path.
22.6.2 To Create a Folder
Before using the external storage device, make sure that a USB storage device (FAT32
format, flash memory) is connected correctly.
In the disk management interface, rotate the multifunction knob or enable the
touch screen to select the storage location. By default, the internal memory "Local
Disk(C)" is selected. Press NewFolder to enter the interface, as shown in
Figure 22.2
.
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
333
background
Figure 22.2 Create a Folder
This oscilloscope supports Chinese/English input method. The length of folder name
is limited to 22 bytes (one Chinese character occupies two bytes). The following part
introduces how to input a folder name using Chinese/English input method.
TIP
During the name input, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired contents. Press
down the knob
to input the desired contents. You can also enable the touch screen and tap
the desired contents to select it.
English Input Method
For example, create a folder with the name "Filename".
Name Input Area
Letter Input Area
Virtual Keypad
Upper/Lower Case Switch
Input Method Switch
1. Select English Input Method
If the current input method is "En//", please go to Step 2. If the current input
method is "//En" or "/En/", rotate the multifunction knob
to select the
Store and Load
334
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
input switch key and press the knob continuously to switch to "En//". "En"
is located first and highlighted.
2. Clear the Name Input Area
If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to Step 3. If there are
characters in the "Name Input Area", rotate the multifunction knob to select the
Delete key to delete all the characters in the name input area in order.
3. Input the First Character "F"
a. If the current setting is uppercase input, please go to Step 2. If the current
setting is lowercase input, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Caps" and
press down the knob to switch to the uppercase input.
b. Rotate the multifunction knob to select "F" and press down the knob. The
character is displayed in the input area.
4. Input the Other Characters
Use the same method to input the remaining letters "ilename" by referring to Step
3. Pay attention to the upper-lower case of the letters when inputting them.
5.
Modify or Delete the Unwanted Characters that Have Been Entered
While entering a value, you can modify or delete the unwanted character if
necessary. To delete the input characters, rotate the multifunction knob
in the
virtual keypad to select the delete key . Press down the key to delete the
characters. To modify the characters that have been input, delete the unwanted
characters first and then input the new characters. If the character to be modified
is in the middle, press the delete key to delete the characters starting from the last
one to the character to be modified, then input the new character again.
If the touch screen is enabled, tap to directly move the cursor to the character
required to be modified or deleted, and then input the desired character again or
delete the unwanted character.
TIP
If characters already exist in the letter input area, when you rotate the multifunction knob
to delete the characters in the name input area, the characters in the letter input area
will be deleted first.
6. After finishing the input, rotate the multifunction knob
and press OK. The
oscilloscope will create a folder or a specified type of file with this name under the
current path.
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
335
background
Simplified Chinese (Traditional Chinese) Input Method
For example, create a file folder with the name "文件名". Note that the input method
of traditional Chinese is the same as that of the simplified Chinese.
Pinyin Input Area
Chinese Character Selecting Area
1. Select Chinese Input Method
If the current input method is "//En", please go to Step 2. If the current input
method is "En//" or "/En/", rotate the multifunction knob to select the
input switch key and press the knob continuously to switch to "//En". "" is
located first and highlighted.
2. Clear the Pinyin Input Area and Name Input AreaIf there is no character in the
"Pinyin Input Area" and "Name Input Area", please go to Step 3. If there are
characters in the "Name Input Area" and "Pinyin Input Area", rotate the
multifunction knob to select the Delete key to delete all the characters in
the name input area in order.
3. Input the first Chinese character ""
a. Input the pinyin "wen" in the "Pinyin Input Area"Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the first letter "w" in the pinyin "wen" and press down the knob to
input "w" in the "Pinyin Input Area".
Use the same method to input the remaining letters "en" in the pinyin "wen".
After finishing the input, the Chinese characters available are displayed in the
"Chinese Character Selecting Area".
Store and Load
336
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
b. Select the desired Chinese character from the "Chinese Character Selecting
Area"
Rotate the multifunction knob to select "", and press down the knob, then
"" is input in the "Name Input Area". If the Chinese character is not found in
the current page, press
to go to the next page until you find the desired
character.
4. Input the Other Characters
Refer to Step 3 and use the same method to input the remaining Chinese
characters "件名" in sequence.
5.
Modify or delete the unwanted characters that have been entered
When inputting the name, you can modify or delete the filename characters input
in the "Name Input Area" as well as delete the pinyin characters input in the
"Pinyin Input Area". To delete the input characters, rotate the multifunction knob
in the virtual keypad to select the delete key . Press down the key to delete
the characters. To modify the characters that have been input, delete the unwanted
characters first and then input the new characters. If the character to be modified
is in the middle, press the delete key to delete the characters starting from the last
one to the character to be modified, then input the new character again.
If the touch screen is enabled, tap to directly move the cursor to the character
required to be modified or deleted, and then input the desired character again or
delete the unwanted character.
TIP
If characters already exist in the Pinyin input area, when you rotate the multifunction knob
to delete the characters in the name input area, the characters in the Pinyin input area
will be deleted first.
6. After finishing the input, rotate the multifunction knob
and press OK. The
oscilloscope will create a folder or a specified type of file with this name under the
current path.
22.6.3 To Delete a File or Folder
1. Delete a File or Folder from the Internal Memory
a. Press > Disk, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the internal
memory "Local Disk(C)". Press down the knob to open it.
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
337
background
b. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the file or the folder to be deleted.
c. Press Delete, and then a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Tap to select
"Yes" to delete the file or folder.
2. Delete a File or Folder from the External Memory
a. Press > Disk, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the external
memory. Press down the knob to open it.
b. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the file or the folder to be deleted.
c. Press Delete, and then a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Tap to select
"Yes" to delete the file or folder.
TIP
When you delete a directory where a file or a folder exists, the directory cannot be
deleted.
The touch screen function only allows you to select the folder and open it, but you are
unable to delete the folder with the touch screen operation.
22.6.4 To Copy and Paste a File or Folder
1. Press > Disk, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the internal
memory or external memory. Press down the knob to open it.
2. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the file or folder to be copied and
pasted.
3. Press Copy to copy the selected file or folder.
4. Select the destination folder, then press Paste to paste the selected file or folder.
TIP
If the destination folder has the same file or folder that you want to paste, then a prompt
message "File or directory exists" is displayed. You are not allowed to execute the copy
and paste operation.
The touch screen function only allows you to select the folder and open it, but you are
unable to copy the folder with the touch screen operation.
Store and Load
338
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
22.6.5 To Rename a File or Folder
1. Press > Disk, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the internal
memory or external memory. Press down the knob to open it.
2. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the file to be renamed.
3. Press Rename, and then the filename input interface is displayed. For the filename
input method, refer to descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
".
TIP
The touch screen function only allows you to select the folder and open it. You are unable to
rename the folder with the touch screen operation.
22.6.6 To Clear the Internal Memory Safely
1. Press > Disk, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the internal
memory "Local Disk(C)". Press down the knob to open it.
2. Press SecurityClear, and then a prompt message for confirming security clear is
displayed.
3. Press OK to clear all the saved files from the internal disk.
22.7 Factory Settings
Press on the front panel, then a prompt message "Restore default settings?"
is displayed. Press OK or tap OK to restore the instrument to its factory default
settings, as shown in the table below.
Table 22.4 Factory Settings
Parameter Factory Settings
Horizontal
Horizontal Time Base 1 μs
Horizontal Position 0 s
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
339
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Delayed Sweep Off
Timebase Mode YT
Fine Off
Horizontal Expansion Center
Vertical
VScale 100 mV
VOffset 0 V
CH1 On
CH2 Off
CH3 Off
CH4 Off
Channel Coupling DC
BW Limit OFF
Attenuation 1X
Input Impedance 1 MΩ
Invert Off
Fine Off
Channel Unit [V]
Display Label Off
Ch-Ch Skew 0 s
Offset Cal 0 V
Acquire
Acquisition Mode Normal
Memory Depth Auto
Store and Load
340
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Anti-Aliasing Off
Trigger
Trigger Type Edge Trigger
Source Selection CH1
Edge Type Rising
Trigger Mode Auto
Trigger Coupling DC
Trigger Holdoff 8 ns
Noise Rejection Off
Display
Display Type Vector
Persistence Time Min
Intensity 50%
Grid FULL
Grid Brightness 20%
Show Scale Off
Color Grade Off
Waveform Freeze On
Screen Saver Off
Dual-channel Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (GI or GII)
[1]
GI Off
GII Off
Status Display Off
GI/GII
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
341
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Wave Sine
Output Off
Freq 1 kHz
Amplitude 500 mV
Offset 0 V
Start Phase
Setting Type Off
Impedance HighZ
Cursor
Mode Off
Manual
Select Y
Source CH1
AY 100 mV
BY -100 mV
Vertical Unit Source
Hori. Unit s
Region Main
Track
AX Source CH1
BX Source CH1
AX -1 μs
BX 1 μs
Track X
Store and Load
342
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
XY
AX -233.3 mV
BX 100 mV
AY -233.3 mV
BY -100 mV
Measure
Indicator Off
Storage
Auto Name On
Header On
Save Image
Format *.png
Invert Off
Color Color
Window On
Save Wave
Data Source Screen
Format *.csv
Window On
Save Setup
File Type *.stp
Window On
Load Wave
File Type *.wfm
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
343
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Load Setup
File Type *.stp
Disk
File Type *.*
Utility
Sound Off
PassFail
Enable Off
Source CH1
Operate Stop
Range Screen
X Mask 0.24 div
Y Mask 0.48 div
File Type for Load *.pf
File Type for Save *.pf
File Name RigolDS0
Window Show
Indicator Off
Aux Output Off
Output Event Fail
Polarity Positive
Pulse 1 μs
Err Action None
Record
Store and Load
344
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Waveform Recording OFF
Record
Play
Record
Interval 10 ns
Frames 1,000
Max Frames 9175
Beeper
Current 0
Play
Mode
Sequence
Interval 100 ms
Current 0
Jump To
First
Parameter Factory Settings
Save
Start Frame 1
System
Power On Default
Power status Switch On
AUX Out TrigOut
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
345
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Key Locker Unlocked
HDMI Output Off
HDMI Resolution 1280x720
SelfCal
Window Open
Auto Config
Peak to Peak Off
CH All
Overlay Off
Coupling Off
Printer
Copies 1
Paper Size A4
Ink Saver On
Printer HP/Laserjet
Email
Attachment Screen
Quick Settings
Operation Save Image
Format *.png
Invert Off
Color Color
Math
Invert Off
Store and Load
346
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Expand GND
Display Label Off
Library ADD
Label Editing ADD
A+B
Operation Off
SourceA CH1
SourceB CH1
Offset 0 V
Scale 500 mV
A-B
Operation Off
SourceA CH1
SourceB CH1
Offset 0 V
Scale 500 mV
A×B
Operation Off
SourceA CH1
SourceB CH1
Offset 0 U
Scale 500 mU
A÷B
Operation Off
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
347
background
Parameter Factory Settings
SourceA CH1
SourceB CH1
Offset 0 U
Scale 500 mU
FFT
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 dBV
Scale 2 dBV
Unit dBm/dBV
X Start-End
Start Freq 0 Hz
Stop Freq 10 MHz
Window Function Hanning
Display Label Off
Peak Search Off
Peak Number 5
Threshold 5.5 dB
Excursion 1.8 dB
Table Order Amp Order
A&&B
Operation Off
SourceA CH1
SourceB CH1
Store and Load
348
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Wave Size Medium
Thre.CH1 0 V
Thre.CH2 0 V
Thre.CH3 0 V
Thre.CH4 0 V
Sensitivity 0.3 Div
A||B
Operation Off
SourceA CH1
SourceB CH1
Wave Size Medium
Thre.CH1 0 V
Thre.CH2 0 V
Thre.CH3 0 V
Thre.CH4 0 V
Sensitivity 0.3 Div
A^B
Operation Off
SourceA CH1
SourceB CH1
Wave Size Medium
Thre.CH1 0 V
Thre.CH2 0 V
Thre.CH3 0 V
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
349
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Thre.CH4 0 V
Sensitivity 0.3 Div
!A
Operation Off
SourceA CH1
Wave Size Medium
Thre.CH1 0 V
Thre.CH2 0 V
Thre.CH3 0 V
Thre.CH4 0 V
Sensitivity 0.3 Div
Intg
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 v*s
Scale 500 mv*s
Bias 0
Invert Off
Diff
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 v/s
Scale 500 mv/s
Smooth 5
Store and Load
350
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Invert Off
Sqrt
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 U
Scale 500 mU
Invert Off
Lg
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 U
Scale 500 mU
Invert Off
Ln
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 U
Scale 500 mU
Invert Off
Exp
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 U
Scale 500 mU
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
351
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Invert Off
Abs
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 U
Scale 500 mV
Invert Off
Low Pass
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 V
Scale 500 mV
ωc 50 MHz
Invert Off
High Pass
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 V
Scale 500 mV
ωc 50 MHz
Invert Off
Band Pass
Operation Off
Source CH1
Store and Load
352
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Offset 0 V
Scale 500 mV
ωc1 50 MHz
ωc2 100 MHz
Invert Off
Band Stop
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 V
Scale 500 mV
ωc1 50 MHz
ωc2 100 MHz
Invert Off
AX+B
Operation Off
Source CH1
Offset 0 V
Scale 500 mV
A 1
B 0
Invert Off
Average
Operation Off
Source CH1
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
353
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Avg Number 2
Offset 0 V
Scale 500 mV
Invert Off
Logic Analyzer (LA)
Select None
D7-D0 Off
D15-D8 Off
Wave Size Medium
Arrange D15-D0
Threshold
D7-D0 1.4 V
D15-D8 1.4 V
Label
Display Off
Select D0
Label D0
Decode
Bus Type Parallel
Bus Status Off
Format Hex
Label On
Event Table Off
Store and Load
354
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Noise Rejection Off
CLK Off
RS232
Bus Status Off
Baud 9.6 kbps
Tx CH1
Threshold 0 V
Rx OFF
Polarity
Endian LSB
Data 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None
Package Off
Separator 0(NUT)
I2C
Bus Status Off
CLK CH1
SCL Thre 0 V
SDA CH2
SDA Thre 0 V
Exchange SCL/SDA
R/W Without
SPI
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
355
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Bus Status Off
Mode Timeout
Timeout 1 μs
CLK CH1
Threshold 0 V
Edge Type Rising
MISO CH2
Threshold 0 V
MOSI OFF
Polarity
Width 8
Endian MSB
LIN
Bus Status Off
Source CH1
Threshold 0 V
Baud Rate 19.2 kbps
Parity Without
Version Both
CAN
Bus Status Off
Source CH1
Threshold 0 V
Store and Load
356
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Signal CAN_L
Baud 1 Mbps
Sample Position 50%
FlexRay
Bus Status Off
Source CH1
Threshold 0 V
Channel Selection A
Baud Rate 10 Mbps
Signal Type BP
Sample Position 50%
I2S
Bus Status Off
SCLK CH1
Threshold 0 V
SCLK Edge Rising
WS CH2
Threshold 0 V
Data CH3
Threshold 0 V
Word Size 4
Receive 4
Alignment I2S
WS Low Left
Store and Load
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
357
background
Parameter Factory Settings
Endian MSB
Data Polarity
1553B
Bus Status Off
Data CH1
Threshold 0 V
Ref
Current Ref1
Source CH1
VScale 1 V
VOffset 0 V
Color Orange
Label Display OFF
Library Default
Label REF1
NOTE
[1]
: This function is only available for model installed with the MSO8000-AWG option.
Store and Load
358
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
23
System Utility Function Setting
In the system function setting menu, you can set the parameters for the remote
interface and the system-related parameters.
23.1 Remote Interface Configuration
MSO8000A series can communicate with the PC via the USB, LAN, or GPIB (requiring
to work with RIGOL's USB-GPIB adaptor) interface. Before using the remote interfaces,
configure the corresponding interface according to the introductions in the following
section.
23.1.1 LAN Configuration
Before using the LAN bus, use a network cable to connect the oscilloscope to your
local area network. The network interface of the oscilloscope is on the rear panel.
Press > IO > LAN to open the LAN setting interface, as shown in the following
figure. You can view the current network settings and configure the network
parameters.
Network Status
Current IP Config. Type
MAC Address
VISA Descriptor
IP Config. Type
Network Parameters
Web Control Info.
Figure 23.1 Network Connection Setting Interface
Network Status
Different prompts will be displayed according to the current network connection
status.
Network Config Succeeded!
Acquiring IP...
IP Conflict!
Disconnected!
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
359
background
DHCP Config Failed
Read Status Fail!
Connected!
Invalid IP
IP lost
Please wait...
IP Configuration Type
The configuration type of the IP address can be DHCP, Auto IP, or Static IP. In different
IP configuration types, the configurations for IP address and other network
parameters are different.
DHCP
Press IP Config Type, then rotate the multi-function knob or press IP Config Type
continuously to select "DHCP". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
enable the touch screen to select it. When DHPC is valid, the DHCP server in the
current network will assign the network parameters (e.g. IP address, Subnet, Gateway,
and DNS) for the oscilloscope.
Auto IP
Press IP Config Type, then rotate the multi-function knob or press IP Config Type
continuously to select "Auto IP". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
enable the touch screen to select it. In auto IP mode, the oscilloscope will get the IP
address (ranging from 169.254.0.1 to 169.254.255.254) and the subnet mask
(255.255.0.0) automatically according to the current network configuration. The "Auto
IP" works only when "DHCP" is not selected or connection is failed.
Static IP
Press
IP Config Type, then rotate the multi-function knob or press IP Config Type
continuously to select "Static IP". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
enable the touch screen to select it. Note: when this type is valid, you need to disable
DHCP and Auto IP manually. At this time, the "IP", "SubMask", "Gateway", and "DNS"
menu items are added. Thus, you can self-define the network parameters (e.g. IP
address) of the oscilloscope.
1. Set the IP Address
The format of the IP address is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first segment
(nnn) of the address is from 0 to 255 (except 127); wherein, the valid range is from
0 to 223. The range for the other three segments is from 0 to 255. You are
recommended to ask your network administrator for an IP address available.
System Utility Function Setting
360
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press IP, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Input the desired IP address
with the numeric keypad. This setting will be saved to the non-volatile memory; if
"Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the next power-
on. The oscilloscope will load the preset IP address automatically.
2. Set the Subnet Mask
The format of the subnet mask is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Wherein, the range of "nnn" is
from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a
subnet mask available.
Press SubMask, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Input the desired
subnet mask with the numeric keypad. This setting will be saved in the non-volatile
memory; if "Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the
next power-on. The oscilloscope will load the preset subnet mask automatically.
3. Set the Gateway
You can can set this parameter in Static IP mode.
The format of the gateway is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first segment
(nnn) is from 0 to 223 (except 127), and the range for the other three segments is
from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a gate
address available.
Press Gateway, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Input the desired
subnet mask with the numeric keypad. This setting will be saved in the non-volatile
memory; if "Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the
next power-on. The instrument will load the preset gateway automatically.
4. Set the DNS
You can set this parameter in Static IP mode.
The format of the DNS address is "nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn". The range for the first
segment (nnn) of the address is from 0 to 223 (except 127); and the range for the
other three segments is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network
administrator for an address available.
Press DNS, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Input the desired DNS
address with the numeric keypad. Generally, you do not need to set the DNS,
therefore this parameter setting can be ignored.
TIP
When the three IP configuration types are all turned on, the priority of the parameter
configuration from high to low is "DHCP", "Auto IP", and "Static IP".
The three IP configuration types cannot be all turned off at the same time.
Apply the Network Parameter Setting
Press Apply to validate the current network parameter setting.
MACAddress
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
361
background
For each oscilloscope, the MAC address is unique. When assigning the IP address for
the oscilloscope, the system uses the MAC address to identify the instrument.
VISA Address
Displays the VISA address currently used by the oscilloscope.
Web Control Information
Displays the user name and password for network configuration of the oscilloscope
through the LXI webpage.
TIP
Connect the oscilloscope to the local area network. Start up Ultra Sigma, and then right-click
the resource name and select "LXI-Web" to load the LXI webpage. You can also directly input
the IP address of the oscilloscope in the address bar of the PC browser to load the LXI
webpage.
23.1.2 To Set mDNS
Press mDNS continuously to enable or disable the multicast Domain Name System
(mDNS). This system is used to provide the function of DNS server for service
discovery in a small network without a DNS server.
23.1.3 To Set the Host Name
Press Host Name to input the host name. For the host name input method, refer to
relevant descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
".
23.1.4 To Set the GPIB address
Before using the GPIB interface, use the USB-GPIB interface converter (an option that
requires to be ordered separately) to extend the GPIB interface, and then use the GPIB
cable to connect the instrument to the PC.
Press > IO > GPIB, then rotate the multifunction knob directly to set the
GPIB address or use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the GPIB address. Its
settable range is from 1 to 30. By default, it is 1.
23.1.5 To Set HDMI
Sets the status and parameters of the HDMI video output interface on the rear panel.
Note that only when the HDMI interface is available, can this menu be enabled.
Press HDMI to enter the HDMI setting menu.
Press Output continuously to enable or disable the video output.
System Utility Function Setting
362
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- ON:You can connect the instrument to an external display via this interface
to better observe the waveform display clearly from the external display.
- OFF: disables the interface.
Press Resolution to set the screen resolution. The available resolution includes
640x480, 720x480, and 1280x720.
23.1.6 USB Connection
The oscilloscope can communicate with a PC via the USB DEVICE interface on the rear
panel. No parameters are required to be configured.
23.2 System-related
23.2.1 Beeper
When the beeper is enabled, you can hear the sound of the beeper when you
perform the following operations:
Press a key or a menu key on front panel
Enable the touch screen
When a prompt message is displayed
Press and then press Beeper continuously to select "ON" ( ) or "OFF" ( ). By
default, it is OFF.
23.2.2 Language
This oscilloscope supports menus in multiple languages. Both Chinese and English are
available for the display of the help information, prompt messages, and interface.
Press > Language, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
language, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Language
continuously to select the language or enable the touch screen to tap the desired
language and select it.
23.2.3 System Information
Press > System > About to view the system information of the oscilloscope,
including the manufacturer, product model and serial number, firmware etc., etc.
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
363
background
You can also view the system information of the oscilloscope in the "Help" system
menu.
23.2.4 Power On
You can set the system configuration to be recalled when the oscilloscope is powered
on again after power-off.
Press > System, and then press Power On continuously to select "Last" or
"Default". By default, it is "Default".
Last: returns to the setting of the system at last power-off.
Default: returns to the factory setting of the system.
23.2.5 Power Status
Use the power line to connect the oscilloscope to the AC power and then turn on the
power switch to power on the instrument. You can set the power status after it is
powered on.
Press > System, and then press Power status to select "Switch On" or "Switch
Off".
Switch off: after the oscilloscope is connected to power, you need to press the
Power key on the front panel to power on the instrument.
Switch On: After the the oscilloscope is connected to power, it will be powered
on immediately.
NOTE
Whatever the option you select, you still can press the Power key on the front panel to turn on
or off the instrument.
23.2.6 Aux Output
Users can set the type of the signal output from the [TRIG OUT] connector on the
rear panel.
Press > System, and then press AUX Out continuously to select "TrigOut" or
"PassFail".
TrigOut:
After this type is selected, at each trigger (hardware trigger), the oscilloscope
outputs a signal from the [TRIG OUT] connector on the rear panel that can
System Utility Function Setting
364
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
reflect the current capture rate of the oscilloscope. If this signal is connected to a
waveform display device to measure the frequency, the found measurement
result is the same as the current capture rate.
PassFail:
When this type is selected, the instrument can output a positive or negative
pulse via the [TRIG OUT] connector when a successful or failed event is
detected. Refer to descriptions in
To Set the Output Form of the Test Results
.
When you enable the Aux output, the AUX Out menu is automatically set to
"PassFail". When the AUX Out menu is set to "TrigOut", then in the pass/fail test
menu, the Aux Out function is automatically disabled.
23.2.7 Ref Clock
This oscilloscope can output the internal 10 MHz sample clock signal from the rear-
panel [10M In/Out] connector, and it can also receive the external 10 MHz clock
signal from the connector. This function can be used to synchronize multiple
oscilloscopes.
Press > System > Ref Clock, then rotate the multifunction knob to select
the desired clock type. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Ref Clock
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
OFF: disables the reference clock function.
Clock Output. The instrument outputs the internal 10 MHz clock signal from the
rear-panel [10M In/Out] connector.
Clock Input. The oscilloscope receives the external 10 MHz clock signal from the
rear-panel [10M In/Out] connector.
23.2.8 Help Menu
Press > System > Help, and then the "Help" menu is displayed on the screen.
You can also use the touch screen function , tap the navigation icon at the lower-
left corner of the touch screen to enable the function navigation. Tap the "Help" icon,
and then the "Help" menu is displayed on the screen.
Press About to view the system information of the oscilloscope.
Press Content to enter the built-in help system.
Press Option list to view the name of the installed option and other detailed
information about the option from the option list.
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
365
background
Press Option install to install the desired option. For detailed installation
procedures, refer to descriptions in "
To View the Option Information and the
Option Installation
".
Press
Online upgrade to perform online upgrading for the system software. For
the method of online upgrade, refer to "
Rear Panel Overview
".
NOTE
If you connect the oscilloscope to the network via the LAN interface, every Monday you
power on the instrument, the oscilloscope will check whether the latest version of the
upgrade software is available on the RIGOL official website (
www.rigol.com
). If yes, a red
spot appears at the upper-left corner of the Online upgrade menu, prompting you that
the latest upgrade version is available and you can perform online upgrade.
Press
Local upgrade or enable the touch screen to tap "Local upgrade", then a
dialog box "Upgrade system firmware?" is displayed. Tap OK to perform local
upgrading for the system software (required to insert the USB disk that contains
the software installation package); tap Cancel to cancel local upgrading
operation.
23.2.9 SelfCal
The self-calibration program can quickly make the oscilloscope to work in an optimal
state to get the precise measurement results. You can perform self-calibration at any
time, especially when the changes of the ambient temperature reach or above 5℃.
Make sure that the oscilloscope has been warmed up or operating for more than 30
minutes before the self-calibration.
Disconnect all the input channels, and then press > System > SelfCal, and the
self-calibration interface is displayed, as shown in the following figure.
System Utility Function Setting
366
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Figure 23.2 SelfCal
Press Start, and then the oscilloscope will start to execute the self-calibration
program.
After starting the self-calibration program, the Exit menu is no longer grayed
out and is enabled. Press Exit to cancel self-calibration operation at any time.
Press Window continuously to open or close the self-calibration information
window. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the right-
upper corner of the self-calibration information window to close it.
NOTE
During the self-calibration process, most of the keys are disabled.
23.2.10 Auto Config
You can set the parameters for the menu.
Press > More > Auto Config, and set the parameters for the key. For
detailed settings, refer to descriptions in "
Quick Measurement after AUTO
".
23.2.11 Print Setting
Connect the oscilloscope to the local area network via the network cable. This series
supports printing the whole screen to the network printer. You can connect the
oscilloscope to the printer directly via the [USB DEVICE] interface on the rear panel.
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
367
background
Then, you can set the print parameter on the oscilloscope to control the printer to
output the corresponding picture.
Press > More > Printer to enter the printer setting menu. After the printer is
properly connected, you need to set the network configurations for printing, and then
set the printer parameters.
1. Network Configuration
Press Setting to enter the network configuration menu.
- Select the printer
Press Printer, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the printer model.
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Printer continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
- Set the IP address
Press Printer IP, then rotate the multifunction knob to set each segment of
the IP address for the printer. Press down the knob to confirm the setting for
each segment of the address. At this time, the cursor moves to the next
segment automatically. You can also press Printer IP continuously to switch the
segment position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to set it. You can
also enable the touch screen to switch the address segment.
- Set the port
Press Printer Port, then directly rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
port number or use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the port number.
- Network test
Press Test to test whether the network is connected. If connected, a prompt
message "Network connected" is displayed.
- Print test page
Press Print test page to carry out the print test. The print progress is also
displayed on the screen.
2. Sets the Print Parameters
Print
After the printer parameters are set, press Print to execute the print operation.
Copies
System Utility Function Setting
368
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press Copies, then rotate the multifunction knob to set the number of copies
to be printed or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set it. The settable range is
from 1 to 99.
Paper Size
The Paper Size menu is grayed out and disabled. The paper size only supported
by the oscilloscope is A4.
Ink Saver
Press Ink Saver continuously to enable or disable the ink saver setting. If
disabled, you need to set Color. Press Color continuously to select "Gray" or
"Color".
23.2.12 Email
This oscilloscope supports sending files via emails. Press > More Email to enter
the email setting menu.
1. Set the Email Server
Press Settings to enter the email server login setting menu. The following window
is displayed. After the setting, enable the touch screen to tap OK to complete the
server login. To cancel login, tap Cancel to exit or tap the icon at the upper-
right corner of the window to exit. If you exit the server setting window, you can
press SMTP, Port, UserName, or PassWord to reopen the window.
- Set SMTP
Press SMTP to set the mail transmission protocol. For detailed settings of mail
transmission protocol, refer to descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
".
- Set the port
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
369
background
Press Port to set the protocol port with the pop-up numeric keypad. Its range is
from 1 to 65,535.
- Set the user name
Press UserName to set the user name of the server. For detailed setting
methods for the user name, refer to descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
".
- Set the password
Press PassWord to set the password of the server. For detailed setting methods
for the password, refer to descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
".
- Email test
Press Test to test whether the e-mail server is properly set.
- Restore default settingsPress Default to restore the settings of receiver and
mail settings to defaults.
2. Set the Receiver
Press Receiver to display the receiver input interface, and you can edit the email
address of the receiver. For detailed input methods of the receiver email address,
refer to descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
".
3. Upload the Attachment
Press Attachment, then rotate the multifunction knob to upload the
attachment type, and then press down the knob to select the type. You can also
press Attachment continuously to select or enable the touch screen to tap the
attachment. The available attachments include "Screen", "Setup", and "Other". If
you select "Other", you also need to press File Select to select the file to be
uploaded.
4. Send the Mail
Press Send Mail to send the edited email to the receiver.
23.2.13 Key Locker
You can set whether to lock the front-panel keys.
Press > More > Key Locker to select "Locked" or "Unlocked".
Locked: indicates that all menu keys of the oscilloscope (except the Touch Lock
key) are locked.
Unlocked: unlocks the front-panel keys.
System Utility Function Setting
370
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
23.2.14 Quick Operation
You can set the shortcut functions for the key on the front panel.
Press > More > Quick settings to enter the quick key operation menu. You can
also enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the
lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Quick"
icon to open the quick key setting menu.
The Quick key includes the following five shortcut functions:
1. Image Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Image", press on the front panel to
capture the screen.
- Operation type
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Save
Image". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the type.
- Image format
Press Format, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the image
format. You can also press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the image format. The available image formats include "*.png", "*.bmp",
"*.jpg", and "*.tif".
- Invert
Press Invert continuously to enable or disable the invert function.
- Color
Press Color continuously to set the color of the saved image to "Color" or
"Gray".
2. Waveform Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Wave", press on the front panel to
save the waveform.
- Operation type
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
371
background
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Save
Wave". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the type.
- Data source
Press Data Source continuously to select "Memory" or "Screen" as the source
of the saved waveform.
- Format
Press Format and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform
format. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. When the data source is
"Memory", the available formats are "*.bin" and "*.csv". When the data source is
"Memory", the available formats are "*.bin", "*.csv", and "*wfm".
- Storage channel
If the data source is "Memory", you need to set the storage channel. Press
Channel, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the storage channel.
You can also press Channel continuously or enable the touch screen to select
the channel. The available storage channels include CH1-CH4.
3. Setup Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Setup", press on the front panel to
save the setup of the oscilloscope.
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Save Setup".
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the type. You do not need to set relevant
parameters.
4. All Measurement
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "All Measure", press on the front panel
to measure all the parameters of the current measurement source.
- Operation type
Press
Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "All
Measure". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the type.
System Utility Function Setting
372
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- All MeasurementPress All Measure, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select the desired measurement channel.
You can also press All Measure continuously to select or enable the touch
screen to tap the desired channel. The available measurement channels include
OFF and CH1-CH4.
5. Statistics Reset
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Stat Reset", press on the front panel to
make statistics reset of measurement or pass/fail test reset.
- Operation type
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Stat
Reset". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the type.
- Statistics Reset
Press Stat Reset and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
function that requires statistics reset. Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Stat Reset continuously to select among the options, or enable the
touch screen to tap the desired option. You can select "Measure" or "PassFail".
6. Print
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Print", press on the front panel to print
the screen image of the oscilloscope.
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Print". Press
down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the type.
7. Email
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Email", press on the front panel to send
the file through email.
Press
Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Email". Press
down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the type.
8. Record
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
373
background
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Record", press on the front panel to
record the waveform.
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Record".
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation continuously or
enable the touch screen to select the type.
9. Save Group
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Group", press on the front panel to
save group.
- Operation type
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Save
Group". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the type.
- Group
Set the Group parameter: press Group and then rotate the multifunction knob
to select "Save Image", "Save Wave", or "Save Setup". Press down the knob
to select the desired one. You can also press Group continuously to select it.
You can also directly enable the touch screen and tap to select it. You can select
any or all of the three items. The sign indicates that the item has been
selected, and indicates that the item has not been selected.
23.2.15 Screen Saver
When the oscilloscope enters the idle state and holds for a certain period of time, the
screen saver program will be enabled.
Press More > Screen Saver to enter the screen saver setting menu. Press Screen
Saver, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the screen saver type, and then
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Screen Saver continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The available screen saver types include "Off",
"Picture", and "Text". The screen saver program is disabled by default.
1. Select the Screen Saver
- If you select "Off" under Screen Saver, it indicates that the screen saver is
disabled.
System Utility Function Setting
374
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
- If you select "Picture" under Screen Saver, press Select Picture to select the file.
The available file types include "*.png", "*.bmp", "*.jpg", and "*.tif".
- If you select "Text" under Screen Saver, press Text, and then the filename input
interface is displayed, e.g. inputting "RIGOL Scope". For details, refer to
descriptions in "
To Create a Folder
".
2. Set the Wait Time
Press Time to Start, then directly rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-
up numeric keypad to input the screen saver time. The range available is from 1
min to 999 min.
3. Preview
Press Preview to view the set screen saver.
4. Default
Press Default to restore the screen saver to the default settings.
23.2.16 Self-check
The oscilloscope supports a variety of self-check functions, including keyboard check,
screen check, and touch screen check.
Press > More > More > Self Check to enter the self-check menu.
1. Key Test
Press Key Test to enter the keyboard test interface (virtual keypads of the front
panel). At this time, you can press the keys on the front panel to check whether the
virtual keys are highlighted. If yes, it indicates that the keys work normally; if no, it
indicates that there's something wrong with the keys. If the virtual key is not
illuminated, the key may fail to work. Press for three consecutive times to
exit the key test interface.
2. Screen Test
Press Screen Test to enter the screen test interface and check whether the
defective pixel exists. There are 15 screen test interfaces. Press to switch to
the next screen test interface. Press for three consecutive times to exit the
screen test interface.
3. Touch Test
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
375
background
Press Touch Test to enter the touch screen test interface first, as shown in the
figure below. Slide with your finger on the screen. If there is a line displaying at the
empty area where you slide on the screen and the box that you tap turns out to be
filled with green background, it indicates that the touch function of this area is
normal.
Then press to switch to the next touch screen test interface, as shown in the
figure below. At this time, you can pinch or stretch the icons on RIGOL to zoom out
or zoom in icons to check whether the gestures work normally. Press
for
three consecutive times to exit the touch test interface.
23.2.17 System Time
The system time is displayed at the lower-right side of the screen in "hh:mm
(hour:minute)" format. When you save the waveform, the output file will contain the
time information.
System Utility Function Setting
376
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Press > More > More > Time to open the time setting menu.
1. Set the System Time
a. Press Show Time continuously to open or close the system time interface.
b. Set "year": Press Year, rotate the multifunction knob directly to set it or use
the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
c. Set "month": Press Month, rotate the multifunction knob directly to set it or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
d. Set "day": Press Day, rotate the multifunction knob directly to set it or use
the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
e. Set "hour": Press Hour, rotate the multifunction knob directly to set it or use
the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
f. Set "minute": Press Minute, rotate the multifunction knob directly to set it or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
The setting range of each item of the system time conforms to the convention.
- Year: 2017 to 2099
- Month: 01 to 12
- Date: 01 to 31 (28, 29, or 30)
- Hour: 00 to 23
- Minute: 00 to 59
- Second: 00 to 59
2. Apply the Currently Set System Time
Press Apply to validate the current settings. The time at the lower-right side of the
screen will be updated.
23.2.18 Default Option
Used for configuring the key.
System Utility Function Setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
377
background
Press > More > More > Default Option to enter the default option menu.
Press Keep Impedance to enable or disable the impedance keep function. If you
select ON, after you press , the impedance value that you set remains
unchanged and other settings will be restored to the default settings. If you select
OFF, after you press , the impedance value will be restored to its default value
1 MΩ.
System Utility Function Setting
378
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
24
Remote Control
The following ways of remote control are supported:
User-defined Programming
Users can program and control the instrument by using the SCPI (Standard
Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. For details about the
SCPI commands and programming, refer to
Programming Guide
of this product
series.
PC software
Users can use the PC software to send commands to control the instrument
remotely. RIGOL Ultra Sigma is recommended. You can download the software
from RIGOL official website (
http://www.rigol.com
).
Operation Procedures:
- Set up communication between the instrument and PC.
- Run Ultra Sigma and search for the instrument resource.
- Open the remote command control panel to send commands.
Web Control
This instrument supports Web Control. Connect the instrument to the network,
then input the IP address of the instrument into the address bar of the browser
of your computer. The web control interface is displayed. Click Web Control to
enter the web control page. Then you can view the display of the real-time
interface of the instrument. Through the Web Control method, you can migrant
the device control to the control terminals (e.g. PC, Mobile, iPad, and other smart
terminals) to realize remote control of the instrument. When you first log in to
the Web Control, the user name is "admin" and password is "rigol".
VNC Control
This instrument supports VNC control. The VNC client (VNC Viewer) can be
downloaded from its official website. When the VNC client is installed and your
instrument is connected to the network, open the VNC Viewer client and input
the IP address of the instrument into the VNC address bar. Then, you can view
the screen of the instrument and operate the instrument remotely.
This instrument can be connected to the PC via the USB, LAN, or GPIB interface to set
up communication and realize remote control through the PC. The remote control can
be realized by using SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
commands.
This chapter will illustrate how to use the RIGOL Ultra Sigma software to remotely
control the instrument via various interfaces. Note: When communicating with the PC
Remote Control
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
379
background
via GPIB, the instrument does not support large data transmission operation such as
screen shot and waveform reading.
CAUTION
Before setting up communication, please turn off the instrument to avoid causing
damage to the communication interfaces.
24.1 Remote Control via USB
1. Connect the device
Use the USB cable to connect the rear-panel USB DEVICE interface of the
instrument to the USB HOST interface of the PC.
2. Search for the device resource
Start up Ultra Sigma and the software will automatically search for the resource
currently connected to the PC via the USB interface. You can also click USB-TMC to
search for the resource.
3. View the device resource
The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory, and
the model number and USB interface information of the instrument will also be
displayed.
4. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the device resource name and select "SCPI Panel Control" to open the
remotely command control panel. Then you can send commands and read data
through the panel. For details about the SCPI commands and programming, refer
to the Programming Guide of this instrument.
24.2 Remote Control via LAN
1. Connect the device
Use the network cable to connect the instrument to your local area network (LAN).
2. Configure network parameters
Configure the network parameters of the instrument according to "
LAN
Configuration
".
3. Search for Search device resource
Start up Ultra Sigma and click LAN to open the panel as shown in the figure below.
Click Search and the software searches for the instrument resources currently
connected to the LAN and the resources found are displayed at the right section of
the window as shown in the figure below. Click OK to add it.
Remote Control
380
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Besides, you can input the IP address of the instrument manually into the text field
under "Manual Input LAN Instrument IP", then click TEST. If the instrument passes
the test, click ADD to add the instrument to the LAN instrument resource list in the
right section; if the instrument fails the test, please check whether the IP address
that you input is correct, or use the auto search method to add the instrument
resource.
4. View the device resource
The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory.
5. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the device resource name and select "SCPI Panel Control" to open the
remotely command control panel. Then you can send commands and read data
through the panel.
6. Load LXI webpage
As this instrument conforms to LXI CORE 2011 DEVICE standards, you can load LXI
web page through Ultra Sigma (right-click the instrument resource name and
select "LXI-Web"). Various important information about the instrument (including
the model, manufacturer, serial number, description, MAC address, and IP address)
will be displayed on the web page. You can also directly input the IP address of the
instrument in the address bar of the PC browser to load the LXI web page.
24.3 Remote Control via GPIB
1. Connect the device
Use the USB-GPIB interface converter to extend the GPIB interface for the
instrument, and then use the GPIB cable to connect the instrument to the PC to
realize remote control.
2. Install the driver of GPIB card
Correctly install the driver of the GPIB card which has been connected to the PC.
3. Set the GPIB address
Remote Control
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
381
background
Click or tap the Notification Area at the lower-right corner of the screen, then the
Utility menu is displayed. Click or tap IO, and then click or tap the input field of
GPIB to input the GPIB address with the pop-up numeric keypad.
4. Search for the device resource
Start Ultra Sigma, and then click GPIB. A window is displayed as shown in
Figure
24.1
. Click Search and the software searches for the instrument resource currently
connected to the PC via the GPIB interface. The resource found is displayed at the
right side of the window, as shown in
Figure 24.2
. Click OK to add it.
Figure 24.1 Search for the Available Device
Figure 24.2 Confirm the Available Device
5. View the device resource
Click OK to go back to the main interface of Ultra Sigma. The searched instrument
resource will be displayed under the directory of "RIGOL Online Resource".
6. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the device resource name. In the displayed menu, select "SCPI Panel
Control" to open the programming command control panel. Then you can input
commands to send commands and read data.
Remote Control
382
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
25
Troubleshooting
1. When I power on the instrument, the instrument stays black and does not
display anything.
a. Check whether the power supply has been connected correctly.
b. Check whether the power key is really pressed.
c. Check whether the fuse is blown. If you need to replace the fuse, use only the
specified fuse that conforms to the product.
d. Restart the instrument after finishing the above inspections.
e. If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.
2. The USB storage device cannot be recognized.
a. Check whether the USB storage device can work normally when connected to
other instruments or PC.
b. Make sure that the USB storage device is FAT32 format and flash type. The
instrument doesn't support hardware USB storage device.
c. After restarting the instrument, insert the USB storage device again to check
whether it can work normally.
d. If the USB storage device still cannot work normally, please contact RIGOL.
3. How do you set the amplitude of the waveform in dBm?
a. Select the desired channel.
b. In the channel setting interface, check whether HighZ under OutputSet is set to
"On". If yes, you cannot set the amplitude of the waveform in dBm at this time.
Select "Off" to disable the HighZ, and use the numeric keypad, the arrow keys,
and knob to set it to a proper value.
c. Select the desired waveform, tap the Amplitude menu label, and then input the
desired value by using the numeric keypad. Then select the unit "dBm" from the
pop-up menu.
4. The touch-enabled operation does not work.
a. Check whether you have locked the touch screen. If yes, unlock the touch
screen.
b. Check whether the screen or your finger is stained with oil or sweat. If yes,
please clean the screen or dry your hands.
Troubleshooting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
383
background
c. Check whether there is a strong magnetic field around the instrument. If the
instrument is close to the strong magnetic field (e.g. a magnet), please move
the instrument away from the magnet field.
d. If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.
Troubleshooting
384
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
26
Appendix
26.1 Appendix A: Options and Accessories
Order Information Order No.
Model
2 GHz, 10 GSa/s, 500 Mpts, 4+16 CH MSO MSO8204A
1.5 GHz, 10 GSa/s, 500 Mpts, 4+16 CH MSO MSO8154A
750 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 500 Mpts, 4+16 CH MSO MSO8074A
Standard Accessories
USB Cable CB-USBA-USBB-FF-150
Passive HighZ Probe x4 (500 MHz) RP3500A
MSO8204A: Passive Low-impedance Probe x2 (1.5 GHz)
MSO8154A: Passive Low-impedance Probe x2 (1.5 GHz)
RP6150A
Front Protective Cover MSO8000-FPC
Power Cord Conforming to the Standard of the Destination
Country
-
Recommended Accessories
16-channel Logic Analyzer Probe RPL2316
Active Single-ended/Differential Probe (2.5 GHz BW) PVA7250
Active Differential Probe (1.5 GHz BW) RP7150
Active Differential Probe (800 MHz BW) RP7080
Active Single-ended Probe (1.5 GHz BW) RP7150S
Active Single-ended Probe (800 MHz BW) RP7080S
Rack Mount Kit RM6041
Near-field Probe NFP-3
Power Analysis Phase Difference Correction Jig RPA246
Digital Oscilloscope Demonstration Plate DK-DS6000
USB-GPIB Adaptor USB-GPIB
Bandwidth Upgrade Option
Bandwidth upgrades from 750 MHz to 1.5 GHz MSO8000A-BW7T15
Bandwidth upgrades from 750 GHz to 2 GHz MSO8000A-BW7T20
Bandwidth upgrades from 1.5 GHz to 2 GHz MSO8000A-BW15T20
Single-Channel 3 GHz Bandwidth Upgrade Option MSO8000A-BW20T30
Bundle Option
Function and application bundle option, including
MSO8000-COMP, MSO8000-EMBD, MSO8000-AUTO,
MSO8000-FLEX, MSO8000-AUDIO, MSO8000-AERO,
MSO8000-AWG, MSO8000-JITTER and MSO8000-PWR
MSO8000-BND
Serial Protocol Analysis Option
Appendix
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
385
background
Order Information Order No.
PC Serial Bus Trigger and Analysis (RS232/UART) MSO8000-COMP
Embedded Serial Bus Trigger and Analysis (I2C, SPI) MSO8000-EMBD
Auto serial bus trigger and analysis (CAN, CAN-FD, LIN) MSO8000-AUTO
FlexRay serial bus trigger and analysis (FlexRay) MSO8000-FLEX
Audio Serial Bus Trigger and Analysis (I2S) MSO8000-AUDIO
MIL-STD-1553 Bus Trigger and Analysis (MIL-STD-1553) MSO8000-AERO
Measurement Application Option
Dual-channel 25 MHz Arbitrary Waveform Generator MSO8000-AWG
Built-in Power Analysis (Required to Purchase the RPA246
Phase Deviation Correction Jig)
MSO8000-PWR
Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) MSO8000-JITTER
NOTE
For all the accessories and options, please contact the local office of RIGOL.
26.2 Appendix B: Warranty
RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. (hereinafter referred to as RIGOL) warrants that the
product mainframe and product accessories will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship within the warranty period. If a product proves defective within the
warranty period, RIGOL guarantees free replacement or repair for the defective
product.
To get repair service, please contact your nearest RIGOL sales or service office.
There is no other warranty, expressed or implied, except such as is expressly set forth
herein or other applicable warranty card. There is no implied warranty of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Under no circumstances shall
RIGOL be liable for any consequential, indirect, ensuing, or special damages for any
breach of warranty in any case.
Appendix
386
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Index
Special Characters
-Duty
174
-SlewRate
180
-Width
174
+Duty
174
+SlewRate
180
+Width
174
A
AM
VIII
,
316
Area
181
Auto IP
360
B
Blackman-Harris
146
Burst
VIII
,
321
C
Channel Delay
II
,
57
D
Delay
176
Domain Name Server
361
Dots
297
Duty Cycle
304
E
ECG
VIII
,
307
End Keep
320
EOF error
242
Exp.Fall
VIII
,
307
Exp.Rise
VIII
,
306
F
Fall Time
174
Falling Edge Count
176
Flattop
147
FM
VIII
,
317
Frequency
174
Frequency Deviation
318
FSK
VIII
,
318
G
Gauss
VIII
,
308
H
Hamming
146
Hanning
146
Haversine
VIII
,
310
Horizontal time base
II
,
60
I
I2S Trigger
IV
,
126
Index
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
387
background
Idle Time
109
Impedance
303
IP Address
360
L
Lorentz
VIII
,
309
M
MAC
361
Modulating Waveform
317
,
318
Modulation Depth
317
Modulation Frequency
317
,
318
N
Negative Pulse Count
175
O
Offset Calibration
II
,
57
Overshoot
180
P
Parity error
242
,
259
Pattern Setting
92
,
95
Peak
III
,
70
Period
174
Period Area
181
Phase
176
Positive Pulse Count
175
Preshoot
180
Pulse Width Setting
85
R
Rectangular
146
Rise Time
174
Rising Edge Count
175
RMS
180
S
Set the Gateway
361
Sinc
VIII
,
305
Start keep
320
Start Phase
302
Static IP
360
Subnet Mask
361
Sweep
VIII
,
319
Sweep Trigger Source
320
Symmetry
303
Sync
90
Sync error
260
T
The trigger sources of the burst
322
Triangle
147
Trigger Condition
86
Tvmax
174
Tvmin
174
V
Vamp
179
Vavg
179
Index
388
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
background
Vbase
179
Vector
297
Vertical Scale
II
,
48
Video Polarity
89
Video Standard
89
VISA
362
Vlower
179
Vmax
179
Vmid
179
Vmin
179
Vpp
179
Vtop
179
Vupper
179
W
Waveform Aliasing
71
Waveform Distortion
71
Waveform Leakage
72
Window Trigger
III
,
101
X
X Cursor
187
Y
Y Cursor
187
Index
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
389
background

Specifications

Rigol MSO8074A Questions and Answers